Home

EN / ACS550-01/U1 User`s Manual

Contents

1. Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 4021 2 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4022 SLEEP SELECTION 6 7 1 0 NOT SEL 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm 0 0 Hz 0 rpm 4024 SLEEP DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 15 60 05 4025 WAKE UP DEV Unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 0 0 4007 4026 WAKE UP DELAY 0 00 60 00 s 0 01 s 0 50 s 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET 6 14 1 0 SET 1 Group 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 4101 0 1 100 0 0 1 1 0 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1 3600 0 s 0 15 60 05 4103 DERIVATION TIME 0 0 10 0s 0 15 0 05 4104 PID DERIV FILTER 0 0 10 05 0 15 1 06 4105 ERROR VALUE INV 0 1 YES 1 0 NO 4106 UNITS 0 127 1 4 96 4107 UNIT SCALE 0 4 1 1 4108 0 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4106 and 0 0 4107 4109 10096 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4106 and 100 0 4107 4110 SET POINT SEL 0 2 8 17 19 20 1 1 11 Y 4111 INTERNAL SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par 4106 and 40 0 4107 4112 SETPOINT MIN 500 0 500 0 0 1 0 0 4113 SETPOINT 500 0 500 0 0 1 100 0 4114 FBK SEL 1 13 1 1 ACT1 4115 FBK MULTIPLIER 0 000 NOT SEL 32 768 32 767 0 001 0 000 NOT SEL 4116 1 INPUT 1 7 1 2 12 v 4117 2 INPUT 1 7 1 2 12 4118 1 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4119 1 MAXIMUM
2. 92 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Range Resolution Default User 0114 RUN TIME R 0 9999 h 1h 0115 KWH COUNTER R 0 65535 kWh 1 kWh 0116 BLK OUTPUT 0 0 100 0 0 0 600 096 for torque 0 196 0118 Di 1 3 STATUS 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0119 Di 4 6 STATUS 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0120 1 0 0 100 0 0 1 0121 2 0 0 100 0 0 1 0122 1 3 STATUS 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0123 4 6 STATUS 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0124 01 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 0125 Ao2 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 0126 PID 1 OUTPUT 1000 0 1000 0 0 1 0127 2 OUTPUT 100 0 100 0 0 1 0128 PID 1 SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par 4006 4106 and 4007 4107 0129 PID 2 SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 4207 0130 1 FBK Unit and scale defined by par 4006 4106 and 4007 4107 0131 2 FBK Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 4207 0132 PID 1 DEVIATION Unit and scale defined by par 4006 4106 and 4007 4107 0133 PID 2 DEVIATION Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 4207 0134 RO WORD 0 65535 1 0135 VALUE 1 32768 32767 1 0136 VALUE 2 32768 32767 1 0137 PROCESS VAR 1 1 0138 PROCESS VAR 2 1 0139 PROCESS VAR 3 1 0140 TIME 0 00 499 99 kh 0 01 kh 0141 MWH COUNTER 0 65535 MWh 1 MWh 0142 R
3. CES EXON CELA Notes 1 Set switch J2 to OFF ON position would make the See Note 3 network active pull up amp pull down BIAS resistors 2 I8 A CJ are on board the drive 2 Tie shield wires together at the drive Do NOT See Note 4 Reference terminate at SCR Common 3 Terminate the shield ONLY at the Ground terminal in the controller 4 Terminate the AGND wire at the Reference terminal in the controller Controller For configuration information see the following sections Communication set up EFB on page 205 Activate drive control functions EFB on page 207 The appropriate EFB protocol specific technical data For example Modbus protocol technical data on page 215 Communication set up EFB Serial communication selection To activate the serial communication set parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL 1 STD MODBUS Note If you cannot see the desired selection on the panel your drive does not have that protocol software in the application memory Embedded fieldbus 206 Serial communication configuration ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Setting 9802 automatically sets the appropriate default values in parameters that define the communication process These parameters and descriptions are defined below In particular note that the station
4. Max load Cu cable Max load Al cable Max load Cu wire size current current current A mm A mm A AWG kcmil 14 3x1 5 22 8 14 20 3x2 5 27 3 12 27 3x4 36 4 10 34 3x6 50 1 8 47 3x10 68 3 6 62 3x16 61 3x25 86 5 4 79 3x25 75 3x35 100 3 98 3x35 91 3x50 118 2 119 3x50 117 3 70 137 1 153 3 70 143 3 95 155 1 0 186 3 95 165 3 120 178 2 0 215 3 120 191 3 150 205 3 0 249 3 150 218 3 185 237 4 0 284 3x185 257 3x240 264 250 MCM or 2 x 1 330 3x240 274 3x50 291 300 MCM or 2 x 1 0 285 2x 3x95 319 350 MCM or 2 x 2 0 Technical data ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 285 Ground connections For personnel safety proper operation and reduction of electromagnetic emission pick up the drive and the motor must be grounded at the installation site Conductors must be adequately sized as required by safety regulations Power cable shields must be connected to the drive PE terminal in order to meet safety regulations Power cable shields are suitable for use as equipment grounding conductors only when the shield conductors are adequately sized as required by safety regulations In multiple drive installations do not connect drive terminals in series Corner grounded TN systems A WARNING Do not attempt to install or remove the EMC filter screws EM1 EM3 F1 or F2 while power is applied to the drive s input terminals Corner grounded TN systems
5. 5 General safety 5 El ctrical satety sese ch bec d RA Gatien RR P as 5 Maintenance ovem M ed e Ve eed e ire s 6 Control of the drive and motor 7 Table of contents Contents of this manual Corripatibilily 2 e tee de 13 Intended 13 Intended audl nee ossi the hee ESSE 13 Installation Installation flow chart 2 2 440 2 ERE 15 Preparing for installation na nn naaa 16 Installing the driv6 5 5220 CLE ESSO RE RP 20 Start up control with I O and ID Run How to start the drive 37 How to control the drive through the I O interface 44 How to perform the ID 45 Control panels About control 47 Compatibility od anaes as 47 Assistant Control Panel 48 Basic Control Panel nine cet cea Neil at Ee BEL E ES 68 Application macros ABB Standard macto kee du SEA ae ae Mets 78 3 Wire maCro fis oles ee Bae me re Be ees odes Pug 79 Altern
6. R5 R6 1 f y Al I E Ja dini ed A eWo F1 C D 1 2 B Ic m am E H EB E e ae rT i Bron TES 966 GND too Power input Power output to motor E U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 F1 LI Fitter Connection 1 Optional braking Frame Terminal size labels Brake options R5 R6 UDC UDC Braking unit Chopper and resistor Power input Power output to motor U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 WARNING To avoid danger or damage to the drive on IT systems and corner grounded TN systems see section Disconnecting the internal EMC filter on page 27 Installation ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 27 Disconnecting the internal EMC filter On certain types of systems you must disconnect the internal EMC filter otherwise the system will be connected to ground potential through the EMC filter capacitors which might cause danger or damage the drive Note Disconnecting the internal EMC filter increases the conducted emission and reduces the drive EMC compatibility considerably The following table shows the installation rules for the EMC filter screws in order to connect or disconnect the filter depending on the system type and t
7. 213 feedback from drive 211 input reference sel activate 208 204 misc drive control activate 208 modbus actual values 223 PID control setpoint source activate 210 planfiltig seis ice act ated 204 profiles 2 216 reference scaling ABB drives profile 233 reference scaling DCU profile 233 relay output control activate 209 SOCUP alia cepere de ee ee ae 205 start stop direction control activate 207 state diagram 232 status 227 termination 205 EFB drive parameters 184 protocol parameter group 184 baud rate parameter 184 command words data parameters 112 config file faultcode 263 control profile parameter 184 CRC errors count parameter 184 fault Codes icol eR 263 fault function parameter 150 fault time 150 ok messages count parameter 184 parameters 184 185 parity 184 protocol id parameter 184 protocol select parameter 201 relay output word data parameter
8. 68 alarm 269 copy 75 direction of rotation 68 70 fault 69 259 260 how to do common tasks 69 main menu 69 Operation i 69 output mode 71 OVErVIEW llle 68 73 reference 72 Start Stop vss Sez fiw 70 control word ABB drives FBA description 248 EFB description 224 tte ce ped T 238 generic 256 cooling air TOW So Pek cau dec uA 301 fan maintenance triggers 147 heat 301 space requirement 301 copy mode Basic Control Panel 75 corner grounded TN system 285 warning about 6 warning about screws at EM1 25 warning about screws atF1 F2 26 correction source PID parameter 179 cover remove ccs hans eU eae 21 replace 22 ENG mim wx xw 36 cover top see hood CRC errors count parameter 183 crimp on ring 06 287 critical speeds avoiding parameter
9. Parameters 194 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Description 8119 IAAUTOCHNG LEVEL Sets an upper limit as a percent of output capacity for the autochange logic When the output from the PID PFC control block exceeds this limit autochange is prevented For example use this parameter to deny autochange when the Pump Fan system is operating near maximum capacity Autochange overview The purpose of the autochange operation is to equalize duty time between multiple motors used in a system At each autochange operation A different motor takes a turn connected to the ACS550 output the speed regulated motor The starting order of the other motors rotates The Autochange function requires External switchgear for changing the drive s output power connections Parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS value gt 0 Autochange is performed when The running time since the previous autochange reaches the time set by 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV The PFC input is below the level set by this parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Note The ACS550 always coasts to stop when autochange is performed In an autochange the Autochange function does all of the following see the figure Initiates a change when the running time since the last 100964 autochange reaches 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV and PFC PID output A A 4PFC ind 2PFC input is below limit 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Stops the spee
10. 271 internal enclosure fan 274 intervals vlc dates REIR 271 main fan 272 triggers parameter group 147 manuals list of ACS550 manuals 2 providing feedback 325 mapping actual value generic profile 257 EFB 216 materials erret re ere 308 maximum frequency 134 torque limit parameters 135 torque select parameter 134 mechanical angle data parameter 110 revolutions data parameter 110 minimum frequency 134 torque limit parameters 134 torque select parameter 134 319 modbus EFB addressing convention 216 EFB 6ollS s eoi eim 216 EFB discrete inputs 218 EFB holding registers 219 EFB input 219 EFB mapping details 216 EFB mapping summary 216 EFB supported features 215 EFB technical data 215 motor checking 30 compatibility 18 id run parameter 107 load curve break point frequency 149 load curve max fault parameter 149 load curve zero
11. 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Max ref Resultant ref Fieldbus 163 100 reference Max ref 100 163 Embedded fieldbus ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 237 Fieldbus adapter Overview The ACS550 can be set up to accept control from an external system using standard serial communication protocols When using serial communication the ACS550 can either receive all of its control information from the fieldbus or be controlled from some combination of fieldbus control and other available control locations such as digital or analog inputs and the control panel Fieldbus controller Fieldbus m Other devices HIT j Connect using either Standard embedded fieldbus EFB at terminals X1 28 32 fieldbus adapter module mounted in slot 2 option Rxxx Two basic serial communications configurations are available embedded fieldbus EFB See chapter Embedded fieldbus on page 203 fieldbus adapter With one of the optional modules in the drive s expansion slot 2 the drive can communicate to a control system using one of the following protocols PROFIBUS DP Ethernet Modbus TCP EtherNet IP EtherCAT PROFINET IO POWERLINK CANopen DeviceNet
12. 141 integration time parameter 141 proportional gain parameter 141 vectorspeed 106 Speed constant parameter 120 digital input selection parameter 120 parameters uae na ee ces 121 stall frequency fault parameter 150 function fault parameter 150 region ut ee ee Rea 150 time fault parameter 150 standards zie ae RE ES 309 22 2 14 309 marking 309 CSA marking 310 C Tick 0 310 EN 50178 cee RR eR 309 IEC 60664 1 309 IEC EN 60204 1 309 IEC EN 60529 309 IEC EN 61000 3 12 309 IEC EN 61800 3 309 IEC EN 61800 5 1 309 L 508G 309 UL Marking athe et 310 start parameter 136 aux motor PFC parameters 190 aux motor delay 191 control EFB 207 control 241 DC magnetizing time parameter 136 delay PFC parameter 199 delay parameter
13. 178 two wire sensor transmitter connection example 86 type code see type designation type designation 16 17 U ratio 145 UL CSA 5 310 underload curve see user load curve undervoltage automatic reset parameter 152 control enable parameter 133 ungrounded network see IT system units PID 171 unknown drive type fault code 264 unpacking 16 unsymmetrically grounded networks See corner grounded TN system user load curve parameter 166 fault cod font esd a Redes 264 frequency parameters 166 167 function parameter 166 mode 166 time parameter 166 torque parameters 166 167 Index 324 user parameter set 88 change control parameter 130 download 64 V vector speed mode 106 torque 106 version firmware 13 firmware parameter 66 155 loading package parameter 155 panel firmware 47 51 parameter table parameter 155 vibratio
14. No External Run Enable signal received Unused Embedded fieldbus ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 229 DCU profile The following tables describe the STATUS WORD content for the DCU profile DCU profile STATUS WORD See parameter 0303 Bit Name Value Status 0 READY 1 Drive is ready to receive start command 0 Drive is not ready 1 ENABLED 1 External run enable signal received 0 No external run enable signal received 2 STARTED 1 Drive has received start command 0 Drive has not received start command 3 RUNNING 1 Drive is modulating 0 Drive is not modulating 4 ZERO_SPEED 1 Drive is at zero speed 0 Drive has not reached zero speed 5 ACCELERATE 1 Drive is accelerating 0 Drive is not accelerating 6 DECELERATE 1 Drive is decelerating 0 Drive is not decelerating 7 AT_SETPOINT 1 Drive is at setpoint 0 Drive has not reached setpoint 8 LIMIT 1 Operation is limited by Group 20 LIMITS settings 0 Operation is within Group 20 LIMITS settings 9 SUPERVISION 1 A supervised parameter Group 32 SUPERVISION is outside its limits 0 All supervised parameters are within limits 10 REV_REF 1 Drive reference is in reverse direction 0 Drive reference is in forward direction 11 REV ACT 1 Drive is running in reverse direction 0 Drive is running in forward direction 12 PANEL LOCAL 1 Control is in
15. for monitoring when if the supervised signal exceeds a given limit The relay remains active until the supervised Case B A value drops below the low limit Energized 1 Case Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY 0 OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 UNDER or SUPRV2 UNDER Use for monitoring when if the supervised signal falls Operating data supervision using relay outputs when LO gt HI lowest limit HI 3203 is active initially and remains active A until the supervised parameter goes above the highest limit 3202 LO 3202 making that limit the active limit That limit remains Value of supervised parameter below a given limit The relay remains active until the LO gt HI supervised value rises above the high limit Note Case LO gt HI represents a special hysteresis with LO gt HI two separate supervision limits Active limit active until the supervised parameter goes below the lowest 3203 limit HI 3203 making that limit active Case A Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 OVER or SUPRV2 OVER Case A A Initially the relay is de energized It is energized whenever Energized 1 4 the supervised parameter goes above the active limit t E p Case B Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY 0 OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 UNDER or SUPRV2 UNDER Case B Initially the relay is energized It i
16. Code Description 1104 MIN A Sets the minimum for external reference 1 The minimum analog input signal as a percent of the full signal in volts or amperes corresponds to REF1 MIN in P 1105 Hz rpm MAX Parameter 1301 MINIMUM 11 or 1304 MINIMUM AI2 sets the minimum analog input signal These parameters reference and analog min and max settings provide scale and offset adjustment for the reference P 1104 Analog 1105 IREF1 MAX MIN input signal Sets the maximum for external reference 1 P 1301 P 1302 The maximum analog input signal as a percent of full or 1304 or 1305 the signal in volts or amperes corresponds to REF1 in Hz rpm Ext ref Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM 11 or 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 sets A the maximum analog input signal P 1104 MIN P1105 MAX Analog T P 1301 P 1302 input signal or 1304 or 1305 1106 REF2 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF2 0 17 Same as for parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT 19 PID10UT The reference is taken from the PID1 output See Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 and Group 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 20 21 Same as for parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT 19 PID1 LIMIT used SELECT MAX 1107 1108 EFE 20 21 Ho _ 1107 1108 1107 2 MIN Sets the minimum for external reference 2 The minimum analog input signal in volts or amperes corresponds to REF2 MIN in
17. 1405 RO 1 OFF DELAY Defines the switch off delay for relay 1 Relay status e On off delays are ignored when relay output 1401 is set to tal m 1404 ON DELAY 1405 OFF DELAY 1406 RO 2 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 2 e See RO 1 ON DELAY 1407 RO 2 OFF DELAY Defines the switch off delay for relay 2 e See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1408 RO 3 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 3 e See RO 1 ON DELAY Parameters 126 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Description 1409 RO 3 OFF DELAY Switch off delay for relay 3 See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1410 1412 RELAY OUTPUT 4 6 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 4 6 what relay output 4 6 means Available if OREL 01 Relay Output Extension Module is installed See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1413 RO 4 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 4 See RO 1 ON DELAY 1414 RO 4 OFF DELAY Defines the switch off delay for relay 4 See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1415 RO 5 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 5 See RO 1 ON DELAY 1416 RO 5 OFF DELAY Defines the switch off delay for relay 5 See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1417 RO 6 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 6 See RO 1 ON DELAY 1418 RO 6 OFF DELAY Defines the switch off delay for relay 6 See RO 1 OFF DELAY
18. 144 high parameters 144 low 144 select parameter 144 C Tick marking 310 current at fault history parameter 114 data 108 max limit 133 measurement fault code 262 rating code 17 D date see time and date setting Assistant Control Panel DC brake time parameter 137 bus voltage data parameter 108 current ref parameter 137 magnetizing time parameter 136 overvoltage fault code 261 undervoltage faultcode 261 voltage stabilizer parameter 146 315 deceleration parameter 139 at aux start PFC parameter 200 emergency time parameter 140 ramp select parameter 139 ramp shape parameter 139 ramp time PFC parameter 200 ramp zero select parameter 140 time parameter 139 default values listing for macros 89 listing for parameters 91 derating adjustment 280 altitude uti 280 single phase supply 280 s
19. 155 input power cable wire requirements 284 disconnecting device disconnecting means 281 specifications 281 input power connection 286 lugs for RE us Gaal eee 287 terminal 286 815 tunt xS d 286 installation Check lIStz is s te Exe ai 35 compatibility 18 environment 18 flow Chart omite zar ome ee 15 location 19 mounting drive 22 preparation 16 procedures 15 LOOMS Big A 18 wiring 2 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual insulation 30 integration time PID parameter 171 integration time parameter 141 interlocks parameter 195 internal setpoint PID parameter 173 Internet information 325 IR compensation frequency 145 145 voltage 145 isolation between AC power source and drive 281 IT system connections 286 warning about filters
20. 248 diagnostics 245 drive 244 fieldbus control activate 241 input reference sel activate 242 installation cee eee 240 PID control setpoint source activate 244 planning nk RR ne ee aden RD 239 reference io obe eee 239 relay output control activate 243 Setups LER REY re A 241 start stop direction control activate 241 state diagram ABB drives 251 status word o recua soki nata u llle 239 status word ABB drives 249 FBA drive parameters 182 ext comm module parameter group 182 command words data parameters 112 config file CPI firmware revision parameter 182 config file id revision parameter 182 config file revision parameter 182 fault function parameter 150 fault time parameter 150 fieldbus appl program revision parameter 182 fieldbus CPI firmware revision parameter 182 fieldbus parameter refresh parameter 182 fieldbus parameters 182 fieldbus status parameter 182 fieldbus type parameter 182 protocol select parameter 201 relay output word data parameter 109 status words data parameters 112 values data parameter 109 feedback mu
21. Fault Fault name in Description and recommended corrective action code panel 1000 PAR HZRPM Parameter values are inconsistent Check for any of the following e 2001 MINIMUM SPEED gt 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED e 2007 MINIMUM FREQ gt 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 2001 MINIMUM SPEED 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED is outside proper range gt 50 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED is outside proper range gt 50 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside proper range gt 50 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside proper range gt 50 1001 PAR PFC REF Parameter values are inconsistent Check for the following NEG 2007 MINIMUM FREQ is negative when 8123 PFC ENABLE is active 1002 RESERVED Not used 1003 PAR Al SCALE Parameter values are inconsistent Check for any of the following 1301 MINIMUM AI1 gt 1302 MAXIMUM 11 1304 MINIMUM AI2 gt 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 1004 PAR AO SCALE Parameter values are inconsistent Check for any of the following 1504 MINIMUM AO1 gt 1505 MAXIMUM 1 1510 MINIMUM 2 gt 1511 MAXIMUM 2 Diagnostics ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 265 Fault code Fault name in panel Description and recommended corrective action 1005 PAR PCU 2 Parameter values for power control are inconsistent Improper motor nominal kVA or motor nominal power Check for the following 1 1 lt 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 9905 MOTOR N
22. PID 2 controller setpoint signal Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0130 PID 1 FBK PID 1 controller feedback signal Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0131 PID 2 FBK PID 2 controller feedback signal Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0132 PID 1 DEVIATION The difference between the PID 1 controller reference value and actual value Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0133 PID 2 DEVIATION The difference between the PID 2 controller reference value and actual value Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0134 COMM RO WORD Free data location that can be written from serial link Used for relay output control See parameter 1401 0135 COMM VALUE 1 Free data location that can be written from serial link Parameters 110 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Description 0136 COMM VALUE 2 Free data location that can be written from serial link 0137 PROCESS VAR 1 Process variable 1 Defined by parameters in Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY 0138 PROCESS VAR 2 Process variable 2 Defined by parameters in Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY 0139 PROCESS VAR 3 Process variable 3 Defined by parameters in Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY 0140 RUN TIME The drive s accumulated running time in thousands of hours kh Cannot be reset 0141 MWH COUNTER The drive s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours The
23. 23 config file CPI firmware revision parameter 182 fault code 263 id revision parameter 182 revision 182 connections control 28 Ok 28 EFB comm ta eae ee ed 204 FBA module 240 DN a Mth dest stave NE 28 constant speed see speed constant construction code 17 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual contamination levels environment limit 307 shipping limit 307 contrast control panel Assistant 54 control connection specifications 299 location data parameter 108 terminal specifications 300 through I O interface 44 control board overtemperature fault code 264 overtemperature fault parameter 151 temperature data parameter 110 control cable connections 28 requirements 299 control 47 cable requirements 300 comm error fault parameter 148 display bar graph 156 157 display decimal point form parameters 156 display max parameters 157 display min parameters 157 displa
24. 4110 SET POINT SEL Set 2 4210 SET POINT SEL Ext Trim 9 COMM AI1 10 COMM AI1 AM Communication fault When using fieldbus control specify the drive s action if serial communication is lost Drive parameter Value Description 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC O NOT SEL Set for appropriate drive response 1 FAULT 2 CONST SP7 3 LAST SPEED 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Set time delay before acting on a communication loss Embedded fieldbus ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 211 Feedback from the drive EFB Pre defined feedback Inputs to the controller drive outputs have pre defined meanings established by the protocol This feedback does not require drive configuration The following table lists a sample of feedback data For a complete listing see input word point object listings in the technical data for the appropriate protocol starting on page 275 Divo Modbus protocol reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 0102 SPEED 40102 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 40103 0104 CURRENT 40104 0105 TORQUE 40105 0106 POWER 40106 0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE 40107 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 40109 0301 FB CMD WORD1 bit 0 STOP 40301 bit 0 0301 FB CMD WORD1 1 bit 2 REV 40301 bit 2 0118 DI 1 3 STATUS bit 0 40118 Note With Modbus any parameter can be accessed using the format 4 fol
25. Fieldbus adapter ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 251 The state diagram below describes the start stop function of CONTROL WORD CW and STATUS WORD SW bits From any state Emergency Stop OFF3 CW Bit2 0 SW Bit5 0 NOSE From any state From any state Emergency Off OFF2 CW Bit1 0 peut OFF2 FAULT SW Bit3 1 ACTIVE SW Bit4 0 vu CW Bit7 1 n f 0 I Z V L L From any state OFF1 CW Bit0 0 MAINS OFF SW Bit6 1 SW Bit1 0 OFF1 INHIBITED ACTIVE n f 0 0 CW BitO 0 gt D NOT READY an TO SWITCH SW Bit0 0 CW Bit3 0 CW xxxx x1xx xxxx x110 OPERATION READY TO INHIBITED SWITCH ON ewes OPERATION INHIBITED CW xxxx x1xx xxxx x111 gt BCD READY TO SW Bitt 1 OPERATE CW Bit4 0 CW Bit3 1 and gt SW Bit12 1 OPERATION C D ENABLED SW 2 1 i A lt CW Bit5 0 x1xx xxx1 1111 gt RFG OUTPUT D ENABLED lt us CW xxxx 1 11 1111 Se State mm State change CW CONTROL WORD SW STATUS WORD RFG Ramp Function Generator Param 0104 CURRENT f Param 0103 OUTPUT FREQ n Speed RFG ACCELERATOR ENABLED C lt 1 CW xxxx x1xx x111 1111 OPERATING SW Bit8 1 D 544 Fieldbus adapter 252 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Reference As described earlier in section Control interface on page 238 the REFERENCE word is a
26. T REM T CHOICE Apply input power The control panel first asks if you want to use Do you want o the Start up Assistant use the start up assistant Press lt when is highlighted to run the Start up No Assistant EXIT 00 00 OK _ EXIT Press Cz if you do not want to run the Start up Assistant iahli OK i REM I CHOICE Press key lt 7 to highlight then press lt if you want to Show start up make the panel ask or not ask the question about running the assistant on 2 Assistant again the next time you switch on the power to No EXIT 00 00 OK SELECTING THE LANGUAGE If you decided to run the Start up Assistant the display then asks UPAR EDIT you to select the language Scroll to the desired language with 9901 LANGUAGE keys a Ty and press lt to accept ENGLISH If you press eA the Start up Assistant is stopped 00 00 SNE STARTING THE GUIDED SET UP The Start up Assistant now guides you through the set up tasks REM UPAR EDIT starting with the motor set up Set the motor data to exactly the 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT same value as on the motor nameplate 220 V Scroll to the desired parameter value with keys and SAVE 00 00 SAVE press lt to accept and continue with the Start up Assistant Note At any time if you press gt the Start up Assistant is stoppe
27. 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET Process PID PID1 has two separate sets of parameters PID set 1 and PID set 2 PID set 1 uses parameters 4001 4026 PID set 2 uses parameters 4101 4126 PID 1 PARAM SET defines which set is selected 0 sET 1 PID Set 1 parameters 4001 4026 is active 1 D11 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for PID Set selection Activating the digital input selects PID Set 2 De activating the digital input selects PID Set 1 2 6 012 016 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for PID Set selection See DI1 above 7 SET 2 PID Set 2 parameters 4101 4126 is active 8 11 TIMED FUNC 1 4 Defines the Timed function as the control for the PID Set selection Timed function de activated PID Set 1 Timed function activated PID Set 2 See Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 12 2 ZONE MIN The drive calculates the difference between setpoint 1 and feedback 1 as well as setpoint 2 and feedback 2 The drive will control the zone and select the set that has a larger difference A positive difference a setpoint higher than the feedback is always larger than a negative difference This keeps feedback values at or above the setpoint Controller does not react to the situation of feedback above setpoint if another zone s feedback is closer to its setpoint 13 2 ZONE MAX The drive calculates the difference between setpoint 1 and feedback 1 as well as setpoin
28. 6 294 warning about screws at 1 25 warning about screws atF1 F2 26 J jogging activation parameter 116 K keypad see control panel keypad reference select parameter 117 kWh counter data parameter 108 L label serial 16 type 16 language parameter 106 LED on Assistant Control Panel 48 259 260 on drive body 25 259 260 library document 325 limits parameter 133 load analyzer parameter 186 amplitude logger 1 distribution 187 amplitude logger 2 signal base value par 186 amplitude logger 2 signal parameter 186 amplitude logger 2 distribution 187 loggers reset date 187 loggers 187 loggers reset parameter 186 peak value logger filter time parameter 186 peak value logger signal parameter 186 peak value logger current at peak value 187 peak value logger detected peak value 186 peak value logger frequency at peak value 187 peak value logger peak value date 186 peak value logger peak value time 186 peak value logger voltage at peak value 187 load curve see user load curve load frequency see
29. COMP VOLT 0 0 100 0 V 0 1V Size dependent 2604 COMP FREQ 0 100 1 80 2605 U F RATIO 1 LINEAR 2 SQUARED 1 1 LINEAR 2606 SWITCHING FREQ 1 2 4 8 12 kHz 4 kHz 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL OFF 1 ON 1 1 ON 2608 ISLIP COMP RATIO 0 200 1 0 2609 NOISE SMOOTHING 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 DISABLE 2619 STABILIZER 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 DISABLE 2625 OVERMODULATION 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 DISABLE Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG 2901 COOLING FAN TRIG 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 0 disables 0 1 kh 0 0 kh 2902 COOLING FAN 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 1 kh 0 0 kh 2903 REVOLUTION TRIG 0 65535 Mrev 0 disables 1 Mrev 0 Mrev 2904 REVOLUTION ACT 0 65535 Mrev 1 Mrev 0 Mrev 2905 RUN TIME TRIG 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 0 disables 0 1 kh 0 0 kh 2906 RUN TIME ACT 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 1 kh 0 0 kh 2907 USER MWh TRIG 0 0 6553 5 MWh 0 0 disables 0 1 MWh 0 0 MWh 2908 USER MWh ACT 0 0 6553 5 MWh 0 1 MWh 0 0 MWh Group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS 3001 AIXMIN FUNCTION 0 3 1 NOT SEL 3002 PANEL COMM ERR 1 53 1 1 FAULT 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 6 6 1 NOT SEL 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 6 6 1 NOT SEL 3005 MOT THERM PROT 0 NOT SEL 1 FAULT 2 ALARM 1 1 FAULT 3006 THERM TIME 256 9999 s 1s 500 s 3007 MOT LOAD CURVE 50 150 1 100 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD 25 150 1 70 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ 1 250 Hz 1Hz 35 Hz 3010 STALL FUNCTION 0 NOT SEL 1 FAULT 2 ALARM 1 NOT SEL 3011
30. Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 167 Code Description 3713 LOAD FREQ 4 Defines the frequency value of the fourth load curve definition point Must be smaller than 3716 LOAD FREQ 5 3714 LOAD TORQ LOW 4 Defines the torque value of the fourth underload curve definition point e Must be smaller than 3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 Defines the torque value of the fourth overload curve definition point 3716 LOAD FREQ 5 Defines the frequency value of fifth load curve definition point 3717 LOAD TORQ LOW 5 Defines the torque value of the fifth underload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 Defines the torque value of the fifth overload curve definition point Correspondence with the obsolete underload supervision The now obsolete parameter 3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE provided five selectable curves shown in the figure The parameter characteristics were as described below Ifthe load drops below set curve for longer than ante the time set by parameter 804 3014 UNDERLOAD TIME M obsolete the underload protection is activated 60 Curves 1 3 reach maximum at the motor 40 5 rated frequency set by E parameter 9907 MOTOR 20 NOM FREQ Ty nominaltorque ofthe a u motor fr 2 4 fn fy nominal frequency of the motor If you want to em
31. Suitable environment and enclosure Confirm that the site meets the environmental requirements To prevent damage prior to installation store and transport the drive according to the environmental requirements specified for storage and transportation See section Ambient conditions on page 307 Installation ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 19 Confirm that the enclosure is appropriate based on the site contamination level IP21 UL type 1 enclosure The site must be free of airborne dust corrosive gases or liquids and conductive contaminants such as dripping water condensation carbon dust and metallic particles IP54 UL type 12 enclosure This enclosure provides protection from airborne dust and light sprays or splashing water from all directions If for some reason an IP21 drive needs to be installed without the conduit box or cover or an IP54 drive without the conduit plate or hood see the note in chapter Technical data page 310 Suitable mounting location Confirm that the mounting location meets the following constraints The drive must be mounted vertically on a smooth solid surface and in a suitable environment as defined above For horizontal installation contact your local ABB representative for more information The minimum space requirements for the drive are the outside dimensions see section Outside dimensions on page 304 plus air flow space around the drive see section Losses cooling data and n
32. comm value 1 data parameter comm value 2 data parameter control macro correction source parameter decimal point actual signal parameter derivation filter parameter derivation time parameter deviation data parameter error feedback inversion parameter external source activate parameter feedback multiplier parameter feedback select parameter feedback data parameter gain integration time parameter internal setpoint parameter offset output data parameter parameter set select parameter scaling 0 10096 parameters setpoint maximum parameter setpoint minimum parameter setpoint select parameter setpoint source EFB comm activate setpoint source FBA comm activate setpoint data parameter sleep delay parameter Sleep level parameter sleep selection parameter trim mode trim scale parameter units actual signal parameter wake up delay parameter wake up deviation parameter PID controller advanced lt b asic Set Up s ss get Ba A eee planning EFB comm power consumption MWh
33. selected with par 3408 Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 99 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 3411 JOUTPUT2 DSP FORM 0 9 1 9 DIRECT 3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT 0 127 1 Depends on the signal selected with par 3408 3413 OUTPUT2 MIN Depends on the signal selected with par 3408 3414 OUTPUT2 MAX Depends on the signal selected with par 3408 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM 100 NOT SELECTED 101 178 1 105 parameter 0105 TORQUE 3416 SIGNAL3 MIN Depends on the signal selected with par 3415 3417 SIGNAL3 MAX Depends on the signal selected with par 3415 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM 0 9 1 9 DIRECT 3419 DOUTPUTS UNIT 0 127 1 Depends on the signal selected with par 3415 3420 OUTPUT3 MIN Depends on the signal selected with par 3415 3421 OUTPUT3 Depends on the signal selected with par 3415 Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS 3501 SENSOR TYPE 0 6 1 O NONE 3502 SELECTION 1 8 1 1 A11 3503 ALARM LIMIT Par 3501 1 3 10 200 C 1 110 1500 ohm 0 Par 3501 4 0 5000 ohm Par 3501 5 6 0 1 3504 FAULT LIMIT Par 3501 1 3 10 200 1 130 4000 ohm 0 Par 3501 4 0 5000 ohm Par 3501 5 6 0 1 Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 3601 TIMERS ENABLE 6 7 1 0 NOT SEL 3602 START TIME 1 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3603
34. 1501 1 CONTENT SEL 135 COMM VALUE 1 Analog Output 1 controlled by writing to parameter 0135 0135 COMM VALUE 1 1502 1 CONTENT MIN Set appropriate Used for scaling i is values 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 1506 FILTER AO1 Filter time constant for 1 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 136 COMM VALUE 2 Analog Output 2 controlled by writing to parameter 0136 0136 COMM VALUE 2 1508 2 CONTENT MIN Set appropriate Used for scaling iK dis values 1511 MAXIMUM 2 1512 FILTER AO2 Filter time constant for 2 Fieldbus adapter 244 PID Control setpoint source ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Using the following settings to select the fieldbus as the setpoint source for PID loops Drive parameter Value Setting Protocol reference 4010 SET POINT SEL Set 1 4110 SET POINT SEL Set 2 9 COMM AI1 4210 SET POINT SEL Ext Tr im 10 COMM AI 8 COMM VALUE 1 AM Setpoint is input reference 2 Communication fault When using fieldbus control specify the drive s action if serial communication is lost Drive parameter Value Description 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 0 NOT SEL Set for appropriate drive 2 CONST SP7 3 LAST SPEED 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Set time delay before acting on a communication loss Feedback fro
35. 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET 4228 ACTIVATE 8126 TIMED AUTOCHNG You can use the Timed functions assistant for easy configuring For more information on the assistants see section Assistants mode on page 57 Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 163 Code Description 3601 TIMERS ENABLE Selects the source for the timer enable signal NOT SEL Timed functions are disabled 1 011 Defines digital input 011 as the timed function enable signal The digital input must be activated to enable the timed function 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the timed function enable signal 7 ACTIVE Timed functions are enabled 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the timed function enable signal This digital input must be de activated to enable the timed function e 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the timed function enable signal 3602 START TIME 1 Defines the daily start time 20 30 00 The time can be changed in steps of 2 seconds Time period 2 If parameter value is 07 00 00 the timer is activated 17 00 00 7 me Time period 4 The figure shows multiple timers on different 15 00 00 weekdays 13 00 00 12 00 00 Time period 3 10 30 00 Time period 1 09 00 00 00 00 00 Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun 3603 STOP TIME 1 Defines the daily stop time The
36. Defines the decimal point location for the first display parameter 2222500 ae ie 0 7 Defines the decimal point location Signed Enter the number of digits desired to the right of the decimal 1 3 1 519 point 2 3 14 See the table for an example using pi 3 14159 3 3 142 8 BAR METER Specifies a bar meter display 4 3 0 65535 9 DIRECT Decimal point location and units of measure are 5 3 1 Unsigned identical to the source signal See Group 01 OPERATING DATA 6 414 parameter listing in section Complete parameter list on page 91 7 3 132 for resolution which indicates the decimal point location and the units of measure 8 Bar meter displayed 9 Decimal point location and units as for the source signal Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 157 Code Description 3405 JOUTPUT1 UNIT Selects the units used with the first display parameter Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT DSP FORM 9 DIRECT O NOUNIT 9 18 MWh 27 36 1 5 45 54 b m 63 Mrev 1 A 10 Ib ft 19 m s 28 MGD 37 46 GPS 55 Ib h 64 d 2 V 11 mA 20 m3 h 29 inHg 38 I h 47 gal s 56 FPS 65 inWC 3 Hz 122 21 dm s 30 39 m3 s 48 galm 57 ft s 66 4 13 kW 22 bar 31 kb s 40 m m 49 gal h 58 inH20 67 Nm 5 s 14 W 23 kPa 32 kHz
37. EXIT 00 00 SEL 3 Select BACKUP INFO on the Par Backup menu with keys and lt 2 LOC UC BACKUP INFO and press The display shows the following information about the drive where the backup was made ee RATING A021 DRIVE TYPE type of the drive 3301 FIRMWARE DRIVE RATING rating of the drive in format XXXYZ where EXIT 00 00 XXX nominal current rating If present an A indicates Md SEDACKUP INFO a decimal point e g 4A6 means 4 6 A Y 2 2 200 V eee RATING 4 400 V 3301 FIRMWARE 6 600 V 300F hex e EXIT 00 00 Z i European loading package n US loading package FIRMWARE firmware version of the drive You can scroll the information with keys and S w 2 4 LOC UPAR BACKUP 1 Press r to return to the Par Backup menu BACKUP INFO DOWNLOAD FULL SET DOWNLOAD APPLICATION DOWNLOAD USER SET1 EXIT 00 00 SEL Control panels ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Settings mode In the I O Settings mode you can check the parameter settings related to any I O terminal 67 edit the parameter setting For example if 1103 REF1 is listed under Ain1 Analog input 1 that is parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT has value 11 you can change its value to e g Al2 You cannot however set the value of parameter 1106 REF2 SELECT to 11 Start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to edit and change paramete
38. Fieldbus control of various drive functions requires configuration to tell the drive to accept fieldbus control of the function define as a fieldbus input any drive data required for control define as a fieldbus output any control data required by the drive The following sections describe at a general level the configuration required for each control function The last column in each table below is deliberately blank See the user s manual supplied with the FBA module for the appropriate entry Start Stop Direction control Using the fieldbus for start stop direction control of the drive requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Drive parameter Value Description Protocol reference 1001 ExT1 10 COMM Start Stop controlled by fieldbus with COMMANDS Ext1 selected Fieldbus adapter 242 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Drive parameter Value Description Protocol reference 1002 ExT2 10 COMM Start Stop by controlled fieldbus with COMMANDS Ext2 selected 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Direction controlled by fieldbus Input reference select Using the fieldbus to provide input reference to the drive requires drive parameter value set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied reference word
39. 2 0 15 300 s A Trip time 600 s ra 0 5 folfarKk 0 Parameters 150 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Description 3010 STALL FUNCTION This parameter defines the operation of the Stall function This protection is active if the drive operates in the stall region see the figure for the time defined by 3012 STALL TIME The User Limit is defined in Group 20 LIMITS by 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 or the limit on the COMM input Torque 2 0 SEL Stall protection is not used Current 1 FAULT When the drive operates in the stall region for the time set by 3012 STALL TIME Stall region The drive coasts to stop 95 A fault indication is displayed 2 ALARM When the drive operates in the stall region for the time set by 3012 STALL TIME An alarm indication is displayed The alarm disappears when the drive is out of the stall region for User limit half the time set by parameter 3012 STALL TIME f 3011 STALL FREQUENCY P 3011 g This parameter sets the frequency value for the Stall function Refer to Stall frequency the figure 3012 STALL TIME This parameter sets the time value for the Stall function 3017 EARTH FAULT Defines the drive response if the drive detects a ground fault in the motor or motor cables The drive monitors for ground faults while the drive is running and w
40. Process actual value measurement 6 AGND 0 4 20 mA Rin 100 ohm X1 control board 10 424 V Auxiliary voltage output non isolated 11 GND 24 V DC 250 mA Application macros ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 87 Connection for obtaining 0 10 V from analog outputs To obtain 0 10 V from analog outputs connect a 500 ohm resistor or two 1 kohm resistors in parallel between the analog output and analog output circuit common AGND Examples for analog output 2 AO2 are shown in the figure below x1 gt 8 AO2 Analog output 2 Default output 0 20 mA 500 ohm Analog input circuit common Internally connected to chassis 9 AGND through 1 Mohm resistor x1 gt 8 AO2 Analog output 2 Default output 0 20 mA 2 1 kohm 1 kohm Analog input circuit common Internally connected to chassis 9 AGND through 1 Mohm resistor Application macros 88 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual User parameter sets In addition to the standard application macros it is possible to save two user parameter sets into the permanent memory and load them at a later time A user parameter set consists of the user parameter settings including Group 99 START UP DATA and the results of the motor identification The panel reference is also
41. Symbols Typical ratings Normal use 10 overload capability lon continuous rms current 10 overload is allowed for one minute in ten minutes Pn typical motor power in normal use The kilowatt power ratings apply to most IEC 4 pole motors The horsepower ratings apply to most 4 pole NEMA motors Heavy duty use 50 overload capability lhd continuous rms current 50 overload is allowed for one minute in ten minutes Phd typical motor power in heavy duty use The kilowatt power ratings apply to most IEC 4 pole motors The horsepower ratings apply to most 4 pole NEMA motors Sizing The current ratings are the same regardless of the supply voltage within one voltage range To achieve the rated motor power given in the table the rated current of the drive must be higher than or equal to the rated motor current Also note that the ratings apply for ambient temperature of 40 C 104 F the maximum allowed motor shaft power is limited to 1 5 Pha If the limit is exceeded motor torque and current are automatically restricted The function protects the input bridge of the drive against overload In multimotor systems the output current of the drive must be equal to or greater than the calculated sum of the input currents of all motors Technical data 280 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Derating The load capacity current and power decreases for certain situations as defined below In such situations whe
42. e coke eet cok carte un Xem ens 260 comm failure 210 current at history parameter 114 digital input status at history parameter 114 FBAcomm 244 frequency at history parameter 114 a ev y es 266 last history parameter 114 listing necu EET HUE 260 logging Assistant Control Panel 61 mode Assistant Control Panel 49 259 260 mode Basic Control Panel 69 259 260 previous history parameter 114 reset aod sea pao haver dU s a NIE 132 265 reset select parameter 129 speed at history parameter 114 status at history parameter 114 time of history parameters 114 torque at history parameter 114 voltage at history parameter 114 words data parameters 113 fault display alatis qu iod err dee eh EE deb de 260 fault iocur oe ix n es 259 fault 260 FB actual signals parameter group 112 FBA 1 237 FBA fieldbus 237 actual 239 analog output control activate 243 comm fault 244 configuration 241 control 238 control word ABB drives
43. 19 OPEX LINK Internal fault A communication related problem has been detected on the fiber optic link between the control and OINT boards Contact your local ABB representative 20 OPEX PWR Internal fault Exceptionally low voltage detected on the OINT power supply Contact your local ABB representative 21 CURR MEAS Internal fault Current measurement is out of range Contact your local ABB representative 22 SUPPLY PHASE Ripple voltage in the DC link is too high Check for and correct Missing mains phase Blown fuse Diagnostics ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Fault code Fault name in panel Description and recommended corrective action 23 ENCODER ERR The drive is not detecting a valid encoder signal Check for and correct Encoder presence and proper connection reverse wired channel A connected to terminal of channel B or vice versa loose connection or short circuit Voltage logic levels are outside of the specified range A working and properly connected Pulse Encoder Interface Module OTAC 01 Wrong value entered in parameter 5001 PULSE NR A wrong value will only be detected if the error is such that the calculated slip is greater than 4 times the rated slip of the motor Encoder is not being used but parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE 1 ENABLE 24 OVERSPEED Motor speed is greater than 120 of the larger in magnitude of 2
44. 3 8 ODD 1 8 data bits odd parity one stop bit 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE When this protocol is selected the Selects the communication profile used by the default value for this parameter is 0 EFB protocol 0 ABB DRV Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACS400 1 DCU PROFILE Operation of Control Status Words conforms to 32 bit DCU Profile 2 ABB DRV FULL Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACS600 800 Note After any changes to the communication settings the protocol must be reactivated by either cycling the drive power or by clearing and then restoring the station Id 5302 Embedded fieldbus ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 207 Activate drive control functions EFB Controlling the drive Fieldbus control of various drive functions requires configuration to tell the drive to accept fieldbus control of the function define as a fieldbus input any drive data required for control define as a fieldbus output any control data required by the drive The following sections describe at a general level the configuration required for each control function For the protocol specific details see the document supplied with the FBA module Start Stop Direction control Using the fieldbus for start stop direction control of the drive requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controll
45. 5320 EFB PAR 20 ABB Drives profile ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL Status Word Read only copy of the Fieldbus Status Word Parameters 186 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Group 64 LOAD ANALYZER This group defines the load analyzer which can be used for analyzing the customer s process and sizing the drive and the motor The peak value is logged at 2 ms level and the distribution loggers are updated on 0 2 s 200 ms time level Three different values can be logged 1 Amplitude logger 1 The measured current is logged continuously The distribution as a percentage of the nominal current oy is shown in ten classes 2 Peak value logger One signal in group 1 can be logged for the peak maximum value The peak value of the signal peak time time when the peak value was detected as well the frequency current and DC voltage at the peak time are shown 3 Amplitude logger 2 One signal in group 1 can be logged for amplitude distribution The base value 100 value can be set by the user The first logger cannot be reset The other two loggers can be reset by a user defined method They are also reset if either of the signals or the peak value filter time is changed Code Description 6401 PVL SIGNAL Defines by number the signal logged for the peak value Any parameter number in Group 01 OPERATING DATA can be selected Eg 102 parameter 0102 SPEED 100 NOT SELECTED No signal par
46. Check the installation See the checklist in chapter nstallation page 35 SAFETY The start up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician The safety instructions given in chapter Safety instructions must be followed during the start up procedure The drive will start up automatically at power up if the external run command is on Start up control with I O and ID Run 38 Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger De couple the driven machine if ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation or an ID Run needs to be performed during the drive start up ID Run is essential only in applications that require the ultimate in motor control accuracy POWER UP Apply input power The Basic Control Panel powers up into the Output mode The Assistant Control Panel asks if you want to run the Start up Assistant If you press 252 the Start up Assistant is not run and you can continue with manual start up in a similar manner as described below for the Basic Control Panel MANUAL ENTRY OF START UP DATA Group 99 START UP DATA If you have an Assistant Control Panel select the language the Basic Control Panel does not support languages See parameter 9901 for the values of the available language alternatives You find parameter descriptions in section Complete parameter descriptions starting
47. Defines the source for actual value 2 ACT2 See also parameter 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM 1 AI Uses analog input 1 for ACT2 2 AI2 Uses analog input 2 for ACT2 3 CURRENT Uses current for ACT2 4 TORQUE Uses torque for ACT2 5 POWER Uses power for ACT2 6 COMM ACT 1 Uses value of signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 for ACT2 7 COMM ACT 2 Uses value of signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 for ACT2 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM Sets the minimum value for ACT1 Scales the source signal used as the actual value ACT1 defined by parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT For parameter 4016 values 6 COMM ACT 1 and 7 COMM ACT 2 scaling is not done ACT1 96 P 4019 Par 4016 Source Source min Source max 1 Analog input 1 1301 MINIMUM 11 1302 MAXIMUM 11 P 4018 B 2 Analog input 2 1304 MINIMUM 12 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 Source min Source max 3 Current 0 2 nominal current Source signal 4 Torque 2 nominal torque 2 nominal torque 5 Power 2 nominal power 2 nominal power ACT1 96 A See the figure A Normal B Inversion ACT1 MINIMUM gt ACT1 P 4018 MAXIMUM 4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM Sets the maximum value for ACT1 See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM P 4019 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM Sets the minimum value for ACT2 See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM pe Source min Sourc 4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM Source signal Sets th
48. If you need to change the direction of rotation check that parameter 1003 is set to 3 REQUEST Ensure that the control connections are wired according to the connection diagram given for the ABB Standard macro Ensure that the drive is in remote control Press key to switch between remote and local control Start by switching digital input DI1 on Assistant Control Panel The arrow starts rotating It is dotted until the setpoint is reached Basic Control Panel Text FWD starts flashing fast and stops after the setpoint is reached Regulate the drive output frequency motor speed by adjusting the voltage of analog input Al1 CHANGING THE DIRECTION OF ROTATION OF TH Reverse direction Switch digital input DI2 on Forward direction Switch digital input DI2 off STOPPING THE MOTOR Switch digital input DI1 off The motor stops Assistant Control Panel The arrow stops rotating Basic Control Panel Text FWD starts flashing slowly See section ABB Standard macro on page 78 In remote control the panel display shows text REM STARTING AND CONTROLLING THE SPEED OF THE MOTOR 00 OUTPUT FwD a OUTPUT FWD E MOTOR OUTPUT REV OUTPUT FWD z 00 a OUTPUT FWD Start up control with I O and ID Run ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 45 How to perform the ID Run The drive estimates motor characteristics automatically using i
49. Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 127 Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS This group defines the drive s analog current signal outputs The drive s analog outputs can be any parameter in Group 01 OPERATING DATA limited to programmable minimum and maximum values of output current scaled and or inverted by defining the minimum and maximum values of the source parameter or content Defining an maximum value parameter 1503 or 1509 that is less than the content minimum value parameter 1502 or 1508 results in an inverted output filtered Code Description 1501 1 CONTENT SEL Defines the content for analog output AO 1 99 EXCITE Provides a current source for sensor type Output 1 6 mA See Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS 100 EXCITE PT100 Provides a current source for sensor type PT100 Output 9 1 mA See Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS 101 178 Output corresponds to a parameter in Group 01 OPERATING DATA e Parameter defined by value value 102 parameter 0102 1502 1 CONTENT MIN mA Sets the minimum content value 1505 3 Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501 P 1511 Minimum value refers to the minimum content value that will be converted to an analog output These parameters content and current min and max settings provide scale and offset adjustment for the output See the figure P 15
50. REVOLUTION TRIG Sets the trigger point for the motor s accumulated revolutions counter Value is compared to parameter 2904 value 0 Disables the trigger 2904 REVOLUTION ACT Defines the actual value of the motor s accumulated revolutions counter When parameter 2903 has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2903 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 Resets the parameter 2905 RUN TIME TRIG Sets the trigger point for the drive s run time counter Value is compared to parameter 2906 value 0 0 Disables the trigger 2906 RUN TIME ACT Defines the actual value of the drive s run time counter When parameter 2905 has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2905 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 0 Resets the parameter 2907 USER MWh TRIG Sets the trigger point for the drive s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours counter Value is compared to parameter 2908 value 0 0 Disables the trigger 2908 USER MWh ACT Defines the actual value of the drive s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours counter When parameter 2907 has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined b
51. Supply cable Check the insulation of the supply input cable according to local regulations before connecting to the drive Motor and motor cable Check the insulation of the motor and motor cable as follows Check that the motor cable is connected to the motor and disconnected from the drive output terminals U2 V2 and W2 Measure the insulation resistance between phase conductors and between each phase conductor and the Protective Earth conductor using a measuring voltage of 1000 V DC The insulation resistance of an ohm ABB motor must exceed 100 Mohm reference value at 25 C or 77 F For the insulation resistance of other motors please consult the manufacturer s instructions Note Moisture inside the motor casing will reduce the insulation resistance If moisture is suspected dry the motor and repeat the measurement Install the wiring box See section Conduit Gland kit on page 23 X0004 Installation ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual On the input power cable strip the sheathing back far enough to route individual wires On the motor cable strip the sheathing back far enough to expose the copper wire shield so that the shield can be twisted into a bundle pig tail Keep the bundle not longer than five times its width to minimize noise radiation 360 grounding under the clamp is recommended for the motor cable to minimize noise radiation In this case remove the sheathing at the cable
52. The rated fuse currents given in the tables are the maximums for the mentioned fuse types If smaller fuse ratings are used check that the fuse rms current rating is larger than the input current Technical data 282 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Check that the operating time of the fuse is below 0 5 seconds The operating time depends on the fuse type the supply network impedance as well as the cross sectional area material and length of the supply cable In case the 0 5 seconds operating time is exceeded with the gG or T fuses ultra rapid aR fuses will in most cases reduce the operating time to an acceptable level Fuses 208 240 V drives ACS550 x1 Input current Input power mains fuses see below A IEC 60269 gG A ULClassT A Bussmann type 04A6 2 4 6 10 10 JJS 10 06A6 2 6 6 07A5 2 7 5 012A 2 11 8 16 15 JJS 15 017A 2 16 7 25 25 JJS 25 024A 2 24 2 30 JJS 30 031A 2 30 8 40 40 JJS 40 046A 2 46 2 63 60 JJS 60 059A 2 59 4 80 JJS 80 075A 2 74 8 80 100 JJS 100 088A 2 88 0 100 110 JJS 110 114A 2 114 125 150 JJS 150 143A 2 143 200 200 JJS 200 178A 2 178 250 250 JJS 250 221A 2 221 315 300 JJS 300 248A 2 248 350 JJS 350 Fuses 380 480 V drives 00467918 xls C ACS550 x1 Input current Input power mains fuses see below A IEC 60269 gG A UL
53. digital outputs outputs Digital inputs input impedance 1 5 kohm Maximum voltage for digital inputs is Max contact voltage 30 V DC 250 VAC Max contact current power 6 A 30 V DC 1500 VA 250 V AC Relays e Max continuous current 2 A rms cos 1 1 A rms cos 0 4 Minimum load 500 mW 12 V 10 mA Contact material Silver nickel AgN Isolation between relay digital outputs test voltage 2 5 kV rms 1 minute Cable specifications See section Control terminals table on page 28 Control cables General recommendations Use multi core cables with a braided copper wire shield temperature rated at 60 140 or above Double shielded Single shielded Example JAMAK by Draka NK Cables Example NOMAK by Draka NK Cables For digital and analog I O cables twist the shield together into a bundle pig tail not longer than five times its width and connect it to terminal X1 1 at the drive end Leave the other end of the cable shield unconnected For connecting the shield wires of the RS485 cable see the instructions and notes in section Mechanical and electrical installation EFB on page 204 Route control cables to minimize radiation to the cable Route as far away as possible from the input power and motor cables at least 20 cm 8 in Where control cables must cross power cables make sure they are at an angle as near 90 as possible Stay a
54. 00008 CONTROL WORD Bit 7 RESET STPMODE R RESET 00009 CONTROL WORD Bit 8 N A STPMODE EM N A 00010 CONTROL WORD Bit 9 N A STPMODE C N A 00011 CONTROL WORD Bit 10 N A RAMP 2 REMOTE CMD 00012 CONTROL WORD Bit 11 EXT2 RAMP OUT 0 EXT2 00013 CONTROL WORD Bit 12 N A RAMP HOLD N A 00014 CONTROL WORD Bit 13 N A RAMP IN 0 N A 00015 CONTROL WORD Bit 14 N A REQ LOCALLOCK N A 00016 CONTROL WORD Bit 15 N A TORQLIM2 N A 00017 CONTROL WORD Bit 16 Does not apply FBLOCAL CTL Does not apply 00018 CONTROL WORD Bit 17 FBLOCAL REF 00019 CONTROL WORD Bit 18 START DISABLE1 00020 CONTROL WORD Bit 19 START DISABLE2 00021 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 00032 00033 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 1 00034 RELAY OUTPUT 2 Relay Output 2 Relay Output 2 Relay Output 2 00035 RELAY OUTPUT 3 Relay Output 3 Relay Output 3 Relay Output 3 00036 RELAY OUTPUT 4 Relay Output 4 Relay Output 4 Relay Output 4 00037 RELAY OUTPUT 5 Relay Output 5 Relay Output 5 Relay Output 5 00038 RELAY OUTPUT 6 Relay Output 6 Relay Output 6 Relay Output 6 Active low For the Oxxxx registers Status is always readable Forcing is allowed by user configuration of the drive for fieldbus control Additional relay outputs are added sequentially Embedded fieldbus 218 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual The ACS550 supports the following Modbus function codes for coils
55. 0102 102 0102 102 0102 102 0102 103 0103 102 0102 OUTPUT FREQ SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED OUTPUT FREQ SPEED 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 103 0103 102 0102 102 0102 102 0102 102 0102 102 0102 103 0103 102 0102 OUTPUT FREQ SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED OUTPUT FREQ SPEED 4001 GAIN 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 2 5 1 0 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 60 0 s 60 0 s 60 0 s 60 0 s 60 0 s 60 0 s 3 0s 60 05 4101 GAIN 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 2 5 1 0 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 60 0 s 60 0 s 60 0 s 60 0 s 60 0 s 60 0 s 3 0s 60 0 s 8123 PFC ENABLE 0 NOT SEL 0 NOT SEL O NOT SEL O NOT SEL 0 SEL O SEL 1 ACTIVE 0 NOT SEL Application macros 90 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual ACS550 U1 Motor ABB Torque Parameter Standard 3 wire Alternate 22 Hand auto Control Control 9902 APPLIC MACRO 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ABB STANDARD 3 WIRE ALTERNATE MOTORPOT HAND AUTO PID CONTROL PFC CONTROL TORQUE CTRL 9904 MOTOR CTRL 3 SCALAR 1 VECTOR 1 VECTOR 1 VECTOR 1 VECTOR 1 VECTOR 3 SCALAR 2 VECTOR MODE FREQ SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED FREQ TORQUE 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 2 011 2 4 2 3 9 DITF 2R 2 011 2 2 011 2 1 011 1 1 1 2 011 2 1002 2 COMMANDS 0 NOT SEL 0 SEL O SEL O SEL7 016 5 6 016 6 016 2 011 2 1003 DIRECTION 3
56. 1 DCU profile selected the register remains empty 40002 Reference 1 R W Range 0 20000 scaled to 0 1105 REF1 MAX or 20000 0 scaled to 1105 REF1 MAX 0 40003 Reference 2 R W Range 0 10000 scaled to 0 1108 REF2 or 10000 0 scaled to 1108 REF2 MAX 0 40004 STATUS WORD R Maps directly to the profile S STATUS WORD Supported only if 5305 0 or 2 ABB Drives profile Parameter 5320 holds a copy in hex format If 5305 1 DCU profile selected the register remains empty 40005 Actual 1 R By default stores a copy of 0103 OUTPUT FREQ Use select using 5310 parameter 5310 to select a different actual value for this register 40006 Actual 2 R By default stores a copy of 0104 CURRENT Use parameter select using 5311 5311 to select a different actual value for this register 40007 Actual 3 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5312 to select an select using 5312 actual value for this register 40008 Actual 4 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5313 to select an select using 5313 actual value for this register 40009 Actual 5 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5314 to select an select using 5314 actual value for this register 40010 Actual 6 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5315 to select an select using 5315 actual value for this register 40011 Actual 7 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5316 to select an select using 5316 act
57. 138 frequency parameters 190 function parameter 136 inhibit 137 select enable source parameter 131 torque boost current parameter 137 start mode automatic e iA a vate eee hia ala 136 automatic torque boost 136 DC 0 136 flying Startins 136 start stop parameter 136 with Assistant Control Panel 52 with Basic Control Panel 70 Index ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual start stop dir parameter group 115 starting order counter 194 start up assistant sco oe Sa IS 42 57 data parameter group 106 guided Assistant Control Panel 42 limited Assistant or Basic Control Panel 37 state diagram comm 232 comm ABB drives 251 station id RS 232 parameter 183 status at fault history parameter 114 status word ABB drives FBA description 249 EFB comm definition 227 eke stu 239 generic 256 stop parameter 136 aux motor PFC parameters 191 aux motor 191 DC
58. 17 e B Correcting reference AM for values 9 10 and AI2 for values 14 17 Example figure shows the reference source curves for value settings 9 10 and 14 17 where e 25 e P 4012 SETPOINT MIN 0 4013 SETPOINT MAX 0 varies along the horizontal axis 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT Sets a constant value used for the process reference Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 4012 SETPOINT MIN Sets the minimum value for the reference signal source See parameter 4010 4013 SETPOINT MAX Sets the maximum value for the reference signal source See parameter 4010 4014 FBK SEL Defines the PID controller feedback actual signal You can define a combination of two actual values ACT1 and ACT2 as the feedback signal Use parameter 4016 to define the source for actual value 1 ACT1 Use parameter 4017 to define the source for actual value 2 ACT2 1 AcT1 Actual value 1 ACT1 provides the feedback signal 2 ACT1 ACT2 ACT minus ACT2 provides the feedback signal 3 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 plus ACT2 provides the feedback signal ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 times ACT2 provides the feedback signal 1 2 ACT1 divided by ACT2 provides the feedback signal 6 MIN ACT1 2 The smaller of ACT1 or ACT2 provides the feedback signal 7 MAX ACT1 2 The greater of ACT1 or ACT2 provides the feedback signal 8
59. 3 1 ENGLISH 9902 APPLIC MACRO 3 8 31 1 1 ABB STANDARD Y 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 VECTOR SPEED 2 VECTOR TORQUE 1 3 SCALAR FREQ 4 3 SCALAR FREQ 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 01 2 115 345 V 1V 01 yyyy 2 230 V Y U1 yyyy 2 115 345 V U1 yyyy 2 230 V 01 yyyy 4 200 600 V 01 yyyy 4 400 V U1 yyyy 4 230 690 V U1 yyyy 4 460 V U1 yyyy 6 288 862 V U1 yyyy 6 575 V 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 0 2 long 2 0 long 1 0 long Y 9907 NOM FREQ 10 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 01 50 0 Hz Y U1 60 0 Hz 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 50 30000 rpm 1 rpm Size dependent Y 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER 0 2 3 0 Pha 01 0 1 kW 11 0 Pha Y U1 0 1 hp 9910 ID RUN OFF IDMAGN 1 ON 1 OFF IDMAGN Y 9915 MOTOR COSPHI 0 IDENTIFIED 0 01 0 97 0 01 IDENTIFIED Y Group 01 OPERATING DATA 0101 SPEED amp DIR 30000 30000 rpm 1 rpm 0102 SPEED 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0104 CURRENT 0 0 2 0 long 0 1A 0105 TORQUE 200 0 200 0 0 1 0106 POWER 2 0 2 0 Phd 0 1 kW 0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE 0 2 5 1V 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 0 2 0 1V 0110 DRIVE TEMP 0 0 150 0 C 0 1 C 0111 REF 1 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1rpm 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 0 0 100 0 0 0 600 0 for torque 0 1 0113 CTRL LOCATION LOCAL 1 EXT 2 EXT2 1 Parameters
60. ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 8 COMM Reference set selection by fieldbus 40001 bit 11 40031 bit 5 1103 REF1 SELECT 8 COMM Input reference 1 by fieldbus 40002 1106 REF2 SELECT 8 COMM Input reference 2 by fieldbus 40003 Reference Scaling Where required REFERENCES can be scaled See the following as appropriate Modbus Register 40002 in section Modbus protocol technical data on page 215 Reference scaling in section ABB control profiles technical data on page 224 Miscellaneous drive control Using the fieldbus for miscellaneous drive control requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus protocol Drive parameter Value Description reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 1601 RUN ENABLE 7 COMM Run enable by fieldbus 40001 bit 3 40031 bit 6 inverted 1604 FAULT RESET SEL 8 COMM Fault reset by fieldbus 40001 bit 7 40031 bit 4 1606 LOCAL LOCK 8 COMM Source for local lock selection Does not 40031 bit 14 the fieldbus apply 1607 PARAM SAVE 1 SAVE Saves altered parameters to 41607 memory then value returns to 0 1608 START ENABLE 1 7 COMM Source for start enable 1 is the Does not 40032 bit 2 fieldbus Command word apply 1609
61. Avg braking power overhauling load Avg braking powe ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Deceleration curve during deceleration to zero Time gt T t 2 Xem bec ee 2 r Overhauling load curve ani The many variables in the last requirement above are most easily dealt with using the following tables First determine your maximum braking time ON ON x minimum braking time OFF OFF m n and load type deceleration or overhauling load Calculate duty cycle Duty cycle ONmax ONmax OF Fein 100 Inthe appropriate table find the column that best matches your data ONmax lt column specification and Duty cycle lt column specification Find the row that matches your drive The minimum power rating for deceleration to zero is the value in the selected row column Foroverhauling loads double the rating in the selected row column or use the Continuous ON column 208 240 V drives Resistance Resistor minimum continuous power rating Deceleration to zero rating P Type rcont ACS550 Py Pro 60 Continuous 01 U1 Run 5380 lt 1060 lt 306 0 lt 6060 gt 605 seebelow MAX MN gt 27 5 OFF 50s OFF gt 1805 OFF gt 180 s OFF lt 10 Duty lt 17 Duty lt 14 Duty lt 25 Duty
62. ControlNet The ACS550 detects automatically which communication protocol is used by the plug in fieldbus adapter The default settings for each protocol assume that the profile used is the protocol s industry standard drive profile e g PROFIdrive for PROFIBUS AC DC Drive for DeviceNet All of the FBA protocols can also be configured for the ABB Drives profile Configuration details depend on the protocol and profile used These details are provided in a user s manual supplied with the FBA module Details for the ABB Drives profile which apply for all protocols are provided in section ABB Drives profile technical data on page 248 Fieldbus adapter 238 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Control interface In general the basic control interface between the fieldbus system and the drive consists of Output Words CONTROL WORD REFERENCE speed or frequency Others The drive supports a maximum of 15 output words Protocols limits may further restrict the total Input Words STATUS WORD Actual Value speed or frequency Others The drive supports a maximum of 15 input words Protocols limits may further restrict the total Note The words output and input are used as seen from the fieldbus controller point of view For example an output describes data flow from the fieldbus controller to the drive and appears as an input from the drive point of view The meanings of the controll
63. How to adjust the display contrast Step Action Display 1 If you are not in the Output mode press repeatedly until you get there LOC 49 1 Hz 0 5 A 10 7 DIR 00 00 MENU 2 To increase the contrast press keys A and simultaneously LOC To decrease the contrast press keys X and amp vw 2 simultaneously i 1 a 10 7 DIR 100 00 MENU Control panels ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Parameters mode In the Parameters mode you can view and change parameter values start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to select a parameter and change its value Step Action Display Go to the Main menu by pressing M you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing 77 repeatedly until you get to the Main menu LOC MAIN MENU 1 PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR X EXIT 1 00 00 ENTER Go to the Parameters mode by selecting PARAMETERS on the menu with keys ENTER A and amp Y 2 and pressing 5 LOC UPAR GROUPS 01 01 OPERATING DATA 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS 04 FAULT HISTORY 10 START STOP DIR 11 REFERENCE SELECT EXIT 00 00 SEL Select the appropriate parameter group with keys and S Y 7 SEL Press Ew LOC UPAR GROUPS 99 01 OPERATING DATA 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS 04 FAULT HISTORY 10 START STOP DIR EXIT 00 00 SEL
64. How to view and edit changed parameters Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing SS if you are in the Output mode otherwise LOC UMAIN MENU 1 by pressing repeatedly until you get to the Main menu PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER 2 Go to the Changed Parameters mode by selecting CHANGED PAR on the LOC U CHANGED PAR menu with keys and S w 2 and pressing S 1202 reus 1 1203 CONST SPEED 2 1204 CONST SPEED 3 9902 APPLIC MACRO EXIT 00 00 EDIT 3 Select the changed parameter on the list with keys A and S 7 The LOC EDIT value of the selected parameter is shown below it Press X to modify the 1202 CONST SPEED 1 value 0 0 Hz CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 4 Specify a new value for the parameter with keys and Cw LOC UPAR EDIT Pressing the key once increments or decrements the value Holding the key 1202 CONST SPEED 1 down changes the value faster Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the 5 0 2 displayed value with the default value CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 5 To accept the new value press SE If the new value is the default value the LOC CCHANGED PAR parameter is removed from the list of changed parameters 1202 CONST hee 1 To cancel the new value and keep the original press 1505 CONST SPEED 9902 APPLIC MACRO EXIT 00 00 EDIT Control panels ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Fault Logger mode In the Fault Logger mode you can
65. PID process feedback 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY Sets the time delay for the PID sleep function a motor speed frequency below 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL for at least this time period enables the PID sleep function stopping the drive See 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL above 4025 WAKE UP DEV Defines the wake up deviation a deviation from the setpoint greater than this value for at least the time period 4026 WAKE UP DELAY re starts the PID controller Parameters 4006 and 4007 define the units and scale Parameter 4005 0 Wake up level Setpoint Wake up deviation Parameter 4005 1 Wake up level Setpoint Wake up deviation Wake up level can be above or below setpoint See the figures Wake up level when parameter 4005 1 e D Wake up level when parameter 4005 0 e E Feedback is above wake up level and lasts longer than 4026 WAKE UP DELAY PID function wakes up e F Feedback is below wake up level and lasts longer than 4026 WAKE UP DELAY PID function wakes up 4026 WAKE UP DELAY Defines the wake up delay a deviation from the setpoint greater than 4025 WAKE UP DEY for at least this time period re starts the PID controller t P4024 t P 4024 P P 4023 Setpoint Setpoint A tp 4025 Setpoint iP 4025 Parameters 176 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Description
66. RAMP_HOLD 1 RFG OUT ENABLED Enable ramp function Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ACCELERATOR ENABLED RFG OUT HOLD Halt ramping Ramp Function Generator output held RAMP_IN_ ZERO RFG INPUT ENABLED Normal operation Enter OPERATING RFG INPUT ZERO Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero RESET 0 gt 1 RESET Fault reset if an active fault exists Enter SWITCH ON INHIBITED Effective if 1604 COMM OPERATING Continue normal operation 8 9 Unused 10 REMOTE_CMD Fieldbus control enabled CW 0 or Ref 0 Retain last CW Ref CW 0 and Ref 0 Fieldbus control enabled Ref and deceleration acceleration ramp are locked 11 EXT CTRL LOC EXT2 SELECT Select external control location 2 EXT2 Effective if 1102 COMM EXT SELECT Select external control location 1 1 Effective if 1102 COMM 12 15 Unused Status Word As described earlier in section Control interface on page 238 the contents of the STATUS WORD is status information sent by the drive to the master station The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the status word content ABB Drives profile FBA STATUS WORD Bit wale Correspond to the state diagram 0 RDY_ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON 0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON 1 RDY_RUN
67. REQUEST 3 REQUEST 3 REQUEST 3 REQUEST 3 REQUEST 1 FORWARD 1 FORWARD 3 REQUEST 1102 1 2 SEL 0 EXT1 0 ExT1 0 ExT1 0 ExT 3 013 2 012 3 013 3 013 1103 REF1 SELECT 1 17A 1 12 1 17A 17A 17A DI3U 4D NC 1106 REF2 SELECT 2 2 2 A2 2 A2 2 A2 2 2 19 PIDTOUT 19 PIDTOUT 2 12 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 9 013 4 10 014 5 9 Dpi34 5 015 0 NOT SEL 9 013 4 0 NOT SEL 4 014 1304 MINIMUM AI2 0 096 0 096 0 096 0 096 20 096 20 096 20 096 20 096 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1 READY 1 READY 1 READY 1 READY 1 READY 1 READY 2 RUN 1 READY 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 2 RUN 2 RUN 2 RUN 2 RUN 2 RUN 2 RUN 3 FAULT 1 2 RUN 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 FAULT 1 3 FAULT 1 3 FAULT 1 3 FAULT 1 3 FAULT 1 3 FAULT 1 31 3 FAULT 1 1501 1 CONTENT SEL 103 0103 102 0102 102 0102 102 0102 102 0102 102 0102 103 0103 102 0102 OUTPUT FREQ SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED OUTPUT FREQ SPEED 1507 2 CONTENT SEL 104 104 104 104 104 104 130 104 CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT 1 FBK CURRENT 1510 MINIMUM AO2 0 0 mA 0 0 mA 0 0 mA 0 0 mA 0 0 mA 0 0 mA 4 0 mA 0 0 mA 1601 RUN ENABLE 0 NOT SEL 0 NOT SEL 6 DI6 6 016 4 014 5 015 2 012 6 016 2201 1 2 SEL 5 015 0 NOT SEL 5 015 0 NOT SEL O NOT SEL O NOT SEL O NOT SEL 5 015 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 1
68. Remove the fan Swing the fan out its hinges Disconnect the fan cable Reinstall the fan in reverse order Restore power Arrows in the fan show the directions of the rotation and air flow Maintenance ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 273 Frame size R6 To replace the fan 1 Remove power from the drive 2 Remove the screw attaching the fan casing and let the casing lean down against the limiters 3 Slide out the cable connector and disconnect it 4 Take off the casing and replace the fan onto the casing s pins 5 Reinstall the casing in reverse order 6 Restore power Maintenance 274 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Internal enclosure fan replacement IP54 UL type 12 enclosures have an additional internal fan to circulate air inside the enclosure Frame sizes R1 R4 To replace the internal enclosure fan in frame sizes R1 to R3 located at the top of the drive and R4 located in front of the drive 1 Remove power from the drive 2 Remove the front cover 3 The housing that holds the fan in place has barbed retaining clips at each corner Press all four clips toward the center to release the barbs LS 4 When the clips barbs are free pull the housing
69. STALL FREQUENCY 0 5 50 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 20 0 Hz 3012 STALL TIME 10 400s 1s 20s 3017 EARTH FAULT 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 1 ENABLE 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 0 NOT SEL 1 FAULT 2 CONST SP 7 1 NOT SEL 3 LAST SPEED 3019 FAULT TIME 0 0 600 0 s 0 15 3 0s 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 3023 WIRING FAULT 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 1 ENABLE Y 3024 CB TEMP FAULT 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 1 ENABLE 3028 EARTH FAULT LVL 1 3 1 01 2 MEDIUM U1 1 Low Group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET 3101 NUMBER OF TRIALS 0 5 1 0 3102 TRIAL TIME 1 0 600 0 s 0 15 30 05 3103 DELAY TIME 0 0 120 0 5 0 15 0 0 s Parameters 98 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Range Resolution Default User S 3104 OVERCURRENT O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 0 DISABLE 3105 OVERVOLTAGE 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 0 DISABLE 3106 AR UNDERVOLTAGE 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 0 DISABLE 3107 ARAIXMIN 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 0 DISABLE 3108 EXTERNAL FLT 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 0 DISABLE Group 32 SUPERVISION 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 100 NOT SELECTED 101 178 1 103 parameter 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO Depends on the signal selected with par 3201 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI Depends on the signal selected w
70. START ENABLE 2 7 COMM Source for start enable 2 is the 40032 bit 3 fieldbus Command word 2013 MIN TORQUE SEL 7 COMM Source for minimum torque 40031 bit 15 selection is the fieldbus 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL 7 COMM Source for maximum torque selection is the fieldbus 2201 1 2 SEL 7 COMM Source for ramp pair selection is 40031 bit 10 the fieldbus Embedded fieldbus ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 209 Relay output control Using the fieldbus for relay output control requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied binary coded relay command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus protocol reference Drive parameter Value Description ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 35 COMM Relay Output 1 controlled 40134 bit 0 or 00033 by fieldbus 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 35 COMM Relay Output 2 controlled 40134 bit 1 00034 by fieldbus 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 35 COMM Relay Output 3 controlled 40134 bit 2 or 00035 by fieldbus 14101 RELAY OUTPUT 4 35 COMM Relay Output 4 controlled 40134 bit 3 00036 by fieldbus 1411 RELAY OUTPUT 5 35 COMM Relay Output 5 controlled 40134 bit 4 or 00037 by fieldbus 14121 RELAY OUTPUT 6 35 COMM Relay Output 6 controlled 40134 bit 5 or 00038 by fi
71. STOP TIME 1 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3604 START DAY 1 1 7 1 1 MONDAY 3605 sTOP DAY 1 1 7 1 1 MONDAY 3606 START TIME 2 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3607 STOP TIME 2 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3608 START DAY 2 1 7 1 1 MONDAY 3609 STOP DAY 2 1 7 1 1 MONDAY 3610 START TIME 3 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3611 STOP TIME 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3612 START DAY 3 1 7 1 1 MONDAY 3613 sTOP DAY Tes 1 1 MONDAY 3614 START TIME 4 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3615 STOP TIME 4 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3616 START DAY 4 1227 1 1 MONDAY 3617 STOP DAY 4 1 7 1 1 MONDAY 3622 BOOSTER SEL 6 6 1 NOT SEL 3623 BOOSTER TIME 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 Parameters 100 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Range Resolution Default User 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 4 SRC 0 31 1 0 NOT SEL 3629 Group 37 USER LOAD CURVE 3701 USER LOAD C MODE 0 3 1 0 NOT SEL 3702 USER LOAD C FUNC 1 FAULT 2 ALARM 1 1 FAULT 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 10 400 s 1s 20s 3704 LoAD FREQ 1 0 500 Hz 1Hz 5Hz 3705 LoAD TORQ LOW 1 0 600 1 10 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 0 60096 196 300 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 0 500 Hz 1 Hz 25 Hz 3708 LOAD TORQ LOW 2 0 600 1 15 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 0 60096 196 30096 3710 LOAD
72. Selects the source for the booster signal 0 NOT SEL Booster signal is disabled 1 Di1 Defines DI1 as the booster signal 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines DI2 DI6 as the booster signal 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the booster signal 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the booster signal 3623 IBOOSTER TIME Defines the booster ON time Time is started when booster sel signal is released If parameter value is 01 30 00 booster is Booster active active for 1 hour and 30 minutes after activation DI is released Activation DI Booster time 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC Defines the time periods used by the timer NOT SEL No time periods have been selected 1 1 Time Period 1 selected in the timer 2 12 Time Period 2 selected in the timer 3 1 2 Time Periods 1 and 2 selected in the timer 4 T3 Time Period selected in the timer 5 T1 T3 Time Periods 1 and 3 selected in the timer 6 T2 T3 Time Periods 2 and selected in the timer 7 T1 T2 T3 Time Periods 1 2 and 3 selected the timer 8 T4 Time Period 4 selected in the timer 9 1 4 Time Periods 1 and 4 selected in the timer 10 2 4 Time Periods 2 and 4 selected in the timer 11 1 2 4 Time Periods 1 2 and 4 selected in the timer 12 T3 T4 Time Pe
73. The Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical equipment used within the European Union The EMC product standard IEC EN 61800 3 2004 A1 2012 covers requirements stated for drives Technical data 310 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Compliance with IEC EN 61800 3 2004 A1 2012 See page 377 C Tick marking The drive carries marking C Tick marking is required in Australia and New Zealand A C Tick mark is attached to the drive to verify compliance with the relevant standard IEC 61800 3 2004 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific test methods mandated by the Trans Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme The Trans Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme EMCS was introduced by the Australian Communication Authority ACA and the Radio Spectrum Management Group RSM of the New Zealand Ministry of Economic Development NZMED in November 2001 The aim of the scheme is to protect the radio frequency spectrum by introducing technical limits for emission from electrical electronic products Compliance with IEC EN 61800 3 004 See page 377 UL CSA markings US LISTED An UL mark is attached to ACS550 drives to verify that the drive follows the provisions of UL 508C CSA mark is attached to ACS550 U type drives to verify that the drive follows the provisions of C22 2 NO 14 The ACS550 is
74. s Manual 243 Relay output control Using the fieldbus for relay output control requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied binary coded relay command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Drive parameter Value Description 22 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 35 COMM Relay Output 1 controlled by fieldbus 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 36 COMM 1 Relay Output 2 controlled by fieldbus 1403 RELAY OUTPUT Relay Output 3 controlled by fieldbus 14101 RELAY OUTPUT 4 Relay Output 4 controlled by fieldbus 1411 RELAY OUTPUT 5 Relay Output 5 controlled by fieldbus 14121 RELAY OUTPUT 6 Relay Output 6 controlled by fieldbus 1 More than 3 relays requires the addition of a relay extension module Note Relay status feedback occurs without configuration as defined below Drive parameter Value Protocol reference 0122 RO 1 3 STATUS Relay 1 3 status 0123 RO 4 6 STATUS Relay 4 6 status Analog output control Using the fieldbus for analog output control e g PID setpoint requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied analog value s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Protocol Drive parameter Value Description reference
75. size m ft m ft m ftm ft m ft m timi ftim ft R1 300 980 300 980 300 980 300 980 300 980 300 980 100 330 100 330 150 490 R2 300 980 300 980 300 980 300 980 100 330 30 98 200 660 100 330 250 820 R3 300 980 300 980 300 980 300 980 75 245 75 245 200 660 100 330 250 820 R4 300 980 300 980 300 980 300 980 75 245 75 245 200 660 100 330 300 980 R5 100 330 100 330 100 330 100 330 100 330 100 330 300 980 1502 4902 300 980 R6 1 100 330 100 330 3 3 100 330 100 330 3 3 300 980 150214902 300 980 1 See the new terms in section 61800 3 2004 Definitions on page 377 2 42 kHz switching frequency is not available 3 Not tested Sine filters further extend the cable lengths Under heading Operational limits the Basic unit columns define the cable lengths with which the basic drive unit works without problems within the drive specification without installing any further options Column With du dt filters defines the cable lengths when an external du dt filter is used The columns under heading EMC limits show the maximum cable lengths with which the units have been tested for EMC emissions The factory guarantees that these cable lengths meet the EMC s
76. 014 Digital input 4 programmable Default constant speed sel code 17 DI5 Digital input 5 programmable Default ramp pair selection code 18 DI6 Digital input 6 programmable Default not used Installation ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 29 x1 Hardware description 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable Default Ready 20 Maximum 250 V AC 30 V DC 2A Minimum 500 mW 12 V 10 mA 21 RO1B 2 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable Default Running 5 23 RO2A Maximum 250 30 V DC 2A q Minimum 500 mW 12 V 10 mA 5 24 RO2B 25 4 Relay output 3 programmable Default Fault 1 26 RO3A Maximum 250 V AC 30V DC 2A Minimum 500 mW 12 V 10 mA 27 1 Digital input impedance 1 5 kohm Maximum voltage for digital inputs is 30 V 2 Default values depend on the macro used Values specified are for the default macro See chapter Application macros on page 77 Note Terminals 3 6 and 9 are at the same potential Note For safety reasons the fault relay signals a fault when the ACS550 is powered down within a zone of equipotential bonding i e within a zone where all simultaneously accessible conductive parts are electrically connected to prevent hazardous voltages appearing between them This is accomplished
77. 1 ENABLE 2619 STABILIZER Enables or disables the DC voltage stabilizer The DC stabilizer is used in scalar control mode to prevent possible voltage oscillations in the drive DC bus caused by motor load or weak supply network In case of voltage variation the drive tunes the frequency reference to stabilize the DC bus voltage and therefore the load torque oscillation DISABLE Disables DC stabilizer 1 ENABLE Enables DC stabilizer 2625 OVERMODULATION Enables or disables overmodulation Disabling overmodulation can help in some applications in field weakening area DISABLE Disables overmodulation 1 ENABLE Enables overmodulation Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 147 Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG This group contains usage levels and trigger points When usage reaches the set trigger point a notice displayed on the control panel signals that maintenance is due Code Description 2901 COOLING FAN TRIG Sets the trigger point for the drive s cooling fan counter Value is compared to parameter 2902 value 0 0 Disables the trigger 2902 COOLING FAN ACT Defines the actual value of the drive s cooling fan counter When parameter 2901 has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2901 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 0 Resets the parameter 2903
78. 109 station id 184 status words data parameters 112 status 184 UART errors count parameter 184 values data parameter 109 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual efficiency eee 300 ELV Extra Low Voltage 29 EM1 and EMG screws 25 on corner grounded TN system 27 27 symmetrically grounded TN systems 27 25 285 286 embedded fieldbus see EFB see EFB drive parameters EMC CE marking 22 See 309 C Tick 0 310 motor cable requirements 293 EMC filter 286 EMC filter internal 27 285 286 311 312 emergency deceleration time parameter 140 stop 283 stop select parameter 137 enclosure protection class code 17 YPES na t Oe oe alee 306 encoder parameter 181 enable parameter 181 error fault code 263 fault parameter 181 number of pulses parameter 181 position reset enable parameter 181 zero pulse
79. 2 TIME OUT A timeout has occurred in the communication between the network master and the EFB protocol 3 CONFIG ERROR EFB protocol has a configuration error 4 OFF LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that are NOT addressed to this drive 5 ON LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that are addressed to this drive 6 RESET EFB protocol is performing a hardware reset 7 LISTEN ONLY EFB protocol is in listen only mode 5310 EFB PAR 10 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40005 Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 185 Code Description 5311 EFB PAR 11 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40006 5312 EFB PAR 12 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40007 5313 EFB PAR 13 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40008 5314 EFB PAR 14 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40009 5315 EFB PAR 15 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40010 5316 EFB PAR 16 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40011 5317 EFB PAR 17 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40012 5318 EFB PAR 18 For Modbus Sets additional delay in milliseconds before the ACS550 begins transmitting response to the master request 5319 EFB PAR 19 ABB Drives profile ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL Control Word Read only copy of the Fieldbus Control Word
80. 3 HIGH High level leakage current low sensitivity The drive trips to higher ground earth leakage current Parameters 152 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET This group defines conditions for automatic resets An automatic reset occurs after a particular fault is detected The drive holds for a set delay time then automatically restarts You can limit the number of resets in a specified time period and set up automatic resets for a variety of faults Code Description 3101 NUMBER OF TRIALS Example Three faults have occurred in Sets the number of allowed automatic resets within a trial period defined trial time The last is reset only if the by 3102 TRIAL TIME value for 3101 NUMBER OF TRIALS is 3 or If the number of automatic resets exceeds this limit within the trial more time the drive prevents additional automatic resets and remains stopped Trial time Starting then requires a successful reset performed from the control Ti ime panel or from a source selected by 1604 FAULT RESET SEL x 3102 TRIAL TIME x Automatic reset Sets the time period used for counting and limiting the number of resets See 3101 NUMBER OF TRIALS 3103 DELAY TIME Sets the delay time between a fault detection and attempted drive restart f DELAY TIME zero the drive resets immediately 3104 AR OVERCURRENT Sets the automatic reset for the overcurrent function on
81. 3 REQUEST 3 REQUEST 9 REQUEST 1 FORWARD 1 FORWARD 3 REQUEST 1102 1 2 SEL 0 EXT1 0 1 0 1 ExT1 3 03 2 012 3 03 3 03 1103 REF1 SELECT 1 17A 17A 12 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 DI3U 4D NC 1106 REF2 SELECT 2 Al2 2 A2 2 A2 2 A2 2 A2 19 PIDTOUT 19 PIDTOUT 2 AI2 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 9 DI3 4 10 4 5 9 013 4 5 015 0 5 9 DI3 4 0 NOT SEL 4 014 1304 MINIMUM AI2 0 096 0 096 0 096 0 096 20 096 20 096 20 096 20 096 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1 READY 1 READY 1 READY 1 READY 1 READY 1 READY 2 RUN 1 READY 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 2 RUN 2 RUN 2 RUN 2 RUN 2 RUN 2 RUN FAULT 1 2 RUN 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 FAULT 1 3 FAULT 1 3 FAULT 1 3 FAULT 1 3 FAULT 1 3 FAULT 1 31 PFC 3 FAULT 1 1501 1 CONTENT SEL 103 0103 102 0102 102 0102 102 0102 102 0102 102 0102 103 0103 102 0102 OUTPUT FREQ SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED OUTPUT FREQ SPEED 1507 2 CONTENT SEL 104 104 104 104 104 104 130 104 CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT 1 CURRENT 1510 MINIMUM AO2 0 0 mA 0 0 mA 0 0 mA 0 0 mA 0 0 mA 0 0 mA 4 0 mA 0 0 mA 1601 RUN ENABLE 0 NOT SEL 0 NOT SEL 6 DI6 6 016 4 014 5 015 2 012 6 016 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 SEL 5 015 NOT SEL 5 015 NOT 0 NOT SEL O SEL O NOT SEL 5 015 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 103 0103 1102 0102 102
82. Add Ramped ref Select Switch wi par 4230 Trim scale Mul Mul gt gt 9 Ext ref 1 max A Ly off X m md Ext ref 2 max B proportional gt Abs max speed direct Select freq C par 4232 Trimming PID2 ref PID2 ref 1 PID 2 Trimming PID2 out Trimmed ref 0 Parameters 180 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Group 45 ENERGY SAVING This group defines the setup of calculation and optimization of energy savings Note The values of saved energy parameters 0174 SAVED KWH 0175 SAVED MWH 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 and 0178 SAVED CC2 are derived from subtracting the drive s energy consumed from the direct on line DOL consumption calculated on the basis of parameter 4508 PUMP POWER As such the accuracy of the values is dependent on the accuracy of the power estimate entered in that parameter Code Description 4502 ENERGY PRICE Price of energy per kWh Used for reference when energy savings are calculated See parameters 0174 SAVED KWH 0175 SAVED MWH 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 and 0178 SAVED CC2 reduction on carbon dioxide emissions in tn 4507 CO2 CONV FACTOR Conversion factor for converting energy into CO2 emissions kg kWh or tn MWh Used for multiplying the saved energy in MWh to calculate the valu
83. After run completion this value automatically changes to 0 Note The motor must be de coupled from the driven equipment Note If motor parameters are changed after ID Run repeat the ID Run WARNING The motor will run at up to approximately 50 80 of the nominal speed during the ID Run The motor will rotate in the forward direction Ensure that it is safe to run the motor before performing the ID Run See also section How to perform the ID Run on page 45 9915 MOTOR COSPHI Defines the nominal motor cos phi power factor The parameter improves performance especially with high efficiency motors 0 IDENTIFIED Drive identifies the cos phi automatically by estimation 0 01 0 97 Value entered used as the cos phi Parameters 108 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Group 01 OPERATING DATA This group contains drive operating data including actual signals The drive sets the values for actual signals based on measurements or calculations You cannot set these values Code Description 0101 SPEED amp DIR The calculated signed speed of the motor rpm The absolute value of 0101 SPEED amp DIR is the same as the value of 0102 SPEED The value of 0101 SPEED amp DIR is positive if the motor runs in the forward direction The value of 0101 SPEED amp DIR is negative if the motor runs in the reverse direction 0102 SPEED The calculated speed of the motor
84. CRIT SPEED SEL Sets the critical speeds function on or off The critical speed function avoids specific speed ranges 0 oFF Disables the critical speeds function 1 ON Enables the critical speeds function Example To avoid speeds at which a fan system vibrates badly Determine problem speed ranges Assume they are found to be 18 23 Hz and 46 52 Hz Set 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL 1 Set 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 18 Hz Set 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 23 Hz Set 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO 46 Hz Set 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI 52 Hz 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 1 The value must be less than or equal to 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI Units are rpm unless 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ then units are Hz 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 1 The value must be greater than or equal to 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO Units are rpm unless 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ then units are Hz 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 2 See parameter 2502 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 2 See parameter 2503 2506 CRIT SPEED 3 LO Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 3 See parameter 2502 2507 CRIT SPEED 3 HI Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 3 See parameter 2503 Parameters ACS55
85. DI6 Free 2 D D D 1 Free 2 Speed Reg Motor DI3 First PFC Relay 4 Second PFC Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI1 Free DI2 First PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI4 DI6 Free 3 D D 1 Free 2 Speed Reg Motor DI3 First PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay DI1 Free DI2 First PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI4 Third PFC Relay 015 Third PFC Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI6 Free 4 DI1 Free DI1 Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI2 First PFC Relay DI3 First PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay DI4 Third PFC Relay 015 Third PFC Relay DI5 Fourth PFC Relay DI6 Fourth PFC Relay DI6 Free 5 Not allowed DI1 Free DI2 First PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI4 Third PFC Relay 015 Fourth PFC Relay DI6 Fifth PFC Relay 6 Not allowed Not allowed Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 197 Code Description 3 DI3 Enables the Interlocks function and assigns a digital input starting with DI3 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on the number of relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFC the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 0 and otherwise enabled DI3 Speed Reg Motor DI4 DI6 Free No PFC Autochange disabled Autochange enabled relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 DI2 Fre
86. OUTPUT FREQ Code Range Resolution Default User Group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 14 19 1 9 DI3 4 1202 CONST SPEED 1 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm 01 5 0 2 300 rpm U1 6 0 Hz 360 rpm 1203 CONST SPEED 2 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm 01 10 0 Hz 600 rpm U1 12 0 Hz 720 rpm 1204 CONST SPEED 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm 01 15 0 2 900 rpm U1 18 0 Hz 1080 rpm 1205 CONST SPEED 4 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm 01 20 0 2 1200 rpm U1 24 0 Hz 1440 rpm 1206 CONST SPEED 5 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm 01 25 0 2 1500 rpm U1 30 0 Hz 1800 rpm 1207 CONST SPEED 6 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm 01 40 0 2 2400 rpm U1 48 0 Hz 2880 rpm 1208 CONST SPEED 7 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm 01 50 0 2 3000 rpm U1 60 0 Hz 3600 rpm 1209 TIMED MODE SEL 1 EXT CS1 2 3 2 cs1 2 3 4 1 2 51 2 3 4 Group 13 ANALOG INPUTS 1301 MINIMUM AI1 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 1302 1 0 0 100 0 0 1 100 0 1303 FILTER AI1 0 0 10 0 s 0 1s 0 1s 1304 MINIMUM AI2 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 0 0 100 0 0 1 100 0 1306 FILTER AI2 0 0 10 0 s 0 1s 0 1s Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS 1401 OUTPUT 1 0 44 46 47 52 1 1 READY 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 0 44 46 47 52 1 2 RUN 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 0 44 46 47 52 1
87. Start stop and direction DI1 2 Analog output AO2 Current 9 11 0 10 V Speed torque control DI3 Relay output 1 Ready 9 P AI2 0 4 20 mA Constant speed selection D14 Relay output 2 Running or Ramp pair 1 2 selection DI5 Relay output 3 Fault 1 J1 Run enable DI6 gt E o Al1 0 10 V 12 0 4 20 mA Application macros 86 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Connection examples of two wire and three wire sensors Many applications use process PI D and need a feedback signal from the process The feedback signal is typically connected to analog input 2 12 The macro wiring diagrams for each macro earlier in this chapter use an externally powered sensor connections not shown The figures below give examples of connections using a two wire or three wire sensor transmitter supplied by the drive auxiliary voltage output Two wire sensor transmitter X4 control board Process actual value measurement 6 AGND 0 4 20 mA Rin 100 ohm X1 control board 10 24 V Auxiliary voltage output non isolated 11 GND 24 V DC 250 mA Note The sensor is supplied through its current output and the drive feeds the supply voltage 24 V Thus the output signal must be 4 20 mA not 0 20 mA Three wire sensor transmitter X1 control board OUT 0 4 20 mA 5 TAI
88. Virtual addresses of the drive control The virtual address area of the drive control is allocated as follows Control Word Reference 1 REF 1 Reference 2 REF2 Status Word Actual Value 1 ACT 1 Actual Value 2 ACT2 om A wy N gt Fieldbus adapter 256 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Generic profile technical data Overview The generic profile aims to fulfill the industry standard drive profile for each protocol e g PROFIdrive for PROFIBUS AC DC Drive for DeviceNet Control Word As described earlier in section Control interface on page 238 the CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system For specific CONTROL WORD content see the user s manual provided with the FBA module Status Word As described earlier in section Control interface on page 238 the contents of the STATUS WORD is status information sent by the drive to the master station For specific STATUS WORD content see the user s manual provided with the FBA module Reference As described earlier in section Control interface on page 238 the REFERENCE word is a speed or frequency reference Note REF2 is not supported by the Generic Drive profiles Reference scaling REFERENCE scaling is fieldbus type specific However at the drive the meaning of a 10096 REFERENCE value is fixed as described in the table below For a detailed description on the range and sca
89. correct Excessive load Insufficient motor power Parameters 3010 3012 13 RESERVED Not used 14 EXT FAULT 1 Digital input defined to report first external fault is active See parameter 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 15 EXT FAULT 2 Digital input defined to report second external fault is active See parameter 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 16 EARTH FAULT Possible ground fault detected in the motor or motor cables The drive monitors for ground faults while the drive is running and while the drive is not running Detection is more sensitive when the drive is not running and can produce false positives Possible corrections Check for correct faults in the input wiring Verify that motor cable does not exceed maximum specified length Decrease the detection level for earth fault with parameter 3028 EARTH FAULT LVL Adelta grounded input power supply and motor cables with high capacitance may result in erroneous error reports during non running tests To disable response to fault monitoring when the drive is not running use parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT To disable response to all ground fault monitoring use parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT Note Disabling earth fault ground fault may void the warranty 17 OBSOLETE Not used 18 THERM FAIL Internal fault The thermistor measuring the internal temperature of the drive is open or shorted Contact your local ABB representative
90. reaches the setpoint stop the drive in local control press start the drive in local control press D gt Control panels ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Output mode In the Output mode you can monitor actual values of up to three signals in Group 01 OPERATING DATA change the direction of the motor rotation set the speed frequency or torque reference adjust the display contrast start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control You get to the Output mode by pressing The top right corner of the display shows the reference value The center can be configured to show up to three signal values or bar graphs If just one or two signals are 53 Cz repeatedly LOC V Loc 49 1 Hz c gt 5 0 4 A 7 96 24 4 96 DIR 00 00 MENU DIR 00 00 MENU selected for display the number and name of each displayed signal are shown in addition to the value or bar graph See page 56 for instructions on selecting and modifying the monitored signals How to change the direction of the motor rotation Step Action Display 1 If you are not in the Output mode press EZ repeatedly until you get there REM 49 1 Hz 0 5 A 10 7 7 DIR 00 00 MENU 2 If the drive is in remote control REM shown the status line switch to local LOC 2 control by pressing E The di
91. saved if the user parameter set is saved and loaded in local control The remote control setting is saved into the user parameter set but the local control setting is not The steps below show how to save and load User Parameter Set 1 The procedure for User Parameter Set 2 is identical only the parameter 9902 values are different To save User Parameter Set 1 Adjust the parameters Perform the motor identification if it is needed in the application but it is not done yet Save the parameter settings and the results of the motor identification to the permanent memory by changing parameter 9902 to 1 USER S1 SAVE MENU SAVE ENTER Press n Assistant Control Panel or Basic Control Panel To load User Parameter Set 1 Change parameter 9902 to 0 USER S1 LOAD MENU SAVE ENTER Press X Assistant Control Panel or Basic Control Panel to load The user parameter set can also be switched through digital inputs see parameter 1605 Note Loading the user parameter set restores the parameter settings including Group 99 START UP DATA and the results of the motor identification Check that the settings correspond to the motor used Hint The user can for example switch the drive between two motors without having to adjust the motor parameters and to repeat the motor identification every time the motor is changed The user needs only to adjust the settings and perform the motor identification once for each motor a
92. selected with par 1507 1509 AO2 CONTENT MAX Depends on the signal selected with par 1507 1510 MINIMUM AO2 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 0 0 mA 1511 MAXIMUM 2 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 20 0 mA 1512 FILTER 2 0 0 10 0 s 0 15 0 15 Group 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS 1601 RUN ENABLE 6 7 1 0 NOT SEL Y 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 0 LOCKED 1 OPEN 2 NOT SAVED 1 1 OPEN 1603 PASS CODE 0 65535 1 0 1604 RESET SEL 6 8 1 0 KEYPAD 1605 USER PAR SET CHG 6 6 1 0 NOT SEL 1606 LOCAL LOCK 6 8 1 0 NOT SEL 1607 SAVE 0 DONE 1 SAVE 1 DONE 1608 START ENABLE 1 6 7 1 0 NOT SEL Y 1609 START ENABLE 2 6 7 1 0 NOT SEL Y 1610 DISPLAY ALARMS 0 NO 1 YES 1 0 NO 1611 PARAMETER VIEW 0 DEFAULT 1 FLASHDROP 1 0 DEFAULT 1612 CONTROL 0 AUTO 1 ON 1 0 AUTO 1613 FAULT RESET 0 DEFAULT 1 RESET NOW 1 O DEFAULT Group 20 LIMITS 2001 MINIMUM SPEED 30000 30000 rpm 1 rpm rpm Y 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 01 1500 rpm Y U1 1800 rpm 2003 CURRENT 0 1 8 long 0 1A 1 8 long Y 2005 OVERVOLT CTRL O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 1 ENABLE 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE TIME 1 1 ENABLE TIME 2 ENABLE 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 500 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz Y 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 01 50 0 52 0 Hz Y U1 60 0 62 0 Hz 2013 TORQUE SEL 6 7 1 0 MIN TORQUE 1 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL 6 7 1 0 TORQ
93. sqrt ACT1 2 Square root of the value for ACT1 minus ACT2 provides the feedback signal 9 sqA1 sqA2 Square root of ACT1 plus the square root of ACT2 provides the feedback signal 10 sqrt ACT1 Square root of ACT1 provides the feedback signal 11 COMM FBK 1 Signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 provides the feedback signal 12 COMM FBK 2 Signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 provides the feedback signal 13 AVE ACT1 2 The average of ACT1 and ACT2 provides the feedback signal 4015 FBK MULTIPLIER Defines an extra multiplier for the PID feedback value FBK defined by parameter 4014 Used mainly in applications where the flow is calculated from the pressure difference 0 000 NOT SEL The parameter has no effect 1 000 used as the multiplier 32 768 32 767 Multiplier applied to the signal defined by parameter 4014 FBK SEL Example FBK Multiplier x A1 A2 Parameters 174 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Description 4016 ACT1 INPUT Defines the source for actual value 1 ACT1 See also parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 1 11 Uses analog input 1 for ACT1 2 Al2 Uses analog input 2 for ACT1 3 CURRENT Uses current for ACT1 4 TORQUE Uses torque for ACT1 5 POWER Uses power for ACT1 6 COMM ACT 1 Uses value of signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 for ACT1 7 COMM ACT 2 Uses value of signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 for ACT1 4017 ACT2 INPUT
94. 0 100 0 0 1 6427 AL2RANGE30T040 0 0 100 0 0 1 6428 AL2RANGE40TO50 0 0 100 0 0 1 6429 AL2RANGE50TO6O 0 0 100 0 0 1 6430 AL2RANGE60TO70 0 0 100 0 0 1 6431 AL2ZRANGE70TO80 0 0 100 0 0 1 6432 AL2ZRANGE80TO90 0 0 100 0 0 1 6433 AL2RANGE90TO 0 0 100 0 0 1 Group 81 PFC CONTROL 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 8109 START FREQ 1 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 01 50 0 Hz U1 60 0 Hz 8110 START FREQ 2 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 01 50 0 Hz U1 60 0 Hz 8111 START FREQ 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 01 50 0 Hz U1 60 0 Hz 8112 LOW FREQ 1 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 01 25 0 Hz U1 30 0 Hz 8113 LOW FREQ 2 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 01 25 0 Hz U1 30 0 Hz 8114 FREQ 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 01 25 0 Hz U1 30 0 Hz 8115 AUX MOT START D 0 0 3600 0 s 0 15 5 0 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 0 0 3600 0 s 0 15 3 0 s 8117 OF AUX MOT 0 4 1 1 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 1 TEST MODE 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1h 0 0 h NOT SEL 0 1 336 0 h 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL 0 0 100 0 0 1 50 0 8120 INTERLOCKS 0 6 1 4 DI4 Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 105 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 8121 BYPASS CTRL 0 1 YES 1 0 NO 8122 START DELAY 0 00 10 00 s 0 01 s 0 50
95. 0 IDT 12 1 70 2 0 Ilsco CCL 2 0 38 MT 25 1 Thomas amp Betts 54110 TBM 8 3 Burndy YAL27T38 MY29 3 2 Ilsco CRA 3 0 IDT 12 1 95 3 0 llsco CCL 3 0 38 MT 25 1 Thomas amp Betts 54111 TBM 8 3 Burndy YA28R4 MY29 3 2 Ilsco CRA 4 0 IDT 12 1 95 3 0 llsco CCL 4 0 38 MT 25 2 Thomas amp Betts 54112 TBM 8 4 Screw on terminal lugs 2 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Use the following procedure to attach cables if screw on terminal lugs are supplied and the cable size is 95 mm 3 0 AWG or larger 1 Attach the supplied screw on lugs to the drive end of the cables 2 Attach screw on lugs to the drive x X60003 Technical data ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 289 Motor connections WARNING Never connect line power to the drive output terminals U2 V2 or W2 Line voltage applied to the output can result in permanent damage to the drive If frequent bypassing is required use mechanically interlocked switches or contactors WARNING Do not connect any motor with a nominal voltage less than one half of the drive s nominal input voltage WARNING Disconnect the drive before conducting any voltage tolerance Hi Pot test or insulation resistance Megger test on the motor or motor cables Do not conduct these tests on the drive Motor connection specifications Motor connection specifications Voltage 02 0 U4
96. 08 8 8 8 A see section Ratings on page 277 for details Voltage rating 2 208 240 VAC 4 380 480 VAC 6 500 600 VAC Options Examples of options B055 IP54 UL type 12 no specification IP21 UL type 1 UL type 12 is not available for type ACS550 01 290A 4 0J400 No control panel J404 ACS CP C Basic Control Panel L511 OREL 01 Relay output extension K451 RDNA 01 DeviceNet K454 RPBA 01 PROFIBUS DP Ratings and frame size The chart in section Ratings on page 277 lists technical specifications and identifies the drive s frame size significant since some instructions in this document vary depending on the drive s frame size To read the ratings table you need the Output current rating entry from the type designation Also when using the ratings table note that the table is broken into sections based on the drive s Voltage rating Serial number The format of the drive serial number shown on the labels is described below Serial number is of format CYYWWXXXXX where C Country of manufacture YY Year of manufacture WW Week of manufacture 01 02 03 for week 1 week 2 week 3 XXXXX Integer starting every week from 00001 Installation 18 Motor compatibility ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual The motor drive and supply power must be compatible Motor specification Verify Reference Motor type 3 phase induction motor Nominal cu
97. 1 Hz for at least the time 8115 AUX MOT START D 8109 1 After the first auxiliary motor starts 8109 Output frequency decreases by the value 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 P 8112 In effect the output of the speed regulated motor drops to compensate for the input from the auxiliary motor fMIN See the figure where 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 B Output frequency increase during the start delay C A Diagram showing auxiliary motor s run status as frequency 1 increases 1 On 0 Note 8109 START FREQ 1 value must be between 8112 LOW FREQ 1 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 1 8110 START FREQ 2 Sets the frequency limit used to start the second auxiliary motor See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The second auxiliary motor starts if One auxiliary motor is running ACS550 output frequency exceeds the limit 8110 1 Output frequency stays above the relaxed limit 8110 1 Hz for at least the time 8115 AUX MOT START D 8111 START FREQ 3 Sets the frequency limit used to start the third auxiliary motor See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The third auxiliary motor starts if Two auxiliary motors are running ACS550 output frequency exceeds the limit 8111 1 Hz Output frequency stays above the relaxed limit 8111 1 Hz for at least the time 8115 AUX MOT ST
98. 1 READY TO OPERATE 0 OFF1 ACTIVE 2 RDY_REF 1 OPERATION ENABLED 0 OPERATION INHIBITED 3 TRIPPED 0 1 FAULT 0 No fault Fieldbus adapter 250 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual ABB Drives profile FBA STATUS WORD Bit Name Value Description Correspond to states boxes the state diagram 4 OFF 2 STA 1 OFF2 inactive 0 OFF2 ACTIVE 5 OFF 3 STA 1 OFF3 inactive 0 OFF3 ACTIVE 6 SWC ON INHIB 1 SWITCH ON INHIBIT ACTIVE 0 SWITCH ON INHIBIT NOT ACTIVE 7 ALARM 1 Alarm See section Alarm listing on page 267 for details on alarms No alarm 8 AT SETPOINT 1 OPERATING Actual value equals within tolerance limits the reference value 0 Actual value is outside tolerance limits not equal to reference value 9 REMOTE 1 Drive control location REMOTE EXT1 or EXT2 0 Drive control location LOCAL 10 ABOVE LIMIT 1 Supervised parameter s value gt supervision high limit Bit remains 1 until supervised parameter s value supervision low limit See Group 32 SUPERVISION 0 Supervised parameter s value supervision low limit Bit remains 0 until supervised parameter s value gt supervision high limit See Group 32 SUPERVISION 11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 External control location 2 EXT2 selected 0 External control location 1 EXT1 selected 12 EXT RUN ENABLE 1 External Run Enable signal received 0 No External Run Enable signal received 13 15 Unused
99. 2 See 3001 AIXMIN FUNCTION Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 151 Code Description 3023 WIRING FAULT Defines the drive response to cross wiring faults and to ground faults detected when the drive is NOT running When the drive is not running it monitors for e Improper connections of input power to the drive output the drive can display fault 35 OUTPUT WIRING if improper connections are detected Ground faults the drive can display fault 16 EARTH FAULT if a ground fault is detected Also see parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT Note Disabling wiring fault ground fault may void the warranty 0 DISABLE No drive response to either of the above monitoring results 1 ENABLE The drive displays faults when this monitoring detects problems 3024 CB TEMP FAULT Defines the drive response to control board overheating Not for drives with an OMIO control board DISABLE No response 1 ENABLE Displays fault 37 CB OVERTEMP and the drive coasts to stop 3028 EARTH FAULT LVL Defines detection level for earth fault See Correcting faults fault 16 EARTH FAULT Note Parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT has to be enabled 1 Low Low level leakage current high sensitivity The drive trips to low ground earth leakage current default in the USA software version 2 MEDIUM Medium sensitivity to ground earth fault current default in the European software version
100. 2 To specify the date format select DATE FORMAT on the menu press X and select a suitable format Press X to save or im zi to cancel your changes To specify the time format select TIME FORMAT on the menu press and select a suitable format Press X to save or to cancel your changes To set the time select SET TIME on the menu and press Ex Specify the hours with keys and S 7 and press Then specify the minutes Press X to save or tz to cancel your changes Hide cloc EXIT 00 00 SEL LOC DATE FORMAT 1 mm danny mm dd yyyy CANCEL 00 00 OK LOC TIME FORMAT 1 12 hour CANCEL 00 00 OK LOC USET TIME 41 CANCEL 00 00 OK Control panels ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 63 Step Action To set the date select SET DATE on the menu and press lt Specify the first part of the date day or month depending on the selected date format with keys 7 and S v 2 and press Ex Repeat for the second part After CANCEL Hee OK specifying the year press C To cancel your changes press CZ To enable or disable the automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes select DAYLIGHT SAVING on the menu and press xl Pressing opens the help that shows the beginning end dates of the period during which daylight saving time is used in each country or area whose daylight saving change
101. 2 40 50 distribution 6419 1 50 60 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current 2 50 60 distribution 6420 ALTRANGE60TO70 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current 2 60 70 distribution 6421 ALTRANGE70TO80 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current 2 70 80 distribution 6422 1 80 90 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current 2 80 90 distribution 6423 ALTRANGE90TO Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current 2 over 90 distribution 6424 AL2RANGEOTO10 Amplitude logger 2 signal selection with parameter 6404 0 10 distribution 6425 AL2RANGE10TO20 Amplitude logger 2 signal selection with parameter 6404 10 20 distribution 6426 AL2RANGE20TO30 Amplitude logger 2 signal selection with parameter 6404 20 30 distribution 6427 IALZRANGE30T040 Amplitude logger 2 signal selection with parameter 6404 30 40 distribution 6428 IALZRANGE40TO50 Amplitude logger 2 signal selection with parameter 6404 40 50 distribution 6429 AL2RANGES50TO60 Amplitude logger 2 signal selection with parameter 6404 50 60 distribution 6430 AL2RANGE60TO70 Amplitude logger 2 signal selection with parameter 6404 60 70 distribution 6431 AL2RANGET7OTO80 Amplitude logger 2 signal selection with paramet
102. 2105 the drive resumes normal operation DC hold ZZ T speed 2 DC BRAKING Enables the DC Injection Braking after modulation has stopped f parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is 1 COAST braking is applied after start is removed If parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is 2 RAMP braking is applied after ramp Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 137 Code Description 2105 DC HOLD SPEED Sets the speed for DC Hold Requires that parameter 2104 DC HOLD CTL 1 DC HOLD 2106 DC CURR REF Defines the DC current control reference as a percentage of parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 2107 DC BRAKE TIME Defines the DC brake time after modulation has stopped if parameter 2104 is 2 DC BRAKING 2108 START INHIBIT Sets the Start inhibit function on or off If the drive is not actively started and running the Start inhibit function ignores pending start command in any of the following situations and a new start command is required e A fault is reset Run Enable parameter 1601 activates while start command is active e Mode changes from local to remote e Control switches from EXT1 to EXT2 e Control switches from EXT2 to EXT1 0 Disables the Start inhibit function 1 ON Enables the Start inhibit function 2109 EMERG STOP SEL Defines control of the Emergency stop command When activated Emergency stop decelerates the motor using the
103. 3 FAULT 1 1404 RO 1 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s 1405 1 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s 1406 RO 2 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s 1407 RO2 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s 1408 RO3 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s 1409 RO 3 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 0 44 46 47 52 1 0 NOT SEL 1411 RELAY OUTPUT 5 0 44 46 47 52 1 0 NOT SEL 1412 RELAY OUTPUT 6 0 44 46 47 52 1 0 NOT SEL 1413 RO 4 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s 1414 4 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s 1415 RO 5 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s 1416 RO5 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s 1417 RO 6 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s 1418 RO 6 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 99 178 1 103 parameter 0103 Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 95 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN Depends on the signal selected with par 1501 1503 AO1 CONTENT Depends on the signal selected with par 1501 1504 MINIMUM AO1 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 0 0 mA 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 20 0 mA 1506 FILTER AO1 0 0 10 0 s 0 15 0 15 1507 2 CONTENT SEL 99 178 1 104 parameter 0104 CURRENT 1508 2 CONTENT MIN Depends on the signal
104. 3 grounds type MC continuous corrugated aluminium armor cable with symmetrical grounds Armored motor cable can share a cable tray with input power cables but not with control cables Shielded cable For shielded cable details see section Motor cable requirements for CE amp C Tick compliance on page 293 Grounding See section Ground connections on page 285 For CE compliant installations and installations where EMC emissions must be minimized see section Effective motor cable shields on page 294 Drive s motor connection terminals The drive s motor and input power terminals have the same specifications See section Drive s power connection terminals on page 286 Technical data ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 293 Motor cable requirements for CE amp C Tick compliance The requirements in this section apply for CE or C Tick compliance Minimum requirement CE amp C Tick The motor cable must be a symmetrical three conductor cable with a concentric PE conductor or a four conductor cable with a concentric shield however a symmetrical constructed PE conductor is always recommended The following figure shows the minimum requirement for the motor cable shield for example MCMK Draka NK Cables Insulation jacket Copper wire shield Inner insulation ZZ XY Recommendation for conductor layout The following figure compares conductor layout features in motor cables Recommended
105. 3 phase symmetrical Umax at the field weakening point Frequency 0 500 Hz Frequency resolution 0 01 Hz Current See section Ratings on page 277 Field weakening point 10 500 Hz Selectable See the availability in the table below 1 2 4 and 8 kHz 12 kHz 208 240 V All types Frame sizes R1 R4 in scalar control mode Switching frequency 380 480 V types Frame sizes R1 R4 except 5550 01 097 4 in scalar control mode 500 600 V All types Frame sizes R2 R4 in scalar control mode Cable temperature rating 90 C 194 F rating minimum Maximum motor cable See section Motor cable lengths on page 289 length Motor cable lengths Maximum motor cable lengths for 400 V and 600 V drives are given in the sections below In multimotor systems the calculated sum of all motor cable lengths must not exceed the maximum motor cable length given in the appropriate table below Technical data 290 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Motor cable length for 400 V drives The table below shows the maximum motor cable lengths for 400 V drives with different switching frequencies Examples for using the table are also given Maximum cable length for 400 V drives EMC limits Operational limits Second environment First environment i category C31 category C2 Basic unit 2 1 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 1 kHz 4 kHz 8kHz 1 4 kHz 8 12 kHz filters Frame
106. 430 16 9 490 19 3 596 23 5 602 23 7 700 27 6 H2 315 12 4 415 16 3 478 18 8 583 23 0 578 22 8 698 27 5 H3 369 14 5 469 18 5 583 23 0 689 27 1 736 29 0 888 35 0 D 212 8 3 222 8 7 231 9 1 262 10 3 286 11 3 400 15 8 00467918 xls C 1 ACS550 x1 221A 2 ACS550 x1 246A 4 ACS550 x1 248A 2 and ACS550 x1 290A 4 981 mm 38 6 in Technical data ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Drives with IP54 UL type 12 enclosures 305 Type ACS550 01 290A 4 IP54 UL type 12 not available frame size R6 E H3 D IP54 UL type 12 Dimensions for each frame size Ref R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 mm mm mm mm mm mm 213 84 213 84 257 10 1 257 101 369 14 5 410 16 1 W2 222 88 222 88 267 10 5 267 10 5 369 14 5 410 16 1 H3 461 18 2 561 221 629 248 760 29 9 775 30 5 9241 36 41 D 234 9 2 245 9 7 254 10 0 284 112 309 12 2 423 16 7 1 ACS550 01 290A 4 1119 44 1 in 2 UL type 12 not available for ACS550 01 290A 4 00467918 xls Technical data 306 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Weight The following table lists typical maximum weights f
107. 61 view the drive fault history of maximum ten faults after a power off only the three latest faults are kept in the memory see the details of the three latest faults after a power off the details of only the most recent fault is kept in the memory read the help text for the fault start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to view faults Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing xm if you are the Output mode otherwise LOC U MAIN MENU 1 by pressing repeatedly until you get to the Main menu PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER 2 Go to the Fault Logger mode by selecting FAULT LOGGER on the menu with LOC FAULT LOGGERS keys and amp Y 7 and pressing SS The display shows the fault log 10 19 03 05 1055 57 starting with the latest fault DC_UNDERVOLT 6 AI1 LOSS The number on the row is the fault code according to which the causes and corrective actions are listed in chapter Diagnostics EXIT 00 00 DETAIL 3 To see the details of a fault select it with keys A and lt 2 and press LOC PANEL LOSS DETAIL FAULT 10 FAULT TIME 1 13 04 57 FAULT TIME 2 EXIT 00 00 DIAG 4 AG LOC W DIAGNOSTICS To show the help text press Scroll the help text with keys and E 2 After reading the help press X to return to the previous display Check Comm li
108. Analog input circuit common N4 10 Reference voltage 10 V DC Q 5 2 External torque reference 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common D 7 AO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA Note 1 co 8 A07 Output 20 MA Reverses rotation direction in t719 AGND Analog output circuit common speed control 110 24 Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC Reverses torque direction in 411 GND Auxiliary voltage output common torque control L 112 DCOM Digital input common for all L 113 DI Start stop Activation starts the drive L7 114 012 Forward reverse Activation reverses direction L7 115 DI3 Speed torque control Activation selects torque control 2 116 014 Constant speed 1 1202 17 015 Ramp pair selection Activate to select 2nd acc dec ramp pair 118 DI6 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable Note 2 20 ROIA F 2 ted to 21 The sensor for Al2 is powered 21 RO1B eacy externally See the manufacturer s 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable instructions To use sensors supplied 23 RO2A Default operation by the drive aux voltage output see 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 page 86 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable 26 RO3A Default operation 27 RO3B Fault 1 2225 connected to 27 Fault 2 25 connected to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Two analog references 11 2 Analog output AO1 Speed J1
109. CE amp C Tick Allowed CE amp C Tick Symmetrical shielded cable three phase A separate PE conductor is required if the conductors and a concentric or otherwise conductivity of the cable shield is lt 50 of the symmetrically constructed PE conductor and a conductivity of the phase conductor shield Shield PE Shield conductor and shield ePE Shield Not allowed for motor cables CE amp C Tick A four conductor system three phase conductors and a protective conductor without a shield Allowed for motor cables with phase P conductor cross section up to 10 mm Technical data 294 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Effective motor cable shields The general rule for cable shield effectiveness is the better and tighter the cable s shield the lower the radiated emission level The following figure shows an example of an effective construction for example Olflex Servo FD 780 CP Lappkabel or MCCMK NK Cables Insulation jacket Inner insulator L2 Braided metallic shield L3 EN 61800 3 compliant motor cables The most efficient EMC filtering can be achieved by following these rules Motor cables must have an effective shield as described in section Effective motor cable shields on page 294 Motor cable shield wires must be twisted together into a bundle pig tail the bundle length must be less than five times its width and connected to the terminal marked at the bottom right hand c
110. Changes between local and remote control of the drive Help Displays context sensitive information when the key is pressed The information displayed describes the item currently highlighted in the center of the display STOP Stops the drive in local control START Starts the drive in local control Control panels ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 49 Status line The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive LOC J LOC 7 MENU 1 9 O 4 No Field Alternatives Significance 1 Control location LOC Drive control is local that is from the control panel REM Drive control is remote such as the drive I O or fieldbus 2 State vU Forward shaft direction J Reverse shaft direction Rotating arrow Drive is running at setpoint Dotted rotating arrow Drive is running but not at setpoint Stationary arrow Drive is stopped Dotted stationary arrow Start command is present but the motor is not running e g because start enable is missing 3 Panel operation Name of the current mode mode Name of the list or menu shown Name of the operation state e g PAR EDIT 4 Reference value Reference value in the Output mode or number of the Number of the highlighted item e g mode selected item parameter group or fault Operation You operate the control panel with menus and keys The keys
111. Check for and correct Encoder presence and proper connection reverse wired loose connection or short circuit Voltage logic levels are outside of the specified range A working and properly connected Pulse Encoder Interface Module OTAC 01 Wrong value entered in parameter 5001 PULSE NR A wrong value will only be detected if the error is such that the calculated slip is greater than 4 times the rated slip of the motor Encoder is not being used but parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE 1 ENABLE 2025 FIRST START Signals that a the drive is performing a First Start evaluation of motor characteristics This is normal the first time the motor is run after motor parameters are entered or changed See parameter 9910 ID RUN for a description of motor models 2026 RESERVED Not used 2027 USER LOAD CURVE This alarm warns that the condition defined by parameter 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than half of the time defined by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 2028 START DELAY Shown during the Start delay See parameter 2113 START DELAY Note 1 Even when the relay output is configured to indicate alarm conditions e g parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 5 ALARM or 16 FLT ALARM this alarm is not indicated by a relay output Alarm codes Basic Control Panel The Basic Control Panel indicates control panel alarms with a code A5xxx The following table lists the alarm codes
112. Class Bussmann type 03A3 4 3 3 10 10 JJS 10 04A1 4 4 1 05A4 4 54 06A9 4 6 9 08A8 4 8 8 15 JJS 15 012A 4 11 9 16 015A 4 15 4 20 JJS 20 023A 4 23 25 30 JJS 30 031A 4 31 35 40 JJS 40 038A 4 38 50 50 JJS 50 045A 4 45 60 JJS 60 059A 4 59 63 80 JJS 80 072A 4 72 80 90 JJS 90 078A 4 77 100 JJS 100 Technical data ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Fuses 500 600 V drives 283 ACS550 x1 Input current Input power mains fuses see below A IEC 60269 gG A ULClass T A Bussmann type 087A 4 87 125 125 JJS 125 097A 4 97 125A 4 125 160 175 JJS 175 157A 4 157 200 200 JJS 200 180A 4 180 250 250 JJS 250 195A 4 205 246A 4 246 315 350 JJS 350 290A 4 290 00467918 xls C ACS550 U1 Input current Input power mains fuses see below A IEC 60269 gG UL Class T A Bussmann type 02A7 6 2 7 10 10 JJS 10 03A9 6 3 9 06A1 6 6 1 09A0 6 9 0 16 15 JJS 15 011A 6 11 017A 6 17 25 25 JJS 25 022A 6 22 027A 6 27 35 40 JJS 40 032A 6 32 041A 6 41 50 50 JJS 50 052A 6 52 60 60 JJS 60 062A 6 62 80 80 JJS 80 077A 6 77 100 JJS 100 099A 6 99 125 150 JJS 150 125A 6 125 160 175 JJS 175 144A 6 144 200 200 JJS 200 Emergency stop devices 00467918 xls C The overall design of the installation must include emergency stop devices and any other safety equipment
113. Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The Command Word is 0301 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input 011 as the control for setting the local lock De activating the digital input locks out local control Activating the digital input enable the LOC selection 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for setting the local lock See DI1 INV above 1607 PARAM SAVE Saves all altered parameters to permanent memory Parameters altered through a fieldbus are not automatically saved to permanent memory To save you must use this parameter If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 2 NOT SAVED parameters altered from the control panel are not saved To save you must use this parameter If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 1 OPEN parameters altered from the control panel are stored immediately to permanent memory 0 DONE Value changes automatically when all parameters are saved 1 SAVE Saves altered parameters to permanent memory Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 131 Code Description 1608 START ENABLE 1 Selects the source of the start enable 1 signal Note Start enable functionality differs from the run enable functionality 0 NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external start enable signal 1 011 Defines digital input D11 as the start enable 1 signal This digital input must be
114. Connection example x1 1 10 kohmA 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 Al1 External ref 1 Manual or Ext ref 2 PID PFC 0 10 vi i 3 AGND Analog input circuit common Note 1 N4 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC Manual 0 10V 2 0 50 Hz p 5 AI2 Actual signal PID 4 20 mA PID PFC 0 10V gt 0 100 PID 6 AGND Analog input circuit common setpoint DH H7 1 Output frequency 0 20 mA D 8 2 Actual 1 PI controller actual value 0 4 20 mA 9 AGND Analog output circuit common 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 111 GND Auxiliary voltage output common L 42 DCOM Digital input common for all 4113 011 Start Stop Manual Activation starts the drive 414 DI2 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 1 15 DI3 EXT1 EXT2 selection Activation selects PFC control I 116 D4 Interlock Deactivation always stops the drive I 417 015 Interlock Deactivation stops constant speed motor 7 1418 DI6 Start Stop PFC Activation starts the drive Lens Relay output 1 programmable 3 for 12 is powered exter 20 Default operation nally See the manufacturer s instruc 21 RO1B Running gt 19 connected to 21 f tions To use sensors supplied by the 22 RO2C Relay outp
115. DI5 and DI6 are the digital inputs used 8 Defines the fieldbus as the reference source 9 COMM AI1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 11 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 10 11 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 11 DI3U 4D RNC Same as DI3U 4D R above except that Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference 12 DI3U 4D NC Same as DI3U 4D above except that Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference Stop command resets reference to zero 13 DI5U 6D NC Same as DI5U 6D above except that Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference 14 AI1 AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 15 Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 16 AI1 AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 17 AI1 AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 AI2 combination as
116. FREQ 0 500 Hz 1Hz 43 Hz 3711 LoAD TORQ LOW 3 0 600 1 25 3712 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3 0 600 1 300 3713 LOAD FREQ 4 0 500 Hz 1 Hz 50 Hz 3714 LOAD TORQ LOW 4 0 600 1 30 3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 0 60096 196 300 3716 LOAD FREQ 5 0 500 Hz 1 Hz 500 Hz 3717 LOAD TORQ LOW 5 0 600 1 30 3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 0 600 1 300 Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 4001 GAIN 0 1 100 0 0 1 1 0 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1 3600 0 s 0 1s 60 0 s 4003 DERIVATION TIME 0 0 10 0 s 0 1s 0 0s 4004 PID DERIV FILTER 0 0 10 0 s 0 1s 1 0s 4005 ERROR VALUE INV 0 NO 1 YES 1 0 NO 4006 UNITS 0 127 1 4 96 4007 SCALE 0 4 1 1 4008 0 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4006 0 0 4007 4009 100 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 100 0 4007 4010 SET POINT SEL 0 2 8 17 19 20 1 1 11 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 40 0 4007 4012 SETPOINT MIN 500 0 500 096 0 196 0 096 4013 SETPOINT MAX 500 0 500 096 0 196 100 096 4014 FBK SEL 1 13 1 1 ACT1 4015 FBK MULTIPLIER 0 000 NOT SEL 32 768 32 767 0 001 0 000 NOT SEL 4016 ACT INPUT 1 7 1 2 A2 4017 ACT2 INPUT 1 7 1 2 A12 4018 1 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4019 1 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4020 2 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 101
117. Function code Description 01 Read coil status 05 Force single coil 15 Hex Force multiple coils 1xxxx Mapping Modbus discrete inputs The drive maps the following information to the 1xxxx Modbus set called Modbus Discrete Inputs bit wise map of the STATUS WORD selected using parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE The first 32 inputs are reserved for this purpose discrete hardware inputs numbered sequentially beginning with input 33 The following table summarizes the 1xxxx reference set Modbus Internal location ABB DRV DCU PROFILE ref all profiles 5305 0 oR 2 5305 1 10001 STATUS WORD Bit 0 RDY_ON READY 10002 STATUS WORD Bit 1 RDY_RUN ENABLED 10003 STATUS WORD Bit 2 RDY REF STARTED 10004 STATUS WORD Bit 3 TRIPPED RUNNING 10005 STATUS WORD Bit 4 OFF 2 STA ZERO SPEED 10006 STATUS WORD Bit 5 OFF 3 STA ACCELERATE 10007 STATUS WORD Bit 6 SWC ON INHIB DECELERATE 10008 STATUS WORD Bit 7 ALARM AT SETPOINT 10009 STATUS WORD Bit 8 AT SETPOINT LIMIT 10010 STATUS WORD Bit 9 REMOTE SUPERVISION 10011 STATUS WORD Bit 10 ABOVE LIMIT REV REF 10012 STATUS WORD Bit 11 EXT2 REV ACT 10013 STATUS WORD Bit 12 RUN ENABLE PANEL LOCAL 10014 STATUS WORD Bit 13 N A FIELDBUS LOCAL 10015 STATUS WORD Bit 14 N A EXT2 ACT 10016 STATUS WORD Bit 15 N A FAU
118. LOC U PARAMETERS 9901 LANGUAGE ENGLISH 9902 APPLIC MACRO 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT EXIT 00 00 EDIT Select the appropriate parameter with keys and lt w 2 The current value of the parameter is shown below the selected parameter LOC 0 PARAMETERS 9901 LANGUAGE 9902 APPLIC MACRO ABB STANDARD 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT EXIT 00 00 EDIT LOC UPAR EDIT 9902 APPLIC MACRO ABB STANDARD 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Specify a new value for the parameter with keys and amp w 2 Pressing the key once increments or decrements the value Holding the key down changes the value faster Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed value with the default value LOC UPAR EDIT 9902 APPLIC MACRO 3 WIRE 2 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE To save the new value press X 5972 CANCEL To cancel the new value and keep the original press CZ LOC 0 PARAMETERS 9901 LANGUAGE 9902 APPLIC MACRO 3 WIRE 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT EXIT 00 00 EDIT Control panels 56 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual How to select the monitored signals Step Action Display 1 You can select which signals monitored in the Output mode and how they LOC EDIT are displayed with Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY parameters See page 55 for 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM d
119. Manual 103 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S Group 52 PANEL COMM 5201 STATION ID 1 247 1 1 5202 BAUD RATE 9 6 19 2 38 4 57 6 115 2 kbits s 9 6 kbits s 5203 PARITY 0 8 NONE 1 1 8 NONE 2 1 0 8 NONE 1 2 8 EVEN 1 3 8 ODD 1 5204 MESSAGES 0 65535 1 5205 PARITY ERRORS 0 65535 1 5206 FRAME ERRORS 0 65535 1 5207 BUFFER OVERRUNS 0 65535 1 5208 CRC ERRORS 0 65535 1 Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL 5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID 0 0xFFFF 1 0 5302 EFB STATION ID 0 65535 1 1 Y 5303 EFB BAUD RATE 1 2 2 4 4 8 9 6 19 2 38 4 57 6 76 8 9 6 kbits s kbits s 5304 EFB PARITY 0 8 NONE 1 1 8 NONE 2 0 8 NONE 1 2 8 EVEN 1 3 8 ODD 1 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE O ABB DRV LIM 1 DCU PROFILE 1 0 ABB DRV LIM 2 ABB DRV FULL 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES 0 65535 1 0 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS 0 65535 1 0 5308 EFB UART ERRORS 0 65535 1 0 5309 EFB STATUS 0 7 1 IDLE 5310 10 0 65535 1 0 5311 EFB PAR 11 0 65535 1 0 5312 PAR 12 0 65535 1 0 5313 EFB PAR 13 0 65535 1 0 5314 EFB PAR 14 0 65535 1 0 5315 PAR 15 0 65535 1 0 5316 PAR 16 0 65535 1 0 5317 EFBPAR 17 0 65535 1 0 5318 PAR 18 0 65535 1 0 5319 PAR 19 0000 FFFF hex 1 0 5320 EFB PAR 20 0000 F FFF hex 1 0 Group 64 LOAD ANALYZER 6
120. P 3006 20 trip curve 700 s and for a Class 30 trip curve 1050 s 3006 CURVE Output current relative to Sets the maximum allowable operating load of the motor 4 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR e With the default value 100 motor overload protection is functioning when the constant current exceeds 12796 of the parameter 9906 150 MOTOR NOM CURR value e The default overloadability is at the same level as what motor manufacturers typically allow below 30 86 ambient 3007 100 e Se temperature and below 1000 3300 ft altitude When the ambient 127 E temperature exceeds 30 C 86 F or the installation altitude is over p 399g 50 1000 m 3300 ft decrease the parameter 3007 value according to the motor manufacturer s recommendation 1 1 Example If the constant protection level needs to be 115 of the motor nominal current set parameter 3007 value to 91 P 3009 115 127 100 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD Sets the maximum allowable current at zero speed Value is relative to 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ Sets the break point frequency for the motor load curve Example Thermal protection trip times when parameters 3006 MOT THERM TIME 3007 MOT LOAD CURVE and 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD have default values lol IN 3 5 3 0 lo Output current IN Nominal motor current fo Output frequency Break point frequency 2 5
121. PARAM Selects the third parameter by number displayed on the control panel See parameter 3401 3416 SIGNAL3 MIN Defines the minimum expected value for the third display parameter See parameter 3402 3417 SIGNAL3 MAX Defines the maximum expected value for the third display parameter See parameter 3403 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM Defines the decimal point location for the third display parameter See parameter 3404 3419 OUTPUT3 UNIT Selects the units used with the third display parameter See parameter 3405 3420 OUTPUT3 MIN Sets the minimum value displayed for the third display parameter See parameter 3406 Parameters 158 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Description 3421 JOUTPUT3 MAX Sets the maximum value displayed for the third display parameter See parameter 3407 Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 159 Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS This group defines the detection and reporting for a particular potential fault motor overheating as detected by a temperature sensor Typical connections are shown below One sensor Three sensors n An x Motor B i Motor E AGND 8 2 z FU NT T F ai if P aot AO1 a AGND y 1 45nE L 3 8 nF D WARNING IEC 60664 requires double or reinforced insulation between live parts and the surface of accessible parts of electrical eq
122. PFC Relay 2 6 Notallowed Not allowed Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 199 Code Description 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL Selects Regulator by pass control When enabled Regulator by pass control provides a simple control mechanism without a PID regulator Use Regulator by pass control only in special applications 0 No Disables Regulator by pass control The drive fmax uses the normal PFC reference 1106 REF2 SELECT 1 YES Enables Regulator by pass control The process PID regulator is bypassed Actual value of PID is used as the PFC reference 8110 input Normally EXT REF2 is used as the PFC reference P 8109 The drive uses the feedback signal defined by 4014 FBK SEL or 4114 for the PFC frequency reference The figure shows the relation between the control P 8113 signal 4014 FBK SEL OR 4114 and the speed regulated motor s frequency in a three motor P 8112 4 system fmin Example In the diagram below the pumping station s P 4014 outlet flow is controlled by the measured inlet flow A gt lt No auxiliary motors running B One auxiliary motor running Mains 3 3 4 Contactors C Two auxiliary motors running 3 9550 P2 A Sewage tank Inlet pipe Outlet pipe3 8122 PFC START DELAY Sets the start delay for speed regulated m
123. PID control De activating the digital input enables external PID control 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for enabling external PID control See DIT INV above 4229 OFFSET Defines the offset for the PID output When PID is activated output starts from this value When PID is deactivated output resets to this value Parameter is active when 4230 TRIM MODE 0 trim mode is not active 4230 MODE Selects the type of trim if any Using the trim it is possible to combine a corrective factor to the drive reference 0 NOT SEL Disables the trim function 1 PROPORTIONAL Adds trim factor that is proportional to the rpm Hz reference 2 DIRECT Adds trim factor based on the control loop s maximum limit 4231 SCALE Defines the multiplier as a percent plus or minus used in the trim mode Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 179 Code Description 4232 CORRECTION SRC Defines the trimming reference for the correction source 1 PID2REF Uses appropriate REF MAX SWITCH A OR 1105 REF1 MAX when is active A 1108 REF2 MAX when REF2 is active B 2 PID2OUTPUT Uses the absolute maximum speed or frequency Switch C 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED if 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ if 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ
124. Panel Fw X XX ROM CRC XXXXXXXXXX Flash Rev X XX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Control panels 52 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual How to start stop and switch between local and remote control You can start stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode To be able to start or stop the drive the drive must be in local control Step Action Display 1 To switch between remote control REM shown on the status line and local LOC M MESSAGE h control LOC shown on the status line press 0 ree Note Switching to local control can be disabled with parameter 7606 LOCAL LOCK 100200 The very first time the drive is powered up it is in remote control REM and controlled through the drive I O terminals To switch to local control LOC and control the drive using the control panel press 9 The result depends how long you press the key If you release the key immediately the display flashes Switching to the local control mode the drive stops Set the local control reference as instructed on page 54 If you press the key for about two seconds the drive continues as before The drive copies the current remote values for the run stop status and the reference and uses them as the initial local control settings The arrow 6 or 3 on the status line stops rotating The arrow or 3 the status line starts rotating It is dotted until the drive
125. Parameter 1301 MINIMUM 11 or 1304 MINIMUM AI2 sets the minimum analog input signal This parameter sets the minimum frequency reference The value is a percentage of the maximum frequency or speed maximum process reference nominal torque 1108 REF2 MAX Sets the maximum for external reference 2 The maximum analog input signal in volts or amperes corresponds to REF2 MAX in 96 e Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM 11 or 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 sets the maximum analog input signal This parameter sets the maximum frequency reference e The value is a percentage of the maximum frequency or speed maximum process reference nominal torque Parameters 120 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS This group defines a set of constant speeds In general You can program up to 7 constant speeds ranging from 0 500 Hz or 0 30000 rpm Values must be positive No negative speed values for constant speeds Constant speed selections are ignored if the torque control is active or the process PID reference is followed or the drive is in local control mode or PFC Pump Fan Control is active Note Parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7 acts also as a so called fault speed which may be activated if the control signal is lost For example see parameters 3001 lt FUNCTION 3002 PANEL COMM ERR and 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC Code Description 1201 CONST SPEED SEL Defines t
126. R1 R2 14 1 R3 2 5 1 8 R4 5 6 PE 2 4 PE 1 5 R5 15 11 R6 40 PE 8 30 PE 6 Connect the ground shield bundle pig tail for digital and analog I O cables at X1 1 Ground only at the drive end Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals See section Control terminals table page 28 Use a tightening torque of 0 4 N m 0 3 Ib ft Installation ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 35 Check installation Before applying power perform the following checks Installation environment conforms to the drive s specifications for ambient conditions The drive is mounted securely Space around the drive meets the drive s specifications for cooling The motor and driven equipment are ready for start For IT systems and corner grounded TN systems The internal EMC filter is disconnected see section Disconnecting the internal EMC filter on page 27 The drive is properly grounded The input power mains voltage matches the drive nominal input voltage The input power mains connections at U1 V1 and W1 are connected and tightened as specified The input power mains fuses are installed The motor connections at U2 V2 and W2 are connected and tightened as specified The motor cable is routed away from other cables NO power factor compensation capacitors are in the motor cable The control connections are connected
127. REV Displays the CPI firmware revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter configuration file Format is xyz where x major revision number minor revision number Z7 correction number Example 107 revision 1 07 5129 FILE CONFIG ID Displays the revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter module s configuration file identification File configuration information is drive application program dependent 5130 FILE CONFIG REV Contains the revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter module configuration file Example 1 revision 1 5131 FBA STATUS Contains the status of the adapter module 0 IDLE Adapter not configured 1 EXECUT INIT Adapter is initializing 2 TIME OUT A timeout has occurred in the communication between the adapter and the drive 3 CONFIG ERROR Adapter configuration error The revision code of the adapter s CPI firmware revision is older than required CPI firmware version defined in the drive s configuration file parameter 5132 5128 4 OFF LINE Adapter is off line 5 ON LINE Adapter is on line 6 RESET Adapter is performing a hardware reset 5132 FBA CPI FW REV Contains the revision of the module s CPI program Format is xyz where x major revision number minor revision number Z7 correction number Example 107 revision 1 07 5133 FBA APPL FW REV Contains the revision of the module s application program Format
128. RUN This parameter controls a self calibration process called the Motor ID Run During this process the drive operates the motor motor rotating and makes measurements in order to identify motor characteristics and create a model used for internal calculations An ID Run is especially effective when vector control mode is used parameter 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ and or operation point is near zero speed and or operation requires a torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback i e without a pulse encoder OFF IDMAGN The Motor ID Run process is not run Identification magnetization is performed depending on parameter 9904 and 2101 settings In identification magnetization the motor model is calculated at first start by magnetizing the motor for 10 to 15 s at zero speed motor not rotating The model is recalculated always at start after motor parameter changes Parameter 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ Identification magnetization is performed Parameter 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ and parameter 2101 3 SCALAR FLYST or 5 FLY BOOST Identification magnetization is performed Parameter 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ and parameter 2101 has other value than 3 SCALAR FLYST or 5 FLY BOOST Identification magnetization is not performed 1 oN Enables the Motor ID Run during which the motor is rotating at the next start command
129. Range type Scaling Remarks REF1 214783648 Speed or 1000 1 rpm 1 Hz Final reference limited by u frequency 1104 1105 Actual motor 4214783647 speed limited by 2001 2002 speed or 2007 2008 frequency REF2 214783648 Speed or 1000 1 Final reference limited by 45 1107 1108 Actual motor 214783647 speed limited by 2001 2002 speed or 2007 2008 frequency Torque 1000 1 Final reference limited by 2015 2017 torque1 or 2016 2018 torque2 PID 1000 196 Final reference limited by Reference 4012 4013 PID set1 or 4112 4113 PID set2 Note The setting of parameter 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN has no effect on the scaling of references Embedded fieldbus 234 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Scaling examples When parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to 1 or 11 the reference is scaled as follows ABB Drives and DCU profiles Reference Value Al reference scaling setting REF1 COMM AI1 COMM 96 96 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus reference correction coefficient 100 0 5 Par 1105 1 100 77 777 11 input signal 100 0 5 par 1105 gt ox 50 100 REF1 COMM AI1 COMM 96 Al 96 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus reference correction coefficient 200 1 100 777777777 l input
130. Ref CW 0 Ref 0 Fieldbus control enabled Ref and deceleration acceleration ramp are locked 11 EXT CTRLLOC 1 EXT2 SELECT Select external control location 2 EXT2 Effective if 1102 2 COMM 0 EXT1 SELECT Select external control location 1 ExT1 Effective if 1102 2 COMM 12 Unused 15 DCU Profile The following tables describe the CONTROL WORD content for the DCU profile DCU profile CONTROL WORD See parameter 0301 Bit Name Value Command Req Comments 0 STOP 1 Stop Stops according to either the stop mode parameter or the stop mode requests bits 7 0 8 1 START 1 Start Simultaneous STOP and START commands result in a stop command 0 no op 2 REVERSE 1 Reverse direction This bit XOR d with the sign of the reference ae defines direction 0 Forward direction 3 LOCAL 1 Local mode When the fieldbus sets this bit it steals 0 control and the drive moves to fieldbus local xternal mode control mode 4 RESET gt 1 Reset Edge sensitive other no op 5 EXT2 1 Switch to EXT2 0 Switch to EXT1 6 DISABLE 1 Run disable Inverted run enable 0 Run enable on 7 STPMODE R 1 Normal ramp stop mode 0 no op Embedded fieldbus ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 227 DCU profile CONTROL WORD See parameter 0301 Bit Name Value Command Req Comments STPMODE_EM 1 Emergency ramp sto
131. Reference 1 is speed reference rpm Reference 2 is torque reference in 100 is nominal torque 3 SCALAR FREQ scalar control mode Reference 1 is frequency reference in Hz Reference 2 is frequency reference in 100 is absolute maximum frequency equal to the value of parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ or 2007 MINIMUM FREQ if the absolute value of the minimum speed is greater than the maximum speed Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 107 Code Description 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT Defines the nominal motor voltage Must equal the value on the motor rating plate Output voltage The ACS550 cannot supply the motor with a voltage greater than the input A power mains voltage 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 9905 Defines the nominal motor current Must equal the value on the motor rating plate Range allowed 0 2 2 0 long where las is drive current Output 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ frequency Defines the nominal motor frequency P 9907 e Range 10 500 Hz typically 50 or 60 Hz Sets the frequency at which output voltage equals the MOTOR NOM VOLT Field weakening point Nom Freq Supply Volt Mot Nom Volt 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED Defines the nominal motor speed Must equal the value on the motor rating plate 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER Defines the nominal motor power Must equal the value on the motor rating plate 9910 ID
132. The serial communication channel is defined as the source for controlling commands set using parameters such as 1001 ExT1 COMMANDS 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS and 1102 1 2 SEL The serial communication channel used is configured to use an ABB control profile For example to use the control profile ABB DRV FULL requires both parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL 7 1 STD MODBUS and parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE 2 ABB DRV FULL Embedded fieldbus ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual ABB Drives profile 225 The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the CONTROL WORD content for the ABB Drives profile ABB Drives profile CONTROL WORD See parameter 5319 Bit Name Value Commanded Comments state 0 1 1 READY TO OPERATE Enter READY TO OPERATE CONTROL 0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive ramps to stop according to currently active deceleration ramp 2203 or 2205 Normal command sequence Enter OFF1 ACTIVE Proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks OFF2 OFF3 are active 1 OFF2 1 OPERATING Continue operation OFF2 inactive CONTROL z 0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive coasts to stop Normal command sequence Enter OFF2 ACTIVE Proceed to SWITCHON INHIBITED 2 OFF3 1 OPERATING Continue operation OFF3 inactive CONTROL ERE 0 EMERGENCY STOP Drive stops within time specified by parameter 2208 Normal command sequence Enter OF
133. Transactions are half duplex featuring a single Master controlling one or more Slaves While RS232 can be used for point to point communication between a single Master and a single Slave a more common implementation features a multi drop RS485 network with a single Master controlling multiple Slaves The ACS550 features RS485 for its Modbus physical interface The Modbus specification defines two distinct transmission modes ASCII and RTU The ACS550 supports RTU only Feature summary The following Modbus function codes are supported by the ACS550 Holding Registers Function Code Hex Description Read Coil Status 0x01 Read discrete output status For the ACS550 the individual bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1 16 Relay outputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 e g RO1 Coil 33 Read Discrete Input 0x02 Read discrete inputs status For the ACS550 the individual bits Status of the status word are mapped to Inputs 1 16 or 1 32 depending on the active profile Terminal inputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Input 33 e g DI1 Input 33 Read Multiple 0x03 Read multiple holding registers For the ACS550 the entire Holding Registers parameter set is mapped as holding registers as well as command status and reference values Read Multiple Input 0x04 Read multiple input registers For the ACS550 the 2 analog input Registers channels are mapped as i
134. X00302 section Communication set up FBA on page 241 section Activate drive control functions FBA on page 241 The protocol specific documentation provided with the module Fieldbus adapter ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 241 Communication set up Serial communication selection To activate the serial communication use parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL Set 9802 4 EXT FBA Serial communication configuration Setting 9802 together with mounting a particular FBA module automatically sets the appropriate default values in parameters that define the communication process These parameters and descriptions are defined in the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Parameter 5101 is automatically configured Parameters 5102 5126 are protocol dependent and define for example the profile used and additional I O words These parameters are referred to as the fieldbus configuration parameters See the user s manual provided with the FBA module for details on the fieldbus configuration parameters Parameter 5127 forces the validation of changes to parameters 5102 5126 If parameter 5127 is not used changes to parameters 5102 5126 take affect only after the drive power is cycled Parameters 5128 5133 provide data about the FBA module currently installed e g component versions and status See Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE for parameter descriptions Activate drive control functions
135. X1 28 32 on the control board a control system can communicate with the drive using the Modbus protocol For protocol and profile descriptions see sections Modbus protocol technical data and ABB control profiles technical data later in this chapter fieldbus adapter FBA See chapter Fieldbus adapter on page 237 Control interface In general the basic control interface between Modbus and the drive consists of Output words Control Word Reference1 Reference2 Input words Status Word Actual value 1 Actual value 2 Embedded fieldbus 204 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Actual value 3 Actual value 4 Actual value 5 Actual value 6 Actual value 7 Actual value 8 The content of these words is defined by profiles For details on the profiles used sees section ABB control profiles technical data on page 224 Note The words output and input are used as seen from the fieldbus controller point of view For example an output describes data flow from the fieldbus controller to the drive and appears as an input from the drive point of view Planning Network planning should address the following questions What types and quantities of devices must be connected to the network What control information must be sent down to the drives What feedback information must be sent from the drives to the controlling system Mechanical and electrical installati
136. and descriptions Code Description 5001 Drive is not responding 5002 The communication profile is incompatible with the drive 5010 The panel s parameter backup file is corrupted 5011 Drive is controlled from another source 5012 Rotation direction is locked 5013 Button is disabled because start is inhibited 5014 Button is disabled because drive is faulted 5015 Button is disabled because local mode lock is on 5018 Parameter default value can t be found 5019 Writing a non zero value is prohibited can only write a zero value 5020 Group or parameter does not exist or parameter value is inconsistent 5021 Group or parameter is hidden 5022 Group or parameter is write protected 5023 Modification is not allowed while the drive is running Diagnostics 270 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Description 5024 Drive is busy try again 5025 Write is not allowed while upload or download is in progress 5026 Value is at or below low limit 5027 Value is at or above high limit 5028 Value is invalid doesn t match any values in the discrete values list 5029 Memory is not ready try again 5030 Request is invalid 5031 Drive is not ready e g due to low DC voltage 5032 Parameter error was detected 5040 Selected parameter set can t be found in the c
137. and tightened as specified NO tools or foreign objects such as drill shavings are inside the drive NO alternate power source for the motor such as a bypass connection is connected no voltage is applied to the output of the drive Installation 36 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Reinstall the cover IP21 UL type 1 1 IP54 UL type 12 1 2 2 Tighten the captive screw 3 4 Continue with start up See chapter Start up Align the cover and slide it on 7 24 Reinstall the control panel n D M control with I O and ID Run on page 37 Align the cover and slide it on Tighten the captive screws around the edge of the cover Slide the hood down over the top of the cover Only needed for UL type 12 installations Install the two screws that attach the hood Only needed for UL type 12 installations Install the control panel Note The control panel window must be closed to comply with IP54 UL type 12 6 Optional Add a lock not supplied to secure the control panel window 7 Continue with start up See chapter Start up control with I O and ID Run on page 37 Installation ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 37 Start up control with I O and ID Run The chapter instructs how to perform the start up start stop chang
138. are voltage 380 480 V drives Py KW 3 75 15 37 132 Rcomp V 18 15 12 8 3 IR compensated No compensation 2603 2604 IIR COMP FREQ f Hz Sets the frequency at which IR compensation is 0 V in B i of motor frequency B Js 2605 U F RATIO Selects the form for the U f voltage to frequency ratio below field weakening point 1 LINEAR Preferred for constant torque applications 2 SQUARED Preferred for centrifugal pump and fan applications SQUARED is more silent for most operating frequencies Parameters 146 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Description 2606 SWITCHING FREQ Sets the switching frequency for the drive Also see parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL and section Switching frequency derating on page 280 Higher switching frequencies mean less noise In multimotor systems do not change the switching frequency from the default value 12 kHz switching frequency is available in scalar control mode that is when parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ See the availability of switching frequencies for different drive types in the table below 1 2 4 and 8 kHz 12 kHz 208 240 V All types Frame sizes R1 R4 in scalar control mode 380 480 V All types Frame sizes R1 R4 except ACS550 01 097A 4 in scalar control mode 500 600 V All types Fra
139. are defined in the following table In such systems disconnect the internal ground connection through the EMC filter capacitors do this also if the grounding configuration of the system is unknown see section Disconnecting the internal EMC filter on page 27 Corner grounded TN systems EMC filter must be disconnected Grounded at the L1 Grounded at the L1 corner of the mid point of a delta delta leg 4 12 X L2 L3 L3 Single phase L1 Three phase L1 grounded at an Variac without L1 end point solidly grounded neutral L2 N 3 The EMC filter capacitors internal ground connection that reduces electro magnetic emission Where EMC electro L1 magnetic compatibility is a concern and the system is symmetrically grounded the EMC filter may be connected For reference the diagram on the right illustrates a symmetrically grounded TN system TN S system L2 L3 Technical data 286 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual IT systems WARNING Do not attempt to install or remove the EMC filter screws EM1 EM3 F1 or F2 while power is applied to the drive s input terminals For IT systems an ungrounded power system or a high resistance grounded over 30 ohm power system Disconnect the ground connection to the internal EMC filter see section Disconnecting the internal EMC filter on page 27 Where EMC requirements exist check for excessive emission pr
140. by a proper factory grounding WARNING All ELV Extra Low Voltage circuits connected to the drive must be used The terminals on the control board as well as on the optional modules attachable to the board fulfil the Protective Extra Low Voltage PELV requirements stated in EN 50178 provided that the external circuits connected to the terminals also fulfil the requirements and the installation site is below 2000 m 6562 ft You can wire the digital input terminals in either a PNP or NPN configuration PNP connection source NPN connection sink X1 X1 10 24V 10 1 24V r 11 GND 11 GND L12 DCOM 12 DCOM 13 DI1 13 D1 14 DI2 141012 15 013 15 DI3 16 014 16 DI4 17 015 17 1015 18 DI6 18 DI6 Installation 30 Wiring 1 21 UL type 1 enclosure with cables Open the appropriate knockouts in the conduit gland Install the cable clamps for the power motor cables ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Check the insulation of the assembly Drive Do not make any voltage tolerance or insulation resistance tests on any part of the drive as testing can damage the drive Every drive has been tested for insulation between the main circuit and the chassis at the factory Also there are voltage limiting circuits inside the drive which cut down the testing voltage automatically
141. clamp 5 Route both cables through the clamps 6 Strip and connect the power motor wires and the 8 Install conduit gland box and tighten the cable clamps power ground wire to the drive terminals See the table on the right for tightening torques 31 1 2001 Frame Tightening torque size IN m Ib ft R1 R2 1 4 1 R3 2 5 1 8 R4 5 6 PE 2 4 PE 1 5 R5 15 11 R6 40 PE 8 30 PE 6 Note For R6 frame size refer to section Power terminal considerations R6 frame size on page 287 Connect the bundle pig tail created from the motor cable shield to the GND terminal 9 Install the cable clamp s for the control cable s 10 11 12 13 14 Power motor cables and clamps not shown in the figure Strip control cable sheathing and twist the copper shield into a bundle pig tail Route control cable s through clamp s and tighten clamp s Connect the ground shield bundle pig tail for digital and analog I O cables at X1 1 Ground only at the drive end Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals See section Control terminals table on page 28 Use a tightening torque of 0 4 N m 0 3 lb ft Install the conduit gland box cover 1 screw X0005 X0006 1P2003 Installation 32 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Wiring IP21 UL type 1 enclosure with conduit 1 Open the appropriate knockout
142. compensation t 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN Starts automatic tuning of the speed controller oFF Disables the Autotune creation process Does not disable the operation of Autotune settings 1 ON Activates speed controller autotuning Automatically reverts to OFF Procedure Note The motor load must be connected Run the motor at a constant speed of 20 to 40 of the rated speed Change the autotuning parameter 2305 to ON The drive Accelerates the motor Calculates values for proportional gain integration time and acceleration compensation Changes parameters 2301 2302 and 2304 to these values Resets 2305 to Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 143 Group 24 TORQUE CONTROL This group defines variables used for torque control operation Code Description 2401 RAMP UP Defines the torque reference ramp up time The minimum time for the reference to increase from zero to the nominal motor torque 2402 RAMP DOWN Defines the torque reference ramp down time The minimum time for the reference to decrease from the nominal motor torque to zero Parameters 144 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Group 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS This group defines up to three critical speeds or ranges of speeds that are to be avoided due for example to mechanical resonance problems at certain speeds Code Description 2501
143. continuous power rating Deceleration to zero rating Pao ACS550 Po 30 Pio Continuous ON U1 Ruax Run 535 0 lt 1050 lt 3050 lt 6050 gt 60s ON see below gt 27s OFF gt 50s OFF gt 180s OFF gt 180 s OFF lt 10 Duty lt 17 Duty lt 14 Duty lt 25 Duty gt 25 Duty ohm ohm Three phase supply voltage 500 600 V 02A7 6 548 80 93 175 257 425 1462 03A9 6 373 80 137 257 377 624 2144 06A1 6 224 80 228 429 629 1040 3573 09A0 6 149 80 342 643 943 1560 5359 011A 6 110 60 467 877 1286 2127 7308 017A 6 75 60 685 1286 1886 3119 10718 1 Resistor time constant specification must be 85 seconds WARNING Never use a brake resistor with a resistance below the minimum value specified for the particular drive The drive and the internal chopper are not able to handle the overcurrent caused by the low resistance Symbols Minimum allowed resistance of the braking resistor Rmax Maximum resistance allowed if maximum braking torque is necessary Technical data 298 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual P Duty cycle based resistor power rating in deceleration braking where is ONmax time Installing and wiring resistors AN All resistors must be installed outside the drive module in a place where they can dissipate heat WARNING The surface temperature of the resistor is very hig
144. control panel or PC tool local mode 0 Control is not in control panel local mode 13 FIELDBUS LOCAL 1 Control is in fieldbus local mode steals control panel local 0 Control is not in fieldbus local mode 14 EXT2 ACT 1 Control is in EXT2 mode 0 Control is in EXT1 mode 15 FAULT 1 Drive is in a fault state 0 Drive is not in a fault state Embedded fieldbus 230 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual DCU profile STATUS WORD See parameter 0304 Bit Name Value Status 16 ALARM 1 An alarm is on 0 No alarms are on 17 REQ_MAINT 1 A maintenance request is pending 0 No maintenance request is pending 18 DIRLOCK 1 Direction lock is ON Direction change is locked out 0 Direction lock is OFF 19 LOCALLOCK 1 Local mode lock is ON Local mode is locked out 0 Local mode lock is OFF 20 CTL_MODE 1 Drive is in vector control mode 0 Drive is in scalar control mode 21 25 Reserved 26 REQ_CTL 1 Copy the control word 0 no op 27 REQ REF1 1 Reference 1 requested in this channel 0 Reference 1 is not requested in this channel 28 REQ REF2 1 Reference 2 requested in this channel 0 Reference 2 is not requested in this channel 29 REQ REF2EXT 1 External PID reference 2 requested in this channel 0 External PID reference 2 is not requested in this channel 30 ACK STARTINH 1 A start inhibit from this channel is granted 0 A start inhi
145. current is excessive Check for and correct Faulty motor motor cables or connections Insufficient acceleration time parameters 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 and Diagnostics ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 261 Fault code Fault name in panel Description and recommended corrective action DC OVERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is excessive Check for and correct Static or transient overvoltages in the input power supply Insufficient deceleration time parameters 2203 DECELER TIME 1 and 2206 DECELER TIME 2 Undersized brake chopper if present Verify that overvoltage controller is ON using parameter 2005 DEV OVERTEMP Drive heatsink is overheated Temperature is at or above limit R1 R4 115 C 239 F R5 R6 125 C 257 F Check for and correct Fan failure Obstructions in the air flow Dirt or dust coating on the heat sink Excessive ambient temperature Excessive motor load SHORT CIRC Fault current Check for and correct A short circuit in the motor cable s or motor Supply disturbances RESERVED Not used DC UNDERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient Check for and correct Missing phase in the input power supply Blown fuse Undervoltage on mains Al1 LOSS Analog input 1 loss Analog input value is less than Al1 FAULT LIMIT 3021 Check for and correct Source and connection for analo
146. detected data parameter 110 zero pulse enable parameter 181 energy saving parameter 180 CO2 conversion factor parameter 180 energy price parameter 180 energy reset parameter 180 pump power parameter 180 saved amount 1 data parameter 111 saved amount 2 data parameter 111 saved CO2 data parameter 111 saved kWh data parameter 111 saved MWh data parameter 111 error value inversion PID parameter 171 exception codes EFB modbus 223 external comm module parameter group see FBA drive parameters external commands selection parameter 115 external control selection parameter 117 external fault automatic reset parameter 152 fault codes o eee em ees 262 148 external reference data parameter 108 Index ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual F F1 and F2 screws location deem Seg el 26 on corner grounded TN system 27 IT 27 on symmetrically grounded TN systems 27 Ga rae 26 285 286 fan COMUOL itus 132 maintenance 272 274 fault functions parameter group 148 history parameter group 114 COGdeS
147. emergency stop ramp parameter 2208 EMERG DEC TIME Requires an external stop command and removal of the emergency stop command before drive can restart 0 NOT SEL Disables the Emergency stop function through digital inputs 1 011 Defines digital input 011 as the control for Emergency stop command Activating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command De activating the digital input removes the Emergency stop command 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for Emergency stop command See DI1 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input 011 as the control for Emergency stop command De activating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command Activating the digital input removes the Emergency stop command 2 6 DIZ INV DIG INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for Emergency stop command See DI1 INV above 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR Sets the maximum supplied current during torque boost See parameter 2101 START FUNCTION Parameters 138 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Description 2112 ZERO SPEED DELAY Defines the delay for the Zero Speed Delay function If parameter value is set to zero the Zero Speed Delay function is disabled The function is useful in applications where a smooth and quick restarting is essential During the delay the drive knows accurately the rotor position No Z
148. for REF1 and REF2 Code Description 1101 KEYPAD REF SEL Selects the reference controlled in local control mode 1 REF1 Hz rpm Reference type depends on parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE Speed reference rpm if 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ Frequency reference Hz if 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ 2 REF2 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL Defines the source for selecting between the two external control locations EXT1 or EXT2 Thus defines the source for Start Stop Direction commands and reference signals 0 EXT1 Selects external control location 1 EXT1 See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS for ExT1 s Start Stop Dir definitions See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT for ExT1 s reference definitions 1 011 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of DI1 011 activated EXT2 011 de activated EXT1 2 6 DI2 DI6 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the selected digital input See 011 above 7 EXT2 Selects external control location 2 EXT2 See parameter 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS for EXT2 s Start Stop Dir definitions See parameter 1106 REF2 SELECT for EXT2 s reference definitions 8 COMM Assigns control of the drive via external control location EXT1 or EXT2 based on the fieldbus control word Bit 5 of the Command Word 1 parameter 0301 defines the active external control location EXT1 or EXT2 See Fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 9 T
149. gt 25 Duty ohm ohm Three phase supply voltage 208 240 V 04A6 2 234 80 45 80 120 200 1100 06A6 2 160 80 65 120 175 280 1500 07A5 2 117 44 85 160 235 390 2200 012A 2 80 44 125 235 345 570 3000 017A 2 48 44 210 390 575 950 4000 024A 2 32 30 315 590 860 1425 5500 031A 2 23 22 430 800 1175 1940 7500 1 Resistor time constant specification must be 85 seconds Technical data ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 297 380 480 V drives Resistance Resistor minimum continuous power rating Deceleration to zero rating Pont ACS550 30 Pio Continuous ON 01 U1 Rmax Ruy S3SON lt 1050 lt 3050 lt 6050 gt 60s ON see below gt 27 s OFF gt 50 s OFF gt 1805 OFF gt 180 s OFF lt 10 Duty lt 17 Duty lt 14 Duty lt 25 Duty gt 25 Duty ohm ohm Three phase supply voltage 380 480 V 03A3 4 641 120 65 120 175 285 1100 04A1 4 470 120 90 160 235 390 1500 05A4 4 320 120 125 235 345 570 2200 06A9 4 235 80 170 320 470 775 3000 08 8 4 192 80 210 400 575 950 4000 012 4 128 80 315 590 860 1425 5500 015 4 94 63 425 800 1175 1950 7500 023A 4 64 63 625 1175 1725 2850 11000 1 Resistor time constant specification must be gt 85 seconds 500 600 V drives Resistance Resistor minimum
150. include two context sensitive soft keys whose current function is indicated by the text shown in the display above each key You select an option e g operation mode or parameter by scrolling the and Cw arrow keys until the option is highlighted in reverse video and then pressing the relevant soft key With the right soft key you usually enter a mode accept an option or save the changes The left soft key is used to cancel the made changes and return to the previous operation level The Assistant Control Panel has nine panel modes Output Parameters Assistants Changed Parameters Fault Logger Time and Date Parameter Backup I O Settings and Fault The operation in the first eight modes is described in this chapter When a fault or alarm occurs the panel goes automatically to the Fault mode showing the fault or alarm You can reset it in the Output or Fault mode see chapter Diagnostics Control panels 50 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Initially the panel is in the Output mode where you can LOC t start stop change the direction switch between local and 49 1 Hz remote control modify the reference value and monitor up to three actual values do other tasks go first to the 10 7 Main menu and select the appropriate mode on the menu DIR 00 00 MENU The status line see section Status line on page 49 shows LOC UMAIN MENU 1 the name of the current menu mode item or state ASSISTANTS CHANGED PA
151. is xyz see parameter 5132 Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 183 Group 52 PANEL COMM This group defines the communication settings for the control panel port on the drive Normally when using the supplied control panel there is no need to change settings in this group In this group parameter modifications take effect on the next power up Code Description 5201 STATION ID Defines the address of the drive Two units with the same address are not allowed on line Range 1 247 5202 BAUD RATE Defines the communication speed of the drive in kbits per second kb s 9 6 kb s 19 2 kb s 38 4 kb s 57 6 kb s 115 2 kb s 5203 PARITY Sets the character format to be used with the panel communication 0 8 NONE 1 8 data bits no parity one stop bit 1 8 NONE 2 8 data bits no parity two stop bits 2 8 EVEN 1 8 data bits even parity one stop bit 3 8 ODD 1 8 data bits odd parity one stop bit 5204 MESSAGES Contains a count of valid Modbus messages received by the drive During normal operation this counter is increasing constantly 5205 PARITY ERRORS Contains a count of the characters with a parity error that is received from the bus For high counts check e Parity settings of devices connected on the bus they must not differ Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors 5206 FRAME ERRORS Contains a count of t
152. load fault parameter 149 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Index Further information Product and service inquiries Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative quoting the type designation and serial number of the unit in question A listing of ABB sales support and service contacts can be found by navigating to www abb com searchchannels Product training For information on ABB product training navigate to www abb com drives and select Training courses Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals Your comments on our manuals are welcome Go to www abb com drives and select Document Library Manuals feedback form LV AC drives Document library on the Internet You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the Internet Go to www abb com drives and select Document Library You can browse the library or enter selection criteria for example a document code in the search field Contact us www abb com drives www abb com drivespartners 3AFE64804588 3AUA0000001418 Rev H EN EFFECTIVE 2014 07 04 SUPERSEDES 3AFE64804588 3AUA0000001418 Rev G 2009 07 07 Ausg E464804588 3 141 A5RH nang1418 H ED ED Power and productivity for a better world PA ai
153. means that no signal is displayed Repeat for signals 2 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM and 3 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM For example if 3407 0 and 3415 0 browsing is disabled and only the signal specified by 3408 appears in the display If all three parameters are set to 0 i e no signals are selected for monitoring the panel displays text n A 2 Specify the decimal point location or use the decimal point location and LOC unit of the source signal setting 9 DIRECT Bar graphs are not available for Basic Operation Panel For details see parameter 3404 PAR FWD Signal 1 parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM Signal 2 parameter 3411 OUTPUT2 DSP FORM Signal 3 parameter 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM 3 Select the units to be displayed for the signals This has no effect if LOC parameter 3404 3411 3418 is set to 9 DIRECT For details see parameter 3405 PAR FWD Signal 1 parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT Signal 2 parameter 3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT Signal 3 parameter 3419 OUTPUTS UNIT 4 Select the scalings for the signals by specifying the minimum and LOC maximum display values This has no effect if parameter 3404 3411 3418 is Hiz set to 9 DIRECT For details see parameters 3406 and 3407 PAR FWD Signal 1 parameters 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN and 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX Loc D 0 0 0 Signal 2 parameters 3413 OUTPUT2 MIN and 3414 OUTPUT2 MAX He Signal 3 parameters 3420 OUTPUTS MIN and 3421 OUTPUT3 MAX PAR FWD Control panels AC
154. or off DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault OVERCURRENT after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation 3105 AR OVERVOLTAGE Sets the automatic reset for the overvoltage function on or off DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault DC OVERVOLT after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation 3106 AR UNDERVOLTAGE Sets the automatic reset for the undervoltage function on or off DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault DC UNDERVOLT after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation 3107 AR AI MIN Sets the automatic reset for the analog input less than minimum value function on or off DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault lt after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation WARNING When the analog input signal is restored the drive may restart even after a long stop Make sure that automatic long delayed starts will not cause physical injury and or damage equipment 3108 AR EXTERNAL FLT Sets the automatic reset for external faults function on or off DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENA
155. output and changes the drive state to OPERATING The drive accelerates to the given reference and follows the reference Embedded fieldbus 232 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual The state diagram below describes the start stop function of CONTROL WORD CW and STATUS WORD SW bits for the ABB Drives profile From any state From any state From any state Emergency Stop Emergency Off Fault OFF3 CW Bit2 0 OFF2 CW Bit1 0 OFF3 OFF2 FAULT SW Bit3 1 SW Bit5 0 Arve SW Bit4 0 CW Bit7 1 n f 0 0 T L L From any state OFF1 CW Bit0 0 SWITCH ON SEA MAINS OFF INHIBITED SW Bit6 1 ACTIVE n f 0 1 0 Power ON CW Bit0 0 gt B D NOT READY TO SWITCH SW Bit0 0 CW Bit3 0 CW x1xx xxxx x110 OPERATION READY TO SW BitO 1 SW Bit250 INHIBITED switcH OW Bit0 1 OPERATION INHIBITED CW xxxx x1xx xxxx x111 gt B C D READY TO SW Bit1 1 OPERATE CW Bit4 0 CW Bit3 1 and SW Bit12 1 OPERATION 2 ENABLED foe Bue 1 A CW Bit5 0 CW xxxx x1xx xxx1 1111 gt i e Bit 4 1 KEY RFG OUTPUT eiie D ENABLED mm State change 5 CW Bit6 0 Path described in example CW xxxx 1 xx11 1111 CW CONTROL WORD i e Bit 5 1 SW STATUS WORD RFG ACCELERATOR RFG Ramp Function Generator ENABLED Param 0104 CURRENT f Param 0103 OUTPUT FREQ CW xxxx x1xx x111 1111 n Speed i
156. s 8123 ENABLE 0 NOT SEL 1 ACTIVE 1 0 NOT SEL Y 8124 IN AUX STOP 0 0 7 NOT SEL 0 1 1800 0 s 0 15 0 0 5 NOT SEL 8125 DEC AUX START 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1 1800 0 s 0 15 0 0 5 NOT SEL 8126 TMED AUTOCHNG 0 4 1 0 NOT SEL 8127 MOTORS 1 77 1 2 Y 8128 AUX START ORDER 1 EVEN RUNTIME 2 RELAY ORDER 1 1 EVEN RUNTIME Y Group 98 OPTIONS 9802 PROT SEL 0 SEL 1 STD MODBUS 1 NOT SEL Y 4 EXT FBA Parameters 106 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Complete parameter descriptions This section describes the actual signals and parameters for ACS550 Group 99 START UP DATA This group defines special start up data required to set up the drive enter motor information Code Description 9901 LANGUAGE Selects the display language There are two different Assistant Control Panels each supporting a different language set Panel ACS CP L supporting languages 0 2 11 15 has been integrated into ACS CP A Assistant Control Panel ACS CP A 0 ENGLISH 1 ENGLISH 2 DEUTSCH 3 ITALIANO 4 ESPANOL 5 PORTUGUES 6 NEDERLANDS 7 FRAN AIS 8 DANSK 9 SUOMI 10 SVENSKA 11 RUSSKI 12 POLSKI 13 T RKCE 14 CZECH 15 MAGYAR 16 ELLINIKA Assistant Control Panel ACS CP D Asia 0 ENGLISH 1 CHINESE 2 KOREAN 3 JAPANESE 9902 APPLIC MACRO Selects an application macro Application macros automatically edit parame
157. s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Protocol Drive parameter Value Description reference 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 8 COMM Ref selected by fieldbus Required only if 2 references used 1103 REF1 SELECT 8 COMM Input reference 1supplied by fieldbus 9 COMM AI1 10 COMM AI1 1106 REF2 SELECT 8 COMM Input reference 2 supplied by fieldbus 9 COMM A Required only if 2 references used 10 COMM AI Note Multiple references are supported only when using the ABB Drives profile Scaling Where required REFERENCES can be scaled See the following sections as appropriate Reference scaling on page 252 ABB Drives profile technical data Reference scaling on page 256 Generic profile technical data System control Using the fieldbus for miscellaneous drive control requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Protocol Drive parameter Value Description reference 1601 RUN ENABLE 7 COMM Run enable by fieldbus 1604 FAULT RESET SEL 8 COMM Fault reset by fieldbus 1607 PARAM SAVE 1 SAVE Saves altered parameters to memory then value returns to 0 Fieldbus adapter ACS550 01 U1 User
158. stop the drive the drive must be in local control Step Action Display control LOC shown on the left press 20 Note Switching to local control can be disabled with parameter 1606 OUTPUT LOCAL LOCK 1 To switch between remote control REM shown on the left and local LOC 4 1 Hz FWD After pressing the key the display briefly shows message LoC or rE LOC as appropriate before returning to the previous display L FWD The very first time the drive is powered up it is in remote control REM and controlled through the drive I O terminals To switch to local control LOC and control the drive using the control panel press 5 The result depends on how long you press the key If you release the key immediately the display flashes LoC the drive stops Set the local control reference as instructed on page 72 If you press the key for about two seconds release when the display changes from LoC to LoC r the drive continues as before The drive copies the current remote values for the run stop status and the reference and uses them as the initial local control settings Text FWD or REV on the bottom line starts flashing slowly start the drive in local control press D gt m din d i on u e ine starts flashing rapidly stops flashing when the drive reaches the setpoint stop the drive in local control press How
159. supervised parameter 3207 exceeds the limit 3209 See Group 32 SUPERVISION starting on page 153 13 SUPRV3 UNDER Energize relay when third supervised parameter 3207 drops below the limit 3208 See Group 32 SUPERVISION starting on page 153 14 AT SET POINT Energize relay when the output frequency is equal to the reference frequency 15 FAULT RST Energize relay when the drive is in a fault condition and will reset after the programmed auto reset delay See parameter 3103 DELAY TIME 16 FLT ALARM Energize relay when fault or alarm occurs 17 EXT CTRL Energize relay when external control is selected 18 REF 2 SEL Energize relay when EXT2 is selected 19 CONST FREQ Energize relay when a constant speed is selected 20 REF LOSS Energize relay when reference or active control place is lost 21 OVERCURRENT Energize relay when an overcurrent alarm or fault occurs 22 OVERVOLTAGE Energize relay when an overvoltage alarm or fault occurs 23 DRIVE TEMP Energize relay when a drive or control board overtemperature alarm or fault occurs 24 UNDERVOLTAGE Energize relay when an undervoltage alarm or fault occurs 25 AI1 LOSS Energize relay when 11 signal is lost 26 AI2 LOSS Energize relay when 12 signal is lost 27 MOTOR TEMP Energize relay when a motor overtemperature alarm or fault occurs 28 STALL Energize relay when a stall alarm or fault exists
160. that are 95 mm 3 0 AWG or larger Smaller wires will loosen and may damage the drive They require crimp on ring lugs as described below Crimp on ring lugs On the R6 frame size if screw on terminal lugs are 2 25 e e supplied but the cable size used is less than 95 ab mm 3 0 AWG or if no screw on terminal lugs 1 are supplied at all use crimp on ring lugs according to the following procedure 1 Select appropriate ring lugs from the following table Remove the screw on terminal lugs if supplied 3 Attach the ring lugs to the drive end of the cables 4 Isolate the ends of the ring lugs with insulating tape or shrink tubing 5 Attach the ring lugs to the drive Wire size kemil Manufacturer Ring lug reu bod AWG Burndy YAV6C L2 MY29 3 1 Ilsco CCL 6 38 ILC 10 2 56 4 Burndy YA4C L4BOX MY29 3 1 Ilsco CCL 4 38 MT 25 1 Burndy YA2C LABOX MY29 3 2 35 2 Ilsco CRC 2 IDT 12 1 Ilsco CCL 2 38 MT 25 1 Burndy YA1C L4BOX MY29 3 2 Ilsco CRA 1 38 IDT 12 1 i Ilsco CCL 1 38 MT 25 1 Thomas amp Betts 54148 TBM 8 3 Burndy YA25 L4BOX MY29 3 2 T Js Ilsco CRB 0 IDT 12 1 Ilsco CCL 1 0 38 MT 25 1 Thomas amp Betts 54109 TBM 8 3 Technical data 288 Wire size Cilmi rimping mm2 kemil Manufacturer Ring lug tool crimps AWG Burndy YAL26T38 29 3 2 5 CRA 2
161. the control for forcing the speed to 0 See DI1 INV above Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 141 Group 23 SPEED CONTROL This group defines variables used for speed control operation Code Description 2301 PROP GAIN Sets the relative gain for the speed controller Larger values may cause speed oscillation The figure shows the speed controller output after an error step error remains constant Error value Note You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE NS RUN to automatically set the proportional gain Controller output Controller output ae e Error value Kp e gt Gain 1 Integration time 0 X Tp Derivation time 0 2302 INTEGRATION TIME A Controller output Sets the integration time for the speed controller The integration time defines the rate at which the controller output changes for a constant error value Shorter integration times correct continuous errors faster Control becomes unstable if the integration time is too short Kp The figure shows the speed controller output after an error step error remains constant Note You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN to automatically set the integration time Gain Ky 1 T Integration time gt 0 Tp Derivation time 0 e Error value 2303 DERIVATION TIME Sets the derivation time for the speed controller Derivative action makes the
162. the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 1 value De activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 2 value 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used See DIT INV above 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 Sets the first minimum limit for torque 96 Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque 2016 MIN TORQUE 2 Sets the second minimum limit for torque 96 Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 135 Code Description 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 Sets the first maximum limit for torque 96 Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 Sets the second maximum limit for torque 96 Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque Parameters 136 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Group 21 START STOP This group defines how the motor starts and stops The ACS550 supports several start and stop modes Code Description 2101 START FUNCTION Selects the motor start method The valid options depend on the value of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 AUTO Selects the automatic start mode Vector control modes Optimal start in most cases The drive automatically selects the correct output frequency to start a rotating motor SCALAR FREQ mode Immediate start from zero frequency Identical to selection 8 RAMP 2 DC MAGN Selects the DC Magn
163. the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 20 KEYPAD RNC Defines the control panel as the reference source A Stop command resets the reference to zero the R stands for reset e Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 does not copy the reference 21 KEYPAD NC Defines the control panel as the reference source A Stop command does not reset the reference to zero The reference is stored Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 does not copy the reference Analog input reference correction Parameter values 9 10 and 14 17 use the formula in the following table Value setting Calculation of the Al reference C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value 5096 of reference value B value C B C value 50 of reference value B value Where e C Main reference value COMM for values 9 10 and AI1 for values 14 17 B Correcting reference 11 for values 9 10 and AI2 for values 14 17 Example The figure shows the reference source curves for value settings 9 10 and 14 17 where C 25 4012 SETPOINT MIN 0 4013 SETPOINT 0 varies along the horizontal axis Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 119
164. time See 1004 JOGGING SEL 2207 RAMP SHAPE 2 Selects the shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp for ramp pair 2 e See 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 Parameters 140 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Description 2208 EMERG DEC TIME Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for an emergency See parameter 2109 EMERG STOP SEL Rampis linear 2209 RAMP INPUT 0 Defines control for forcing the speed to 0 with the currently used deceleration ramp see parameters 2203 DECELER TIME 1 and 2206 DECELER TIME 2 NOT SEL Not selected 1 D11 Defines digital input 011 as the control for forcing the speed to 0 Activating the digital input forces the speed to zero after which the speed will stay at O De activating the digital input speed control resumes normal operation 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for forcing the speed to 0 See DI1 above 7 COMM Defines bit 13 of the Command Word 1 as the control for forcing the speed to 0 The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The Command Word is parameter 0301 1 DI1 INV Defines inverted digital input DI1 as the control for forcing the speed to 0 De activating the digital input forces the speed to O Activating the digital input speed control resumes normal operation 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as
165. time can be changed in steps of 2 seconds If the parameter value is 09 00 00 the timer is deactivated at 9 a m 3604 START DAY 1 Defines the weekly start day 1 MONDAY 7 SUNDAY If parameter value is 1 timer 1 weekly is active from Monday midnight 00 00 00 3605 STOP DAY 1 Defines weekly stop day 1 MONDAY 7 SUNDAY If parameter value is 5 timer 1 weekly is deactivated on Friday midnight 23 59 58 3606 START TIME 2 Defines timer2 daily start time See parameter 3602 3607 STOP TIME 2 Defines timer 2 daily stop time See parameter 3603 3608 START DAY 2 Defines timer 2 weekly start day See parameter 3604 3609 STOP DAY 2 Defines timer 2 weekly stop day See parameter 3605 3610 START TIME 3 Defines timer 3 daily start time See parameter 3602 3611 STOP TIME 3 Defines timer 3 daily stop time See parameter 3603 Parameters 164 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Description 3612 START DAY 3 Defines timer 3 weekly start day See parameter 3604 3613 STOP DAY 3 Defines timer 3 weekly stop day See parameter 3605 3614 START TIME 4 Defines timer 4 daily start time See parameter 3602 3615 STOP TIME 4 Defines timer 4 daily stop time See parameter 3603 3616 START DAY 4 Defines timer 4 weekly start day See parameter 3604 3617 STOP DAY 4 Defines timer 4 weekly stop day See parameter 3605 3622 BOOSTER SEL
166. to 1PFC the first motor and so on Initially 1PFC speed regulated motor 2PFC 1st auxiliary motor etc The first autochange shifts the sequence to 2PFC speed regulated motor 3PFC 1st auxiliary motor 1PFC last auxiliary motor The next autochange shifts the sequence again and so on If the autochange cannot start a needed motor because all inactive motors are interlocked the drive displays an alarm 2015 PFC LOCK When ACS550 power supply is switched off the counter preserves the current Autochange rotation positions in permanent memory When power is restored the Autochange rotation starts at the position stored in memory If the PFC relay configuration is changed or if the PFC enable value is changed the rotation is reset See the first bullet above Area Autochange is allowed PID output gt P 8119 100 Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 195 Code Description 8120 INTERLOCKS Defines operation of the Interlock function When the Interlock function is enabled e An interlock is active when its command signal is absent An interlock is inactive when its command signal is present e The ACS550 will not start if a start command occurs when the speed regulated motor s interlock is active the control panel displays an alarm 2015 PFC I LOCK Wire each Interlock circuit as follows Wire a contact of the motor s On Off
167. to change the direction of the motor rotation You can change the direction of the motor rotation in any mode Step Action Display 1 If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the left switch to local LOC control by pressing E The display briefly shows message LoC before 2 Hz returning to the previous display OUTPUT FWD 2 To change the direction from forward FWD shown at the bottom to LOC reverse REV shown at the bottom or vice versa press A s Hz OUTPUT REV Note Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to 3 REQUEST Control panels ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Output mode In the Output mode you can 71 monitor actual values of up to three Group 01 OPERATING DATA signals one signal at a time start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control You get to the Output mode by pressing 777 until the display shows text OUTPUT at the bottom The display shows the value of one Group 07 491 OPERATING DATA signal The unit is shown on the REM right Page 74 tells how to select up to three signals to FWD be monitored in the Output mode The table below shows how to view them one at a time How to browse the monitored signals Step Action Display 1 If more than one signals have been selected to be monitored see page 4 1 74 you can browse them in the Output mo
168. to the faults and alarms generated by the drive see chapter Diagnostics the Basic Control Panel indicates control panel alarms with a code of form A5xxx See section Alarm codes Basic Control Panel on page 269 for a list of the alarm codes and descriptions Control panels ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 77 Application macros Macros change a group of parameters to new predefined values Use macros to minimize the need for manual editing of parameters Selecting a macro sets all other parameters to their default values except Group 99 START UP DATA parameters except parameter 9904 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 1607 PARAM SAVE 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME 9802 COMM PROT SEL Group 50 ENCODER Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG parameters After selecting a macro you can make additional parameter changes manually with the control panel You enable application macros by setting the value for parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO By default 1 ABB STANDARD is the enabled macro The following sections describe each of the application macros and provide a connection example for each macro The last section in this chapter Macro default values for parameters lists the parameters that the macros change and the default values established by each macro Application macros 78 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual ABB Standard macro This is the default macro It provides a gener
169. use WARNING A drive of category C3 is not intended to be used on a low voltage public network which supplies domestic premises Radio frequency interference is expected if the drive is used on such a network Note It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected on IT ungrounded systems The supply network becomes connected to ground potential through the EMC filter capacitors which may cause danger or damage the drive Note It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected to a corner grounded TN system as this would damage the drive Technical data ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Index Numerics Oxxxx register EFB function EFB mapping 1xxxx register EFB function EFB mapping 2 wire sensor transmitter connection example 3 wire 3 wire sensor transmitter connection example 3xxxx register EFB function EFB mapping 4xxxx register EFB function EFB mapping ABB document feedback on ABB manuals product and service inquiries product 0 standard default macro acceleration deceleration parameter group at aux stop parameter compensation parameter ramp select
170. 0 At 0 1 the PID controller output changes one tenth as much as the error value At 100 the PID controller output changes one hundred times as much as the error value Use the proportional gain and integration time values to adjust the responsiveness of the system A low value for proportional gain and a high value for integral time ensures stable operation but provides sluggish response If the proportional gain value is too large or the integral time too short the system can become unstable Procedure Initially set 4001 GAIN 0 1 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 20 seconds Start the system and see if it reaches the setpoint quickly while maintaining stable operation If not increase GAIN 4001 until the actual signal or drive speed oscillates constantly It may be necessary to start and stop the drive to induce this oscillation Reduce GAIN 4001 until the oscillation stops Set GAIN 4001 to 0 4 to 0 6 times the above value Decrease the INTEGRATION TIME 4002 until the feedback signal or drive speed oscillates constantly It may be necessary to start and stop the drive to induce this oscillation Increase INTEGRATION TIME 4002 until the oscillation stops Set INTEGRATION TIME 4002 to 1 15 to 1 5 times the above value If the feedback signal contains high frequency noise increase the value of parameter 1303 FILTER AI1 or 1306 FILTER AI2 until the noise is filtered from the signal Parame
171. 0 01 U1 User s Manual 145 Group 26 MOTOR CONTROL This group defines variables used for motor control Code Description 2601 FLUX OPT ENABLE Changes the magnitude of the flux depending on the actual load Flux Optimization can reduce the total energy consumption and noise and it should be enabled for drives that usually operate below nominal load 0 oFF Disables the feature 1 ON Enables the feature 2602 FLUX BRAKING Braking Provides faster deceleration by raising the level of torque 96 Rated motor power magnetization in the motor when needed instead of 120 1 2 2 kW limiting the deceleration ramp By increasing the flux in i Without flux braking 2 15 kW the motor the energy of the mechanical system is 3 37 kw changed to thermal energy in the motor 80 Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 VECTOR SPEED OR 2 VECTOR TORQ 0 orF Disables the feature 1 ON Enables the feature 4 75 kW 5 10 20 30 40 50 f Hz 2603 IR COMP VOLT IR compensation Sets the IR compensation voltage used for 0 Hz When enabled IR compensation provides an extra Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE voltage boost to the motor at low speeds Use IR 3 SCALAR FREQ compensation for example in applications that require a Keep IR compensation as low as possible to prevent high breakaway torque overheating Motor Typical IR compensation values
172. 001 MINIMUM SPEED or 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED Check for and correct Parameter settings for 2001 and 2002 Adequacy of motor braking torque Applicability of torque control Brake chopper and resistor 25 RESERVED Not used 26 DRIVE ID Internal fault Configuration Block Drive ID is not valid Contact your local ABB representative 27 COMFIG FILE Internal configuration file has an error Contact your local ABB representative 28 SERIAL 1 ERR Fieldbus communication has timed out Check for and correct Fault setup 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Communication settings Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE or Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL as appropriate Poor connections and or noise on line 29 EFB CON FILE Error in reading the configuration file for the embedded fieldbus 30 FORCE TRIP Fault trip forced by the fieldbus See the fieldbus User s Manual 31 EFB 1 32 EFB 2 33 EFB 3 Fault code reserved for the embedded fieldbus EFB protocol application The meaning is protocol dependent 34 MOTOR PHASE Fault in the motor circuit One of the motor phases is lost Check for and correct Motor fault Motor cable fault Thermal relay fault if used Internal fault 35 OUTP WIRING Incorrect input power and motor cable connection i e input power cable is connected to drive motor connection The faul
173. 014 ABB All Rights Reserved ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 5 Safety instructions Use of warnings and notes A A There are two types of safety instructions throughout this manual Notes draw attention to a particular condition or fact or give information on a subject Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury or death and or damage to the equipment They also tell you how to avoid the danger The warning symbols are used as follows Electricity warning warns of hazards from electricity which can cause physical injury and or damage to the equipment General warning warns about conditions other than those caused by electricity which can result in physical injury and or damage to the equipment General safety A WARNING Obey these instructions If you ignore them injury or death or damage to the equipment can occur Use safety shoes to avoid foot injury Handle the drive carefully Beware of hot surfaces Some parts such as heatsinks remain hot for a while after disconnection of the electrical supply See chapter Technical data on page 277 Keep the drive in its package or protect it otherwise from dust and burr from drilling and grinding until you install it Protect also the installed drive against dust and burr Electrically conductive debris inside the drive can cause damage or malfunction Electrical safety WARNING The ACS550 adjustable speed AC drive should ON
174. 03 0103 102 0102 102 0102 102 0102 102 0102 102 0102 103 0103 102 0102 OUTPUT FREQ SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED OUTPUT FREQ SPEED 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 103 0103 102 0102 102 0102 102 0102 102 0102 102 0102 103 0103 102 0102 OUTPUT FREQ SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED OUTPUT FREQ SPEED 4001 GAIN 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 2 5 1 0 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 60 0 s 60 0 s 60 0 s 60 0 s 60 0 s 60 0 s 3 0s 60 0 s 4101 GAIN 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 2 5 1 0 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 60 0 s 60 0 s 60 0 s 60 0 s 60 0 s 60 0 s 3 0s 60 0 s 8123 PFC ENABLE 0 NOT SEL 0 NOT SEL O NOT SEL O NOT SEL 0 SEL O NOT SEL 1 ACTIVE O NOT SEL Application macros ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Parameters Complete parameter list The following table lists all parameters Table header abbreviations are S Parameters can be modified only when the drive is stopped User Space to enter desired parameter values Some values depend on the construction as indicated in the table by 01 Setup and parts specific to IEC installation and compliance or U1 Setup and parts specific to US installation and NEMA compliance Refer to the type designation on the drive for example ACS550 01 08A8 4 91 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S Group 99 START UP DATA 9901 LANGUAGE 0 16 0
175. 03 FAULT TIME 2 The time at which the last fault occurred Either as Real time in format hh mm ss if real time clock is operating The time since power on minus the whole days reported in 0402 in format hh mm ss if real time clock is not used or was not set Format on the Basic Control Panel The time since power on in 2 second ticks minus the whole days reported in 0402 30 ticks 60 seconds E g Value 514 equals 17 minutes and 8 seconds 514 30 0404 SPEED AT FLT The motor speed rpm at the time the last fault occurred 0405 FREQ AT FLT The frequency Hz at the time the last fault occurred 0406 VOLTAGE AT FLT The DC bus voltage V at the time the last fault occurred 0407 CURRENT AT FLT The motor current A at the time the last fault occurred 0408 TORQUE AT FLT The motor torque 96 at the time the last fault occurred 0409 STATUS AT FLT The drive status hex code word at the time the last fault occurred 0410 DI 1 3 AT FLT The status of digital inputs 1 3 at the time the last fault occurred 0411 DI 4 6 AT FLT The status of digital inputs 4 6 at the time the last fault occurred 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 Fault code of the second last fault Read only 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 Fault code of the third last fault Read only Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 115 Group 10 START STOP DIR This group defines externa
176. 0301 resets the drive 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as a fault reset source De activating the digital input resets the drive 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as a fault reset source See DI1 INV above Parameters 130 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Description 1605 USER PAR SET CHG Defines control for changing the user parameter set See parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO The drive must be stopped to change User Parameter Sets During a change the drive will not start Note Always save the User Parameter Set after changing any parameter settings or performing a motor identification Whenever the power is cycled or parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO is changed the drive loads the last settings saved Any unsaved changes to a user parameter set are lost Note The value of this parameter 1605 is not included in the User Parameter Sets and it does not change if User Parameter Sets change Note You can use a relay output to supervise the selection of User Parameter Set 2 See parameter 1401 0 NOT SEL Defines the control panel using parameter 9902 as the only control for changing User Parameter Sets 1 011 Defines digital input DI1 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets The drive loads User Parameter Set 1 on the falling edge of the digital input The drive loads User Parameter Set 2 on the rising e
177. 04 1503 AO1 CONTENT MAX 1510 Sets the maximum content value 1502 1508 Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501 e Maximum value refers to the maximum content value that will P 1505 rai AO mA be converted to an analog output 1511 1504 MINIMUM AO1 Sets the minimum output current 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 Sets the maximum output current 1506 FILTER AO1 P 19041 P 1510 Defines the filter time constant for 1 AO CONTENT 0 E D M signal reaches 63 of a step change within the time P 1502 1508 1503 1509 See the figure in parameter 1303 1507 2 CONTENT SEL Defines the content for analog output AO2 See AO1 CONTENT SEL above 1508 2 CONTENT MIN Sets the minimum content value See AO1 CONTENT MIN above 1509 2 CONTENT MAX Sets the maximum content value See AO1 CONTENT MAX above 1510 MINIMUM AO2 Sets the minimum output current See MINIMUM AO1 above Parameters 128 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Description 1511 MAXIMUM AO2 Sets the maximum output current See MAXIMUM AO1 above 1512 FILTER AO2 Defines the filter time constant for A02 See FILTER AO1 above Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 129 Group 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS This group defines a variety of system level locks resets and enables Code Description 1601
178. 0404 5 AT FLT 32768 32767 1 rpm 0 0405 FREQ AT FLT 3276 8 3276 7 0 1 Hz 0 0406 VOLTAGE AT FLT 0 0 6553 5 0 1 V 0 0407 CURRENT AT FLT 0 0 6553 5 0 1A 0 0408 TORQUE AT FLT 3276 8 3276 7 0 1 0 0409 STATUS AT FLT 0000 FFFF hex 1 0 0410 01 1 3 AT FLT 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0 0411 DI 4 6 AT FLT 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 As par 0401 1 0 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 As par 0401 1 0 Group 10 START STOP DIR 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 0 14 1 2 011 2 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 0 14 1 0 NOT SEL v 1003 DIRECTION 1 FORWARD 2 REVERSE 1 3 REQUEST Y 3 REQUEST 1004 JOGGING SEL 6 6 1 0 NOT SEL Y Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT 1101 KEYPAD REF SEL 1 REF1 Hz rpm 2 REF2 96 1 1 REF 1 Hz rpm 1102 1 2 SEL 6 12 1 0 ExT1 Y 1103 REF SELECT 0 17 20 21 1 1 A11 Y 1104 REF MIN 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm 0 0 Hz 0 rpm 1105 REF1 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm 01 50 0 52 0 Hz 1500 rpm U1 60 0 62 0 Hz 1800 rpm 1106 2 SELECT 0 17 19 21 1 2 12 Y 1107 2 MIN 0 0 100 0 0 0 600 0 for torque 0 196 0 0 1108 2 0 0 100 0 0 0 600 0 for torque 0 1 100 0 Parameters 94 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual
179. 1 1 000001 1 1 1 1 1 0 2 000010 1 1 1 1 0 1 3 000011 1 1 1 1 0 0 4 000100 1 1 1 0 1 1 63 111111 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 De energize relay 1 Energize relay 37 TIMED FUNC 1 Energize relay when Timed Function 1 is active See Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 38 40 TIMED FUNC 2 4 Energize relay when Timed Function 2 4 is active See TIMED FUNC 1 above 41 MNT TRIG FAN Energize relay when cooling fan counter is triggered See Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG 42 MNT TRIG REV Energize relay when revolutions counter is triggered See Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG 43 MNT TRIG RUN Energize relay when run time counter is triggered See Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG 44 MNT TRIG MWH Energize relay when MWh counter is triggered See Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG 46 START DELAY Energize relay when a start delay is active 47 USER LOAD C Energize relay when a user load curve fault or alarm occurs 52 JOG ACTIVE Energize relay when the jogging function is active 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 2 what relay output 2 means See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 3 what relay output 3 means e See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1404 RO 1 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 1 Control event EcL e On off delays are ignored when relay output 1401 is set to PFC
180. 10 of nominal duty the resistance must not exceed Rmax If maximum braking torque is not necessary resistor values can exceed Rmax The resistor power rating must be high enough to dissipate the braking power This requirement involves many factors the maximum continuous power rating for the resistor s the rate at which the resistor changes temperature resistor thermal time constant maximum braking time ON If the regeneration braking power is larger than the resistor rated power there is a limit to the ON time or the resistor overheats before the OFF period begins minimum braking time OFF If the regeneration braking power is larger than the resistor rated power the OFF time must be large enough for the resistor to cool between ON periods A Braking ON Time Braking OFF ON time OFF time ru 4 Dut PE ON time Cycle time gt uly cycle Cycle time the peak braking power requirement type of braking deceleration to zero vs overhauling load During deceleration to zero the generated power steadily decreases averaging half of the peak power For an overhauling load the braking is countering an external force gravity for example and the braking power is constant The total heat generated from an overhauling load is double the heat generated from deceleration to zero speed for the same peak torque and ON time Technical data 296 Power
181. 1000 1000 1 100 4120 2 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4121 ACT2 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4122 SLEEP SELECTION 6 7 1 0 NOT SEL 4123 PID SLEEP LEVEL 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm 0 0 Hz 0 rpm 4124 SLEEP DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 15 60 05 4125 WAKE UP DEV Unit and scale defined by par 4106 and 0 0 4107 4126 WAKE UP DELAY 0 00 60 00 s 0 01 s 0 50 s Group 42 EXT TRIM PID 4201 0 1 100 0 0 1 1 0 4202 INTEGRATION TIME 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1 3600 0 s 0 15 60 05 4203 TIME 0 0 10 05 0 15 0 05 4204 DERIV FILTER 0 0 10 0s 0 15 1 06 4205 VALUE INV 0 1 YES 1 0 NO 4206 UNITS 0 127 1 4 96 Parameters 102 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Range Resolution Default User S 4207 SCALE 0 4 1 1 4208 0 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 0 0 4207 4209 10096 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 100 0 4207 4210 SET POINT SEL 0 2 8 17 19 20 1 1 11 Y 4211 INTERNAL SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 40 0 4207 4212 SETPOINT MIN 500 0 500 0 0 1 0 0 4213 SETPOINT MAX 500 0 500 096 0 196 100 096 4214 FBK SEL 1 13 1 1 ACT1 4215 FBK MULTIPLIER 0 000 NOT SEL 32 768 32 767 0 001 0 000 NOT SEL 42
182. 131 xX won PFC PFC X PFC PFC PFC X PFC PFC XIX X X X X PFC 31 31 X 0 X No auxiliary motors but the autochange function is in use Working as a standard PID control N O0 x m gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt xx gt lt T gt lt gt lt gt gt lt gt lt nm ap gt gt gt lt X A gt x L xxxoeonr2 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV Controls operation of the Autochange function and sets the interval between changes e The Autochange time interval only applies to the time when the speed regulated motor is running See parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL for an overview of the Autochange function The drive always coasts to stop when autochange is performed Autochange enabled requires parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS value gt 0 0 1 TEST MODE Forces the interval to value 36 48 s 0 0 NOT SEL Disables the Autochange function 0 1 336 The operating time interval the time when the start signal is on between automatic motor changes WARNING When enabled the Autochange function requires the interlocks 8120 INTERLOCKS value gt 0 enabled During autochange the power output is interrupted and the drive coasts to stop preventing damage to the contacts PFC with Autochange mode Relay logic ACS550
183. 14 Speed Reg Motor DI4 First PFC Relay 015 First PFC Relay DI5 Second PFC Relay DI6 Second PFC Relay DI6 Free 3 Not allowed 011 013 Free 014 First PFC Relay DI5 Second PFC Relay DI6 Third PFC Relay 4 6 allowed Not allowed Parameters 198 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Description 5 015 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with DI5 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on the number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFC the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 0 and otherwise enabled 015 Speed Reg Motor 016 Free No PFC Autochange disabled Autochange enabled relays P 8118 P 8118 0 011 014 Free Not allowed 011 014 Free 015 Speed Reg Motor DI6 First PFC Relay DI1 DI4 Free DI5 First PFC Relay DI6 Free 2 Not allowed DI1 DI4 Free DI5 First PFC Relay DI6 Second PFC Relay 3 6 Notallowed Not allowed motor Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 0 6 016 Enables the Interlock function and assigns digital input DI6 to the interlock signal for the speed regulated No PFC Autochange disabled Autochange enabled relays 0 011 015 Free Not allowed DI6 Speed Reg Motor 1 Not allowed 011 015 Free DI6 First
184. 16 ACT INPUT 1 7 1 2 12 v 4217 ACT2 INPUT 1 7 1 2 12 Y 4218 1 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4219 1 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4220 2 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4221 ACT2 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4228 ACTIVATE 6 12 1 0 NOT SEL 4229 oFFSET 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 4230 TRIM MODE 0 NOT SEL 1 PROPORTIONAL 1 0 NOT SEL 3 DIRECT 4231 TRIM SCALE 100 0 100 096 0 196 0 096 4232 CORRECTION SRC 1 PID2REF 2 PID2OUTPUT 1 1 PID2REF Group 45 ENERGY SAVING 4502 PRICE 0 00 655 35 0 01 0 00 4507 2 CONV FACTOR 0 0 10 0 tn MWh 0 1 tn MWh 0 5 tn MWh 4508 PUMP POWER 0 0 1000 0 0 1 100 0 4509 ENERGY RESET 0 DONE 1 RESET 1 0 DONE Group 50 ENCODER 5001 PULSE NR 50 16384 1 1024 Y 5002 ENCODER ENABLE 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 0 DISABLE 5003 ENCODER FAULT 1 FAULT 2 ALARM 1 1 FAULT Y 5010 Z PLS ENABLE 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 0 DISABLE 5011 POSITION RESET 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 0 DISABLE Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE 5101 FBA TYPE O NOT DEFINED 5102 FB PAR 2 26 0 65535 1 0 5126 5127 PAR REFRESH 0 DONE 1 REFRESH 1 0 DONE Y 5128 FILE CPI FW REV 0000 FFFF hex 1 0 5129 FILE CONFIG ID 0000 FFFF hex 1 0 5130 FILE CONFIG REV 0000 FFFF hex 1 0 5131 FBASTATUS 0 6 1 0 IDLE 5132 FBACPI FW REV 0000 FFFF hex 1 0 5133 APPL FW REV 0000 FFFF hex 1 0 Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s
185. 23 less than min auto reset parameter 152 less than min fault parameter 148 loss 261 maximum 123 minimum parameters 123 analog output parameter 127 content max parameters 127 content min parameters 127 current max parameters 127 current min parameters 127 data content parameters 127 data 109 filter parameters 127 obtain 0 10 87 analyzer load see load analyzer angle mechanical data parameter 110 application block output data parameter 108 application macro parameter 106 application macros see macros arrow Assistant Control Panel 49 assistant Assistant Control Panel Sta MUD ieee ADR ES EV 57 Tas KS d Aa ache lul iege Aum 58 Assistant Control Panel see control panel Assistant assistants mode Assistant Control Panel 57 autochange interval 193 level 194 194 starting order automatic reset see reset automatic auxiliary motor se
186. 2C2 Solid particles Class 252 The following table lists the standard stress testing that the ACS550 passes Stress tests Without shipping package Inside shipping package Sinusoidal vibration Mechanical conditions In accordance with IEC 60721 3 3 Class 3M4 2 9 Hz 3 0 mm 0 12 in 9 200 Hz 10 m s 33 ft s In accordance with ISTA 1A and 1B specifications Shock Not allowed In accordance with IEC 68 2 29 max 100 m s 330 ft s 11ms Free fall Not allowed 76 cm 30 in frame size R1 61cm 24 in frame size R2 46cm 18 in frame size R3 31 cm 12 in frame size R4 25 cm 10 in frame size R5 15cm 6 in frame size R6 Technical data 308 Materials ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Material specifications Drive enclosure PC ABS 2 5 mm color NCS 1502 Y or NCS 7000 N Hot dip zinc coated steel sheet 1 5 2 mm thickness of coating 20 micrometers If the surface is painted the total thickness of the coating zinc and paint is 80 100 micrometers Cast aluminium AISi Extruded aluminium AISi Package Corrugated board expanded polystyrene plywood raw wood heat dried Package wrap consists of one or more of the following PE LD plastic wrap PP or steel bands Disposal The drive contains raw materials that should be recycled to preserve energy and natural resources The package materials are
187. 3 parameter 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM 3 Select the units to be displayed for the signals This has no effect if parameter LOC EDIT 3404 3411 3418 is set to 9 DIRECT For details see parameter 3405 3405 OUTPUTL UNIT Signal 1 parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT HZ Signal 2 parameter 3472 OUTPUT2 UNIT 3 Signal 3 parameter 3419 OUTPUTS UNIT CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 4 Select the scalings for the signals by specifying the minimum and maximum LOC UPAR EDIT display values This has no effect if parameter 3404 3411 3418 is set to 9 DIRECT For details see parameters 3406 and 3407 Signal 1 parameters 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN and 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX Signal 2 parameters 3413 OUTPUT2 MIN and 3414 OUTPUT2 MAX Signal 3 parameters 3420 OUTPUTS MIN and 3421 OUTPUT3 MAX 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN 0 0 Hz CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOC UPAR EDIT 3407 OUTPUTL 0 0 Hz CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Control panels ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Assistants mode 57 When the drive is first powered up the Start up Assistant guides you through the setup of the basic parameters The Start up Assistant is divided into assistants each of which guides you through the task of specifying a related parameter set for example Motor Set up or PID Control You can activate the assistants one after the other as the Start up Assistant suggests or independently The tasks of the assistants are listed in the table on page 58 In the Assistants mo
188. 30 7 PID SLEEP Energize relay when the PID sleep function is active 31 Use relay to start stop motor in control See Group 81 CONTROL Use this option only when PFC control is used Selection activated deactivated when drive is not running 32 AUTOCHANGE Energize relay when autochange operation is performed Use this option only when PFC control is used 33 FLUX READY Energize relay when the motor is magnetized and able to supply nominal torque motor has reached nominal magnetizing 34 USER MACRO 2 Energize relay when User Parameter Set 2 is active Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 125 Code Description 35 COMM Energize relay based on input from fieldbus communication Fieldbus writes binary code in parameter 0134 that can energize relay 1 relay 6 according to the following 0134 Binary RO6 5 RO4 RO2 RO1 0 000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 000001 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 000010 0 0 0 0 1 0 3 000011 0 0 0 0 1 1 4 000100 0 0 0 1 0 0 63 111111 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 De energize relay 1 Energize relay 36 coMM 1 Energize relay based on input from fieldbus communication Fieldbus writes binary code in parameter 0134 that can energize relay 1 relay 6 according to the following Par 0134 Binary RO5 4 RO2 RO1 0 000000 1 1 1 1 1
189. 4 72 37 50 59 30 40 R4 078A 4 77 Note 2 60 72 Note 2 50 R4 087 4 87 45 Note 1 72 37 Note 1 R4 097A 4 97 Note 2 75 77 Note 2 60 R4 125A 4 125 55 Note 1 87 45 Note 1 R5 125A 4 125 Note 2 100 96 Note 2 75 R5 157A 4 157 75 125 124 55 100 R6 180A 4 180 90 150 156 75 125 R6 195A 4 205 110 Note 1 162 90 Note 1 R6 246A 4 246 132 200 192 110 150 R6 290A 4 290 160 Note 1 246 132 200 R6 00467918 xls C 1 Not available in ACS550 U1 series 2 Not available in ACS550 01 series Technical data ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 279 Ratings 500 600 V drives Abbreviated column headers are described in section Symbols on page 279 Type Normal use Heavy duty use Frame ACS550 U1 bn PN Py Pha Pha size see below A kW hp A kW hp Three phase supply voltage 500 600 V Note 1 02A7 6 2 7 1 5 2 2 4 1 1 1 5 R2 03A9 6 3 9 2 2 3 2 7 1 5 2 R2 06A1 6 6 1 4 5 3 9 2 2 3 R2 09A0 6 9 0 5 5 7 5 6 1 4 5 R2 011A 6 11 7 5 10 9 0 5 5 7 5 R2 017A 6 17 11 15 11 7 5 10 R2 022A 6 22 15 20 17 11 15 R3 027A 6 27 18 5 25 22 15 20 R3 032A 6 32 22 30 27 18 5 25 R4 041A 6 41 30 40 32 22 30 R4 052A 6 52 37 50 41 30 40 R4 062A 6 62 45 60 52 37 50 R4 077A 6 77 55 75 62 45 60 R6 099A 6 99 75 100 77 55 75 R6 125A 6 125 90 125 99 75 100 R6 144A 6 144 110 150 125 90 125 R6 00467918 xls C 1 Not available in ACS550 01 series
190. 401 PVL SIGNAL 100 178 1 103 parameter 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 6402 PVL FILTER TIME 0 0 120 0s 0 15 0 15 6403 LOGGERS RESET 6 7 1 0 NOT SEL 6404 2 SIGNAL 101 178 1 103 parameter 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 6405 12 SIGNAL BASE Depends on the signal selected with par 6404 6406 VALUE 6407 TIME 1 Date dd mm yy power on time in days 1 d 6408 TIME 2 Time hh mm ss 2s 6409 CURRENT 0 0 6553 5 Parameters 104 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Range Resolution Default User 6410 UDC PEAK 0 65535 V 1V 6411 FREQ AT PEAK 0 0 6553 5 Hz 0 1 Hz 6412 TIME OF RESET 1 Date dd mm yy power on time in days 1 d 6413 TIME OF RESET 2 Time hh mm ss 2s 6414 ALTRANGEOTO10 0 0 100 0 0 1 6415 AL1RANGE10T020 0 0 100 0 0 1 6416 ALTRANGE20TO30 0 0 100 0 0 1 6417 AL1RANGE30TO40 0 0 100 0 0 1 6418 AL1RANGE40TO50 0 0 100 0 0 1 6419 AL1RANGE50TO6O 0 0 100 0 0 1 6420 ALTRANGE60TO70 0 0 100 0 0 1 6421 AL1RANGE70TO80 0 0 100 0 0 1 6422 AL1RANGE80TO90 0 0 100 0 0 1 6423 AL1RANGE90TO 0 0 100 0 0 1 6424 AL2RANGEOTO10 0 0 100 0 0 1 6425 AL2RANGE10TO20 0 0 100 0 0 1 6426 AL2RANGE20TO30 0
191. 41 kg s 50 ft s 59 inwg 68 Km h 6 h 15 kWh 24 GPM 33 ohm 42 kg m 51 ft m 60 ft wg 7 rpm 16 F 25 PSI 34 ppm 43 kg h 52 ft3 h 61 Ibsi 8 7 kh 17 hp 26 35 pps 44 mbar 53 16 5 62 ms The following units are useful for the bar display 117 ref 119 dev 121 SP 123 lout 125 Fout 127 Vdc 118 act 120 LD 122 FBK 124 Vout 126 Tout 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN Sets the minimum value displayed for the first display parameter Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 9 DIRECT 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX Sets the maximum value displayed for the first display parameter Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT DSP FORM 9 DIRECT 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM Selects the second parameter by number displayed on the control panel See parameter 3401 3409 SIGNAL2 MIN Defines the minimum expected value for the second display parameter See parameter 3402 3410 SIGNAL2 Defines the maximum expected value for the second display parameter See parameter 3403 3411 OUTPUT2 DSP FORM Defines the decimal point location for the second display parameter See parameter 3404 3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT Selects the units used with the second display parameter See parameter 3405 3413 OUTPUT2 MIN Sets the minimum value displayed for the second display parameter See parameter 3406 3414 OUTPUT2 MAX Sets the maximum value displayed for the second display parameter See parameter 3407 3415 SIGNAL3
192. 89 motor specification 289 switching parameter 146 Index 318 fuses 208 240 V drives 282 380 480 V drives 282 500 600 V drives 283 G gain PID 170 generic profile FBA actual value mapping 257 actual value scaling 257 256 reference scaling 256 technical 256 gland kit sso Le Leroy 23 ground cable wire requirements 285 fault protection 292 H hand auto 82 heat 301 hood IP54 UL type 12 21 36 how to do common tasks with Assistant Control Panel 50 with Basic Control Panel 69 I O settings Assistant Control Panel 67 44 id run fail fault 262 107 0 45 identification magnetization 107 IEC ratings see ratings impedance grounded network see IT system incompatible software fault code 264 information on the Internet 325 information parameter group
193. 952 6666 405 238 77 248A 2 R6 2189 7474 405 238 77 00467918 xls C Air flow 380 480 V drives The following table lists the requirements for the cooling air flow data for 380 480 V drives at full load in all ambient conditions listed in Ambient conditions on page 307 Drive Heat dissipation Air flow Noise ACS550 x1 Frame size BTU hr m h ft min dB 03A3 4 R1 40 137 44 26 52 04A1 4 R1 52 178 44 26 52 05A4 4 R1 73 249 44 26 52 06A9 4 R1 97 331 44 26 52 08A8 4 R1 127 434 44 26 52 012A 4 R1 172 587 44 26 52 Technical data 302 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Drive Heat dissipation Air flow Noise ACS550 x1 Frame size BTU hr m h ft min dB 015A 4 R2 232 792 88 52 66 023A 4 R2 337 1151 88 52 66 031A 4 R3 457 1561 134 79 67 038A 4 R3 562 1919 134 79 67 045A 4 R3 667 2278 134 79 67 059A 4 R4 907 3098 280 165 75 072A 4 R4 1120 3825 280 165 75 078A 4 R4 1295 4423 250 147 75 087A 4 R4 1440 4918 280 165 75 097A 4 R4 1440 4918 280 165 75 125A 4 R5 1940 6625 350 205 75 157A 4 R6 2310 7889 405 238 77 180A 4 R6 2810 9597 405 238 77 195 4 R6 3050 10416 405 238 77 246A 4 R6 3260 11134 405 238 77 290A 4 R6 3850 13125 405 238 77 00467918 xls C Air flow 500 600 V drives The following table lists the requirements for the cooling air flow data for 500 600 V drives at full
194. A ABB drives profile 252 FBA generic profile 256 reference setting Assistant Control Panel 54 Basic Control 72 regulator by pass control parameter 199 relative humidity environment limit 307 shipping 307 relay output parameter 124 activation condition parameters 124 off delay 5 125 on delay parameters 125 status data parameter 109 relays 5 lt 299 REM remote control indication on Assistant Control Panel 49 indication on Basic Control Panel 68 remove COVer 21 reset automatic parameter 152 analog input less than min parameter 152 delay time parameter 152 external fault parameter 152 number of trials parameter 152 overcurrent 152 trial time 152 undervoltage parameter 152 resolution listing for parameters 91 resonance avoiding select 144 revolution counter data parameter 110 Index 322 revolutions mechani
195. ACS550 User s Manual ACS550 01 Drives 0 75 160 kW ACS550 U1 Drives 1 200 hp Power and productivity for a better world E AP List of related manuals GENERAL MANUALS ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 0 75 160 kW 1 200 hp 3AFE64804588 3 40000001418 English Flange Mounting Instructions Kit IP21 UL type 1 Frame size Code English FMK A R1 R1 100000982 FMK A R2 R2 100000984 FMK A R3 R3 100000986 FMK A R4 R4 100000988 AC8 FLNGMT R5 1 R5 5800 AC8 FLNGMT R6 1 R6 PNTGO1U EN 1 Not available for ACS550 01 series Kit IP54 UL type 12 Frame size Code English RPBA 01 PROFIBUS DP Adapter User s Manual SAFE64504215 English SREA 01 Ethernet Adapter User s Manual 3AUA0000042896 English Typical contents Safety Installation Programming Start up Diagnostics Technical data MAINTENANCE MANUALS FMK B R1 R1 100000990 FMK B R2 R2 100000992 FMK B R3 R3 100000994 FMK B R4 R4 100000996 OPTION MANUALS delivered with optional equipment MFDT 01 FlashDrop User s Manual SAFE68591074 English OHDI 01 115 230 V Digital Input Module User s Manual 3AUA0000003101 English OREL 01 Relay Output Extension Module User s Manual SAUAO0000001 935 English OTAC 01 User s Manual Pulse Encoder Interface Module User s Manual 3AUA0000001938 English RCAN 01 CANopen Adapter User s Manual SAFE64504231 English RCNA 01 ControlNet Adapter User s Manual
196. ART D Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 191 Code Description 8112 LOW FREQ 1 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the first auxiliary motor The first auxiliary motor stops if Only one the first auxiliary motor is running f Hz e ACS550 output frequency drops below the limit A 8112 1 Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8112 1 Hz for at least the time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 8109 N After the first auxiliary motor stops Output frequency increases by the value P 8112 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 NI e In effect the output of the speed regulated motor increases to P 8112 1 gt compensate for the loss of the auxiliary motor AMIN T See the figure where 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 Low FREQ 1 P 8116 lt B Output frequency decrease during the stop delay e Diagram showing auxiliary motor s run status as frequency C decreases 1 On Grey path Shows hysteresis if time is reversed the path 1 t backwards is not the same For details on the path for starting 0 see the diagram at 8109 START FREQ 1 Note 8112 LOW FREQ 1 value must be between 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 1 8109 START FREQ 1 hie 8113 LOW FREQ 2 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the second auxiliary motor See 8112 Low FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation second auxiliary motor stops
197. BLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault EXT FAULT 1 or EXT FAULT 2 after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Group 32 SUPERVISION 153 This group defines supervision for up to three signals from Group 01 OPERATING DATA Supervision monitors a specified parameter and energizes a relay output if the parameter passes a defined limit Use Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS to define the relay and whether the relay activates when the signal is too low or too high Code Description 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM Selects the first supervised parameter Must be a parameter number from Group 01 OPERATING OUTPUTS definition also specifies which supervision limit is monitored DATA 100 NOT SELECTED No parameter selected LO lt HI e 101 178 Selects parameter 0101 0178 Note Case LO lt HI represents a normal hysteresis Ifthe supervised parameter passes a limit a relay output is Value of supervised parameter energized e The supervision limits are defined in this group 3203 e The relay outputs are defined in Group 14 RELAY Lo 3202 Y 25 Operating data supervision using relay outputs when LO lt HI A Case Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1402 RELAY Energized 1 a des OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 OVER or SUPRV2 OVER Use 0
198. ED AUTOCHNG Sets the autochange using a Timed function See parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL 0 NOT SEL 1 TIMED FUNC 1 Enables autochange when Timed function 1 is active 2 4 TIMED FUNC 2 4 Enables autochange when Timed function 2 4 is active 8127 MOTORS Sets the actual number of PFC controlled motors maximum 7 motors 1 speed regulated 3 connected direct on line and 3 spare motors This value includes also the speed regulated motor This value must be compatible with the number of relays allocated to PFC if the Autochange function is used If Autochange function is not used the speed regulated motor does not need to have a relay output allocated to PFC but it needs to be included in this value 8128 AUX START ORDER Sets the start order of the auxiliary motors 1 EVEN RUNTIME Time sharing is active Evens out the cumulative run time of the auxiliary motors The start order depends on the run time The auxiliary motor whose cumulative run time is shortest is started first then the motor whose cumulative run time is the second shortest etc When the demand drops the first motor to be stopped is the one whose cumulative run time is longest 2 RELAY ORDER The start order is fixed to be the order of the relays Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Group 98 OPTIONS 201 This group configures for options in particular enabling serial communication with the driv
199. EVOLUTION CNTR 0 65535 Mrev 1 Mrev 0143 DRIVE ON TIME HI 0 65535 days 1 day 0144 DRIVE ON TIME LO 00 00 00 23 59 58 1722s 0145 MOTOR TEMP Par 3501 1 3 10 200 C 1 3501 4 0 5000 3501 5 6 0 1 0146 0 32768 1 0147 REVS 32768 32767 1 0148 Z PLS DETECTED 0 NOT DETECTED 1 DETECTED 1 0150 CB TEMP 20 0 150 0 C 1 0 C 0153 MOT THERM STRESS 0 0 100 0 0 1 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 32768 32767 1 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 32768 32767 1 0174 SAVED KWH 0 0 999 9 kWh 0 1 kWh Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 93 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 0175 SAVED MWH 0 65535 MWh 1 MWh 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 0 0 999 9 0 1 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 0 65535 1 0178 SAVED 2 0 0 6553 5 tn 0 1 tn Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 0302 CMD WORD 2 0303 FB STS WORD 1 0304 FB STS WORD 2 1 0305 FAULT WORD 1 1 0306 FAULT WORD 2 1 0307 FAULT WORD 3 1 0308 ALARM WORD 1 1 0309 ALARM WORD 2 1 Group 04 FAULT HISTORY 0401 LAST FAULT Fault codes panel displays as text 1 0 0402 FAULT TIME 1 Date dd mm yy power on time in days 1 day 0 0403 FAULT TIME 2 Time hh mm ss 2s 0
200. F3 ACTIVE Proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED WARNING Be sure motor and driven equipment can be stopped using this mode 3 INHIBIT 1 OPERATION Enter OPERATION ENABLED Note the Run OPERATION ENABLED enable signal must be active See 1601 If 1601 is set to COMM this bit also actives the Run Enable signal 0 OPERATION Inhibit operation Enter OPERATION INHIBITED INHIBITED 4 Unused ABB DRV LIM RAMP_OUT_ 1 NORMAL OPERATION Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ZERO ACCELERATION ENABLED ABB DRV FULL 0 OUT ZERO Force ramp function generator output to Zero Drive ramps to stop current and DC voltage limits in force 5 RAMP_HOLD 1 OUT ENABLED Enable ramp function Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ACCELERATOR ENABLED 0 RFG OUT HOLD Halt ramping Ramp Function Generator output held 6 RAMP IN 1 RFG INPUT ENABLED Normal operation Enter OPERATING ZERO 0 INPUT ZERO Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero Embedded fieldbus 226 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual ABB Drives profile CONTROL WORD See parameter 5319 Bit Name Value commanded Comments state 7 RESET gt 1 RESET Fault reset if an active fault exists Enter SWITCH ON INHIBITED Effective if 1604 COMM 0 OPERATING Continue normal operation 8 9 Unused 10 Unused ABB DRV LIM REMOTE_CMD 1 Fieldbus control enabled ABBIBRVTUED CW 0 or Ref 0 Retain last CW and
201. IMED FUNC 1 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the Timed Function Timed Function activated EXT2 Timed Function de activated ExT1 See Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 10 12 TIMED FUNC 2 4 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the Timed Function See TIMED FUNC 1 above 1 DI1 INV Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of DI1 011 activated EXT1 DI1 de activated EXT2 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Assigns control to EXT or EXT2 based on the state of the selected digital input See DI1 INV above 1103 REF1 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF1 KEYPAD Defines the control panel as the reference source 1 1 Defines analog input 1 A11 as the reference EXT REF 1 MIN source gt 2 AI2 Defines analog input 2 2 as the reference EXT REF 1 MIN source 10V Al1 JOYST Defines analog input 1 A11 configured for 20 mA joystick operation as the reference source EXT REF 1 MAX The minimum input signal runs the drive at the maximum EXT REF 1 amp reference in the reverse direction Define the minimum a using parameter 1104 EXT REF 1 MIN The maximum input signal runs the drive at maximum reference in the forward direction Define the maximum EXT REF 1 MIN using parameter 1105 Requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST WARNING Because the low end of the re
202. INEAR 0 1 1000 0 s 0 16 0 06 2208 EMERG DEC TIME 0 0 1800 0 s 0 1s 1 0s 2209 RAMP INPUT O 6 7 1 0 NOT SEL Group 23 SPEED CONTROL 2301 PROP GAIN 0 00 200 00 0 01 5 00 2302 INTEGRATION TIME 0 00 600 00 s 0 01 s 0 50 s 2303 DERIVATION TIME 0 10000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 2304 COMPENSATION 0 00 600 00 s 0 01s 0 00 s 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN OFF 1 ON 1 Group 24 TORQUE CONTROL 2401 TORQ RAMP UP 0 00 120 00 s 0 015 0 00 s 2402 TORQ RAMP DOWN 0 00 120 00 s 0 01 s 0 00 s Group 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL 0 OFF 1 ON 1 0 OFF 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm 0 0 Hz 0 rpm 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm 0 0 Hz 0 rpm 2504 CRIT SPEED2 LO 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm 0 0 Hz 0 rpm 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm 0 0 Hz 0 rpm 2506 CRIT SPEED 3 LO 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm 0 0 Hz 0 rpm 2507 CRIT SPEED HI 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm 0 0 Hz 0 rpm Group 26 MOTOR CONTROL 2601 FLUX OPT ENABLE 0 OFF 1 ON 1 0 OFF 2602 FLUX BRAKING 0 OFF 1 ON 1 0 OFF Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 97 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 2603
203. Id may require adjustment Protocol reference Code Description Modbus 5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID Do not edit Any non zero value entered Contains the identification and program revision of for parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL the protocol sets this parameter automatically The format is XXYY where XX protocol ID and YY program revision 5302 EFB STATION ID Set each drive on the network with a Defines the node address of the RS485 link unique value for this parameter When this protocol is selected the default value for this parameter is 1 Note For a new address to take affect the drive power must be cycled or 5302 must first be set to 0 before selecting a new address Leaving 5302 0 places the RS485 channel in reset disabling communication 5303 EFB BAUD RATE When this protocol is selected the Defines the communication speed of the RS485 default value for this parameter is 9 6 link in kbits per second kbits s 1 2 kb s 19 2 kb s 2 4 kb s 38 4 kb s 4 8 kb s 57 6 kb s 9 6 kb s 76 8 kb s 5304 EFB PARITY When this protocol is selected the Defines the data length parity and stop bits to be default value for this parameter is 1 used with the RS485 communication The same settings must be used in all on line stations 0 8 NONE 1 8 data bits no parity one stop bit 1 8 NONE 2 8 data bits no parity two stop bits 2 8 EVEN 1 8 data bits even parity one stop bit
204. LT 10017 STATUS WORD Bit 16 Reserved ALARM 10018 STATUS WORD Bit 17 Reserved REQ_MAINT 10019 STATUS WORD Bit 18 Reserved DIRLOCK 10020 STATUS WORD Bit 19 Reserved LOCALLOCK 10021 STATUS WORD Bit 20 Reserved CTL_MODE 10022 STATUS WORD Bit 21 Reserved Reserved 10023 STATUS WORD Bit 22 Reserved Reserved 10024 STATUS WORD Bit 23 Reserved Reserved 10025 STATUS WORD Bit 24 Reserved Reserved 10026 STATUS WORD Bit 25 Reserved Reserved 10027 STATUS WORD Bit 26 Reserved REQ_CTL Embedded fieldbus ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 219 Modbus Internal location ABB DRV DCU PROFILE ref all profiles 5305 0 oR 2 5305 1 10028 STATUS WORD Bit 27 Reserved REQ REF1 10029 STATUS WORD Bit 28 Reserved REQ REF2 10030 STATUS WORD Bit 29 Reserved REQ_REF2EXT 10031 STATUS WORD Bit 30 Reserved ACK_STARTINH 10032 STATUS WORD Bit 31 Reserved ACK OFF ILCK 10033 011 011 011 10034 012 012 012 10035 DI3 DI3 DI3 10036 014 014 014 10037 015 015 015 10038 016 016 016 1 Active low For the 1xxxx registers Additional discrete inputs are added sequentially The ACS550 supports the following Modbus function codes for discrete inputs Function code Description 02 Read input status 3xxxx Mapping Modbus inputs The drive maps the following information to the 3xxxx Modbus addresses called Modbus input r
205. LT 1 and the drive coasts to stop 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the external fault input See DI1 INV above 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 Defines the External Fault 2 signal input and the drive response to an external fault See parameter 3003 above 3005 MOT THERM PROT Defines the drive response to motor overheating NOT SEL No response and or motor thermal protection not set up 1 FAULT When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 90 C displays an alarm 2010 MOTOR TEMP When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 110 displays a fault 9 MOT OVERTEMP and the drive coasts to stop 2 ALARM When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 90 displays an alarm 2010 MOTOR TEMP Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 149 Code Description 3006 THERM TIME Motor load 4 Sets the motor thermal time constant for the motor temperature model e This is the time required for the motor to reach 63 of the final t temperature with steady load e For thermal protection according to UL requirements for NEMA Temp rise class motors use the rule of thumb MOTOR THERM TIME equals 1000091 52 35 times 16 where 16 in seconds is specified by the motor 63991 J manufacturer as the time that the motor can safely operate at six times its rated current e The thermal time for a Class 10 trip curve is 350 s for a Class
206. LY be installed by a qualified electrician WARNING Even when the motor is stopped dangerous voltage is present at the power circuit terminals U1 V1 W1 and U2 V2 W2 and depending on the frame size UDC and UDC or BRK and BRK Safety instructions 6 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual WARNING Dangerous voltage is present when input power is connected After disconnecting the supply wait at least 5 minutes to let the intermediate circuit capacitors discharge before removing the cover WARNING Even when power is switched off from the input terminals of the ACS550 there may be dangerous voltage from external sources on the terminals of the relay outputs RO1 RO3 WARNING When the control terminals of two or more drives are connected in parallel the auxiliary voltage for these control connections must be taken from a single source which can either be one of the drives or an external supply WARNING If you install the drive on an IT system an ungrounded power system or a high resistance grounded over 30 ohms power system disconnect the internal EMC filter otherwise the system will be connected to ground potential through the EMC filter capacitors This can cause danger or damage the drive gt gt If you install the drive on a corner grounded TN system disconnect the internal EMC filter otherwise the system will be connected to ground potential through the EMC filter capacito
207. N Function No constant speed Constant speed 1 1202 Constant speed 2 1203 Constant speed 3 1204 Constant speed 4 1205 Constant speed 5 1206 Constant speed 6 1207 Constant speed 7 1208 alo a a ol ol ol I YG Ol ol o o o ol o Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 121 Code Description 13 DI3 4 5 Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using 013 D14 and 015 See above 011 2 3 for code 14 DI4 5 6 Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using 014 015 and DI6 See above 011 2 3 for code 15 18 TIMED FUNC 1 4 Selects Constant Speed 1 Constant Speed 2 or the external reference depending on the state of the Timed Function 1 4 and constant speed mode See parameter 1209 TIMED MODE SEL and Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 19 TIMED FUN1 amp 2 Selects a constant speed or the external reference depending on the state of Timed Functions 1 amp 2 and constant speed mode See parameter 1209 TIMED MODE SEL and Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 1 DI1 INV Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input D11 Inverse operation Digital input de activated Constant Speed 1 activated 2 6 DIZ INv DI6 INV Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input See above 7 DI1 2 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using 011 and DI2 Inverse operation uses
208. N WITH ID RUN SELECTION 0 OFF IDMAGN As stated above the identification magnetization is performed only if parameter 9904 is set to 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ or parameter 9904 is set to 3 SCALAR FREQ and parameter 2101 is set to 3 SCALAR FLYST or 5 FLY BOOST Press key to switch to local control LOC shown on the left Press to start the drive The motor model is now calculated by magnetizing the motor for 10 to 15 s at zero speed motor not rotating DIRECTION OF THE MOTOR ROTATION Check the direction of the motor rotation If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the left LUE switch to local control by pressing 9 XXX Hz To go to the Main menu press S if the bottom line shows FWD OUTPUT otherwise press 7 repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom Press keys lt amp c v 2 until you see and press S Increase the frequency reference from zero to a small value with key lt a Press to start the motor Check that the actual direction of the motor is the same as indicated on the display FWD means forward and REV reverse Press cQ to stop the motor Start up control with I O and ID Run ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual To change the direction of the motor rotation Disconnect input power from the drive and wait 5 minu
209. O1 Speed J1 Reference up down DI3 4 Analog output AO2 Current 9 gt Al1 0 10 V Constant speed selection 015 Relay output 1 Ready 9 P AI2 0 4 20 mA Run enable 016 Relay output 2 Running or Relay output 3 Fault 1 J1 jo 0 10 V N 217 AI2 0 4 20 mA Application macros 82 Hand Auto macro ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual This macro provides an I O configuration that is typically used in HVAC applications To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 5 HAND AUTO Note Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting 0 OFF Connection example x1 1 10 kohm 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen Lu 2 External reference 1 0 10 V Hand Control 3 AGND Analog input circuit common i 4 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC 5 Al2 External reference 2 0 20 mA Auto Control 6 AGND Analog input circuit common D 7 AO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA KC 8 2 Output current 0 20 mA t 719 AGND Analog output circuit common 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 12 DCOM Digital input common for all 13 DI1 Start Stop Hand Activation starts the drive 14 DI2 Forward Reverse Hand Activation reverses r
210. OM VOLT 1 73 lt 3 0 where 1000 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER if units are kW or Py 746 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER if units are hp e g in US 1006 PAR EXT RO Parameter values are inconsistent Check for the following Extension relay module not connected and 1410 1412 RELAY OUTPUTS 4 6 have non zero values 1007 PAR FIELDBUS MISSING Parameter values are inconsistent Check for and correct A parameter is set for fieldbus control e g 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 10 COMM but 9802 COMM PROT SEL 0 1008 PAR PFC MODE Parameter values are inconsistent 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE must be 3 SCALAR FREQ when 8123 PFC ENABLE is activated 1009 PAR PCU 1 Parameter values for power control are inconsistent Improper motor nominal frequency or speed Check for both of the following e 1 lt 60 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED lt 16 0 8 lt 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 120 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ Motor Poles lt 0 992 1010 1011 RESERVED Not used 1012 PAR PFC IO 1 IO configuration is not complete not enough relays are parameterized to PFC Or a conflict exists between Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS parameter 8117 NR OF AUX MOT and parameter 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 1013 PAR PFC IO 2 IO configuration is not complete the actual number of PFC motors parameter 8127 MOTORS does not match the PFC motors in Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS and param
211. Panel 71 overcurrent automatic reset parameter 152 fault code 260 overload curve see user load curve overmodulation 146 overspeed fault code 263 overvoltage control enable parameter 133 P panel communication parameter group 183 panel display variables parameter group 156 panel firmware version 47 51 panel loss fault 261 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual parameter analog input scale fault code 264 analog output scale fault code 264 change 129 descriptions 106 external relay output fault code 265 fieldbus fault code 265 hz rpm fault 264 listing ranges resolutions defaults 91 PCU 1 power control unit fault code 265 PCU 2 power control unit fault code 265 PFC IO fault code 265 PFC mode fault code 265 PFC ref neg faultcode 264 Save 130 table version parameter 155 user load curve fault code 265 view 132 parameter mode Assistant Control Panel 55 Basic Control Panel T3 parameter restore Assista
212. Panel REF 2 21 1106 612 Const Al Speed Comm REF 2 P1106 Panel REF2 p4910 PID Setpoint 0 17 1107 ANS P4012 ake P4013 19 Comm Internal G40 Al P4016 PID4 Current 4 PID1 Out Torque FON P4014 P4015 c ret F401 7 PID Act Value Torque Power Note In order to activate and use the PID controller parameter 1106 must be set to value 19 Parameters 170 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual PID controller Advanced The ACS550 has two separate PID controllers Process PID PID1 and External PID PID2 Process PID PID1 has 2 separate sets of parameters Process PID PID1 SET1 defined in Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 and Process PID PID1 SET2 defined in Group 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 You can select between the two different sets by using parameter 4027 Typically two different PID controller sets are used when the load of the motor changes considerably from one situation to another You can use External PID PID2 defined in Group 42 EXT TRIM PID in two different ways Instead of using additional PID controller hardware you can set outputs of the ACS550 to control a field instrument like a damper or a valve In this case set parameter 4230 to value O 0 is the default value You can use External PID PID2 to trim or fine tune the speed of the ACS550 Code Description 4001 GAIN Defines the PID controller s gain The setting range is 0 1 10
213. R How to do common tasks EXIT 00 00 ENTER The table below lists common tasks the mode in which you can perform them and the page number where the steps to do the task are described in detail Task Mode Page How to get help Any 51 How to find out the panel version At power up 51 How to adjust the display contrast Output 54 How to switch between local and remote control Any 22 How to start and stop the drive Any 52 How to change the direction of the motor rotation Output 53 How to set the speed frequency or torque reference Output 54 How to change the value of a parameter Parameters 55 How to select the monitored signals Parameters 56 How to do guided tasks specification of related parameter sets Assistants 57 with assistants How to view and edit changed parameters Changed Parameters 60 How to view faults Fault Logger 61 How to reset faults and alarms Output Fault 265 How to show hide the clock change date and time formats set the Time and Date 62 clock and enable disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes How to copy parameters from the drive to the control panel Parameter Backup 65 How to restore parameters from the control panel to the drive Parameter Backup 65 How to view backup information Parameter Backup 66 How to edit and change parameter settings related to I O terminals 1 Settings 67 Control
214. RS485 termination J2 J2 off position position Power input amp U1 V1 W1 _ Diagram shows the R3 frame Other frames have similar layouts Panel connector FlashDrop option Power LED green Fault LED red Optional module 1 77 X1 Communications RS485 Optional module 2 Power output to motor amp U2 V2 W2 3AUA0000001571 Optional braking Frame size Terminal labels Brake options R1 R2 BRK BRK Brake resistor R3 R4 UDC UDC Braking unit Chopper and resistor WARNING To avoid danger or damage to the drive on IT systems and corner grounded TN systems see section Disconnecting the internal EMC filter on page 27 Installation 26 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual The following diagram shows the power and ground terminal layout for frame sizes 5 and R6end
215. RUN ENABLE Selects the source of the run enable signal 0 NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external run enable signal 1 011 Defines digital input 011 as the run enable signal This digital input must be activated for run enable f the voltage drops and de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and not start until the run enable signal resumes 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the run enable signal See DI1 above 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the run enable signal Bit 6 of the Command Word 1 parameter 0301 activates the run disable signal See fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input 011 as the run enable signal This digital input must be de activated for run enable If this digital input activates the drive will coast to stop and not start until the run enable signal resumes 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the run enable signal See DI1 INV above 1602 PARAMETER LOCK Determines if the control panel can change parameter values e This lock does not limit parameter changes made by macros This lock does not limit parameter changes written by fieldbus inputs This parameter value can be changed only if the correct pass code is entered See parameter 1603 PASS CODE 0 LOCKED You cannot use the control
216. S550 01 U1 User s Manual 75 Copy mode The Basic Control Panel can store a full set of drive parameters and up to two user sets of drive parameters to the control panel The control panel memory is non volatile In the Copy mode you can copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel uL Upload This includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal not adjustable by the user parameters such as those created by the ID Run restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive dL A Download All This writes all parameters including the internal non user adjustable motor parameters to the drive It does not include the user sets of parameters Note Only use this function to restore a drive or to transfer parameters to systems that are identical to the original system copy a partial parameter set from the control panel to a drive dL P Download Partial The partial set does not include user sets internal motor parameters parameters 9905 9909 1605 1607 5201 nor any Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE and Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters The source and target drives and their motor sizes do not need to be the same copy USER S1 parameters from the control panel to the drive dL u1 Download User Set 1 A user set includes Group 99 START UP DATA parameters and the internal motor parameters The function is only shown on the menu when User Set 1 has been first saved using paramete
217. S550 x1 bw PN Ina Pha Pha size see below A kW hp A kW hp Three phase supply voltage 208 240 V 04A6 2 4 6 0 75 1 3 5 0 55 0 75 R1 06A6 2 6 6 1 1 1 5 4 6 0 75 1 R1 07A5 2 7 5 1 5 2 6 6 1 1 1 5 R1 012A 2 11 8 2 2 3 7 5 1 5 2 R1 017A 2 16 7 4 5 11 8 2 2 3 R1 024A 2 24 2 5 5 7 5 16 7 4 5 R2 031A 2 30 8 7 5 10 24 2 5 5 7 5 R2 046A 2 46 2 11 15 30 8 7 5 10 R3 059A 2 59 4 15 20 46 2 11 15 R3 075A 2 74 8 18 5 25 59 4 15 20 R4 088A 2 88 0 22 30 74 8 18 5 25 R4 114A 2 114 30 40 88 0 22 30 R4 143A 2 143 37 50 114 30 40 R6 178A 2 178 45 60 150 37 50 R6 221A 2 221 55 75 178 45 60 R6 248A 2 248 75 100 192 55 75 R6 00467918 xls C Technical data 278 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Ratings 380 480 V drives Abbreviated column headers are described in section Symbols on page 279 Type Normal use Heavy duty use Frame ACS550 x1 I2N PN Pha Pha size see below A kW hp A kW hp Three phase supply voltage 380 480 V 03A3 4 3 3 1 1 1 5 2 4 0 75 1 R1 04A1 4 4 1 1 5 2 3 3 1 1 1 5 R1 05A4 4 5 4 2 2 Note 1 4 1 1 5 Note 1 R1 06A9 4 6 9 3 3 5 4 2 2 3 R1 08A8 4 8 8 4 5 6 9 3 3 R1 012A 4 11 9 5 5 7 5 8 8 4 5 R1 015A 4 15 4 7 5 10 11 9 5 5 7 5 R2 023A 4 23 11 15 15 4 7 5 10 R2 031A 4 31 15 20 23 11 15 R3 038A 4 38 18 5 25 31 15 20 R3 045A 4 45 22 30 38 18 5 25 R3 059A 4 59 30 40 44 22 30 R4 072A
218. SAFE64506005 English RDNA 01 DeviceNet Adapter User s Manual SAFE64504223 English RECA 01 EtherCAT Adapter Module User s Manual 3AUA0000043520 English REPL 01 Ethernet POWERLINK Adapter Module User s Manual 3AUA0000052289 English REPL 02 Ethernet POWERLINK Adapter Module User s Manual 3AUA0000090411 English RETA 01 Ethernet Adapter Module User s Manual SAFE64539736 English RETA 02 Ethernet Adapter Module User s Manual SAFE68895383 English Guide for Capacitor Reforming in ACS50 ACS55 ACS150 ACS310 ACS350 ACS355 ACS550 ACH550 and R1 R4 OINT SINT boards 3AFE68735190 English ACS550 01 manuals CANopen is a registered trademark of CAN in Automation e V ControlNet is a trademark of ODVA DeviceNet is a trademark of ODVA DRIVECOM is a registered trademark of DRIVECOM User Group e V EtherCAT is registered trademark and patented technology licensed by Beckhoff Automation GmbH Germany EtherNet IP is a trademark of ODVA ETHERNET POWERLINK is a trademark of Bernecker Rainer Industrie ElektronikGes m b H Modbus and Modbus TCP are registered trademarks of Schneider Automation Inc PROFIBUS PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO are registered trademarks of Profibus International ACS550 01 U1 Drives 0 75 160 kW 1 200 hp User s Manual 3AFE64804588 3AUA0000001418 Rev H EN EFFECTIVE 2014 07 04 SUPERSEDES 3AFE64804588 3AUA0000001418 Rev G 2009 07 07 2
219. T Selects both the flying start and the torque boost mode SCALAR FREQ mode only Flying start routine is performed first and the motor is magnetized If the speed is found to be zero the torque boost is done 8 RAMP Immediate start from zero frequency 2102 STOP FUNCTION Selects the motor stop method 1 COAST Selects cutting off the motor power as the stop method The motor coasts to stop 2 RAMP Selects using a deceleration ramp Deceleration ramp is defined by 2203 DECELER TIME 1 or 2206 DECELER TIME 2 whichever is active 2103 DC MAGN TIME Defines the pre magnetizing time for the DC Magnetizing start mode Use parameter 2101 to select the start mode After the start command the drive pre magnetizes the motor for the time defined here and then starts the motor Setthe pre magnetizing time just long enough to allow full motor magnetization Too long a time heats the motor excessively 2104 HOLD CTL Motor DC hold Selects whether DC current is used for braking or DC Hold speed H O NOT SEL Disables the DC current operation 1 DC HOLD Enables the DC Hold function See the diagram J Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 VECTOR SPEED Stops generating sinusoidal current and injects DC into the motor when both the reference and the motor speed drop below the value of parameter 2105 When the reference rises above the level of parameter
220. T resets all energy calculators at the same time See Group 45 ENERGY SAVING 0175 SAVED MWH Energy saved in MWh compared to the energy used when the pump is connected directly to the supply See the note on page 180 The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 65535 after which the counter rolls over and starts again from O Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET resets all energy calculators at the same time See Group 45 ENERGY SAVING 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 Energy saved in local currency remainder when the total saved energy is divided by 1000 See the note on page 180 To find out the total saved energy in currency units add the value of parameter 0177 multiplied by 1000 to the value of parameter 0176 Example 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 123 4 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 5 Total saved energy 5 1000 123 4 5123 4 currency units The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 999 9 after which the counter rolls over and starts again from 0 0 and the counter value of signal 0177 is incremented by one Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET resets all energy calculators at the same time Local energy price is set with parameter 4502 ENERGY PRICE See Group 45 ENERGY SAVING 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 Energy saved in local currency in thousand currency units Eg value 5 means 5000 currency units See the note on page 780 The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 65535 the counter does not roll ove
221. The number of days elapsed after the power on if the real time clock is not used or was not set xx d 6408 PEAK TIME 2 Time of the peak value detection Format hours minutes seconds Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 187 Code Description 6409 CURRENT AT PEAK Current at the moment of the peak value amperes 6410 UDC AT PEAK DC voltage at the moment of the peak value volts 6411 FREQ AT PEAK Output frequency at the moment of the peak value herzes 6412 TIME OF RESET 1 Last reset date of the peak logger and amplitude logger 2 e Format Date if the real time clock is operating dd mm yy The number of days elapsed after the power on if the real time clock is not used or was not set xx d 6413 TIME OF RESET 2 Last reset time of the peak logger and amplitude logger 2 Format hours minutes seconds 6414 IAL1RANGE0TO10 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current 2 0 10 distribution 6415 ALTRANGE10TO20 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current 2 10 20 distribution 6416 ALTRANGE20TO30 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current 2 20 30 distribution 6417 ALTRANGES30TO40 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current gt 30 40 distribution 6418 1 40 50 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current
222. U1 User s Manual 139 Group 22 ACCEL DECEL This group defines ramps that control the rate of acceleration and deceleration You define these ramps as a pair one for acceleration and one for deceleration You can define two pairs of ramps and use a digital input to select one or the other pair Code Description 2201 ACCIDEC 1 2 SEL Defines control for selection of acceleration deceleration ramps Ramps are defined in pairs one each for acceleration and deceleration See below for the ramp definition parameters 0 NOT SEL Disables selection the first ramp pair is used 1 011 Defines digital input D11 as the control for ramp pair selection Activating the digital input selects ramp pair 2 De activating the digital input selects ramp pair 1 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for ramp pair selection See DI1 above 7 COMM Defines bit 10 of the Command Word 1 as the control for ramp pair selection The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The Command Word is parameter 0301 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input 011 as the control for ramp pair selection De activating the digital input selects ramp pair 2 Activating the digital input selects ramp pair 1 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for ramp pair selection See DI1 INV above 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 i e
223. UE 1 2015 TORQUE 1 600 0 0 0 0 1 300 0 2016 TORQUE 2 600 0 0 0 0 1 300 0 2017 TORQUE 1 0 0 600 0 0 1 300 0 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 0 0 600 0 0 1 300 0 Parameters 96 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Range Resolution Default User S Group 21 START STOP 2101 START FUNCTION Vector control modes 1 2 8 1 8 RAMP Y Scalar control mode 1 5 8 2102 STOP FUNCTION 1 COAST 2 RAMP 1 1 COAST 2103 MAGN TIME 0 00 10 00 s 0 01 s 0 30 s 2104 DC HOLD CTL 0 NOT SEL 1 DC HOLD 1 0 NOT SEL 2 DC BRAKING 2105 DC HOLD SPEED 0 360 rpm 1 rpm 5 rpm 2106 DC CURR REF 0 100 1 30 2107 DC BRAKE TIME 0 0 250 0 s 0 15 0 05 2108 INHIBIT OFF 1 ON 1 OFF 2109 EMERG STOP SEL 6 6 1 0 NOT SEL 2110 BOOST CURR 15 300 1 100 2112 ZERO SPEED DELAY 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1 60 0 s 0 15 0 0 s NOT SEL 2113 START DELAY 0 00 60 00 s 0 01 s 0 00 s Group 22 ACCEL DECEL 2201 1 2 SEL 6 7 1 5 DI5 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 0 0 1800 0 s 0 1s 5 0s 2203 DECELER TIME 1 0 0 1800 0 s 0 15 5 05 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 0 0 LINEAR 0 1 1000 0 s 0 15 0 05 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 0 0 1800 0 5 0 15 60 05 2206 DECELER TIME 2 0 0 1800 0 s 0 15 60 05 2207 RAMP SHAPE 2 0 0 L
224. ULT Displays a fault 10 PANEL LOSS and the drive coasts to stop 2 CONST SP 7 Displays an alarm 2008 PANEL LOSS and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 3 LAST SPEED Displays an alarm 2008 PANEL LOSS and sets speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds Note When either of the two external control locations are active and start stop and or direction are through the control panel 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 8 KEYPAD the drive follows speed frequency reference according to the configuration of the external control locations instead of the value of the last speed or parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7 WARNING If you select CONST SP 7 or LAST SPEED make sure that continued operation is safe when the control panel communication is lost 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 Defines the External Fault 1 signal input and the drive response to an external fault NOT SEL External fault signal is not used 1 D11 Defines digital input 011 as the external fault input Activating the digital input indicates a fault The drive displays a fault 14 EXT FAULT 1 and the drive coasts to stop 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the external fault input See 011 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the external fault input De activating the digital input indicates a fault The drive displays a fault 14 EXT FAU
225. XIT 00 00 Control panels 68 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Basic Control Panel Features The Basic Control Panel features numeric control panel with an LCD display copy function parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system Overview The following table summarizes the key functions and displays on the Basic Control Panel REL LtLq SEE Use 1 LCD display Divided into five areas a Upper left Control location 1 O 1 1 Ub LOC drive control is local that is from the control panel Fwo 1 REM drive control is remote such as the drive I O or fieldbus 1d ouTPUT b Upper right Unit of the displayed value c Center Variable in general shows parameter and signal values menus or lists Shows also fault and alarm codes d Lower left and center Panel operation state OUTPUT Output mode PAR Parameter mode MENU Main menu ENE Fault mode e Lower right Indicators FWD forward REV reverse direction of the motor rotation Flashing slowly stopped Flashing rapidly running not at setpoint Steady running at setpoint Displayed value can be modified in the Parameter and Reference modes 2 RESET EXIT Exits to the next higher menu level without saving changed values Resets
226. YPE Identifies the type of the motor temperature sensor used PT100 C PTC ohm or thermistor See parameters 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL and 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL NONE 1 1 x PT100 Sensor configuration uses one PT100 sensor Analog output AO1 or AO2 feeds constant current through the sensor The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises as does the voltage over the sensor The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input AI1 or AI2 and converts it to degrees Celsius 2 2 x PT100 Sensor configuration uses two PT100 sensors Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100 3 3x PT100 Sensor configuration uses three PT100 sensors Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100 4 Sensor configuration uses one The analog output feeds a constant current through the sensor The resistance of the sensor increases sharply as the motor temperature rises over the PTC reference temperature as does the voltage over the resistor The temperature measurement Excessive function reads the voltage through analog input 11 and converts it into ohms The table below and the graph show typical PTC sensor resistance as a function of the motor operating temperature Temperature Resistance Normal Normal 1 5 kohm Excessive gt 4 5 0 Sensor configuration uses a thermistor Motor thermal protection is activated th
227. access remove the rubber plugs Push plugs out from the back of the drive 2 R5 amp R6 Align the sheet metal hood not shown in front of the drive s top mounting holes Attach as part of next step 4 3 Position the ACS550 onto the mounting screws or bolts and securely tighten in all four corners Note Lift the ACS550 by its metal chassis frame size R6 by the lifting holes on both sides at the top 4 Reinstall the rubber plugs 5 Non English speaking locations Add a warning sticker in the appropriate language over the existing warning on the top of the module Installation ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 23 Wiring overview Conduit Gland kit Wiring drives with the IP21 UL type 1 enclosure requires a conduit gland kit with the following items conduit gland box five 5 cable clamps ACS550 01 only Screws cover The kit is included with IP21 UL type 1 enclosures Wiring requirements WARNING Ensure the motor is compatible for use with the ACS550 The drive must be installed by a competent person in accordance with the considerations defined in section Preparing for installation on page 76 If in doubt contact your local ABB representative As you install the wiring observe the following There are four sets of wiring instructions one set for each combination of drive enclosure type IP21 UL type and IP54 UL type 12 a
228. activated for start enable 1 signal If the voltage drops and de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and show alarm 2021 on the panel display The drive will not start until start enable 1 signal resumes 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 1 signal See DI1 above 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start enable 1 signal Bit 2 of the Command word 2 parameter 0302 activates the start disable 1 signal See fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the start enable 1 signal 2 6 012 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 1 signal See DIT INV above Drive started START STOP COMMAND 10 START ENABLE SIGNAL Parameters 1608 amp 1609 Relay energized Relay _ STARTED de energized RELAY STATUS Group 14 Damper open Damper l Damper closed closed DAMPER Ca 5 4 STATUS amper Damper opening closing time time RUN ENABLE SIGNAL from the damper end switch when the damper is fully opened Parameter 1601 MOTOR STATUS Acceleration Drive coasts time to stop Par 2202 Parameters 132 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Description 1609 START ENABLE 2 Selects the source of the start enable 2
229. al purpose 2 wire I O configuration with three 3 constant speeds Parameter values are the default values defined in section Complete parameter list on page 91 Connection example x1 4 10kohmJ1 ISCR Signal cable shield screen 2 1 External frequency reference 1 0 10 v1 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC 5 AI2 Not used 6 AGND Analog input circuit common D 7 1 Output frequency 0 20 mA 8 2 Output current 0 20 mA 119 AGND Analog output circuit common 101 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 411 IGND Auxiliary voltage output common L 112 IDCOM Digital input common for all 13 DI Start Stop Activate to start 14 DI2 Fwd Rev Activate to reverse rotation direction 15 1013 Constant speed selection 16 DIA Constant speed selection 17 DI5 Ramp pair selection Activate to select 2nd acc dec ramp pair 18 DI6 Not used 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable Note 1 The external reference S 20 RO4A Default operation used asa speed reference if a vector 21 RO1B Ready gt 19 connected to 21 mode is selected 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable Note Code 23 RO2A Default operation 0 open 1 connected 24lRO2B Running g
230. all profiles support requesting fault codes using this specification For profiles that support this specification the profile documentation defines the proper fault request process Fieldbus fault code Drive fault code DRIVECOM specification 1 OVERCURRENT 2310h 2 DC OVERVOLT 3210h 3 DEV OVERTEMP 4210h 4 SHORT CIRC 2340h 5 Reserved FF6Bh 6 DC UNDERVOLT 3220h 7 AI1 LOSS 8110h 8 12 LOSS 8110h 9 MOT OVERTEMP 4310h 10 PANEL LOSS 5300h 11 ID RUN FAIL FF84h 12 MOTOR STALL 7121h 14 EXT FAULT 1 9000h 15 EXT FAULT 2 9001h 16 EARTH FAULT 2330h 17 Obsolete FF6Ah 18 THERM FAIL 5210h 19 OPEX LINK 7500h 20 OPEX PWR 5414h 21 CURR MEAS 2211h 22 SUPPLY PHASE 3130h 23 ENCODER ERR 7301h 24 OVERSPEED 7310h 25 Reserved FF80h 26 DRIVE ID 5400h Fieldbus adapter 246 Drive fault code Fieldbus fault code DRIVECOM specification 27 CONFIG FILE 630Fh 28 SERIAL 1 ERR 7510h 29 EFB CON FILE 6306h 30 FORCE TRIP FF90h 31 EFB 1 FF92h 32 EFB 2 FF93h 33 EFB 3 FF94h 34 MOTOR PHASE FF56h 35 OUTP WIRING FF95h 36 INCOMPATIBLE SW 630Fh 37 CB OVERTEMP 4110h 38 USER LOAD CURVE FF6Bh 101 SERF CORRUPT FF55h 102 Reserved FF55h 103 SERF MACRO FF55h 104 Reserved FF55h 105 Reserved FF55h 201 DSP T1 OVERLOAD 6100h 202 DSP T2 OVERLOAD 6100
231. always stops the drive 18 016 Start Stop PID Activation starts the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A Default operation Note 2 Code 21 RO1B H Ready gt 19 connected to 21 0 open 1 connected 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable DI31DI4 Output 23 RO2A x Default operation 0 10 Reference through 24 RO2B t Running gt 22 connected to 24 1 CONST SPEED 1 1202 25 Rese E 1 programmable 5 771 CONST SPEED 2 1203 efault operation 27 Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 1 1 CONST SPERN 3 1204 Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Analog reference Al1 Analog output AO1 Speed J1 Actual value 12 Analog output AO2 Current 9 11 0 10 V Start stop hand PID DI1 6 Relay output 1 Ready 9 y Al2 0 4 20 mA EXT1 EXT2 selection 012 Relay output 2 Running or Constant speed selection DI3 4 Relay output 3 Fault 1 141 e Run enable DI5 11 0 10 V AI2 0 4 20 mA NO Note Use the following switch on order 1 EXT1 EXT2 2 Run Enable 3 Start Application macros 84 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual This macro provides parameter settings for pump and fan control PFC applications To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 7 PFC CONTROL Note Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting 0 OFF
232. ameter 148 thermal stress data parameter 111 thermal time fault parameter 149 motor auxiliary aux start order parameter 200 aux start delay PFC parameter 191 aux stop delay PFC parameter 191 number of aux parameter 192 motors several m EPA 279 289 320 mounting 10 5 303 TANGO ov oe LE veins EISE 20 template 20 multimotor systems 136 146 279 289 MWh counter data parameter 110 power consumption maintenance trigger 147 N NEMA ratings see ratings NOISE ss hd Da s eL EPA Y vs 301 random sw freq parameter 146 NPNZ nue ege 5 uem EEIQ oS 29 offset PID 178 ok messages count parameter 183 operating data parameter group 108 operation Assistant Control Panel 49 Basic Control Panel 69 OPEX link fault code 262 OPEX power fault code 262 options dile ede ode 17 parameter 201 17 output frequency data parameter 108 voltage data parameter 108 wiring fault 263 output mode Assistant Control Panel 53 Basic Control
233. ameter logged for the peak value 101 178 Logs parameter 0101 0178 6402 PVL FILTER TIME Defines the filter time for peak value logging 0 0 120 0 Filter time seconds 6403 LOGGERS RESET Defines the source for the reset of peak value logger and amplitude logger 2 0 NOT SEL No reset selected 1 011 Reset loggers on the rising edge of digital input 011 2 6 DI2 DI6 Reset loggers on the rising edge of digital input DI2 DI6 7 RESET Reset loggers Parameter is set to NOT SEL 1 DI1 INV Reset loggers on the falling edge of digital input D11 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Reset loggers on the falling edge of digital input DI2 DI6 6404 AL2 SIGNAL Defines the signal logged for amplitude logger 2 Any parameter number in Group 01 OPERATING DATA can be selected Eg 102 parameter 0102 SPEED 100 NOT SELECTED No signal parameter logged for amplitude distribution amplitude logger 2 101 178 Logs parameter 0101 0178 6405 AL2 SIGNAL BASE Defines the base value from which the percentage distribution is calculated Representation and default value depends on the signal selected with parameter 6404 AL2 SIGNAL 6406 PEAK VALUE Detected peak value of the signal selected with parameter 6401 PVL SIGNAL 6407 PEAK TIME 1 Date of the peak value detection Format Date if the real time clock is operating dd mm yy
234. apter Safety instructions on page 5 before performing any maintenance on the equipment Ignoring the safety instructions can cause injury or death Maintenance intervals If installed in an appropriate environment the drive requires very little maintenance This table lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended by ABB Maintenance Interval Instruction Heatsink temperature check Depends on the dustiness of the See Heatsink on page 277 and cleaning environment every 6 12 months Main cooling fan replacement Every six years See Main fan replacement on page 272 Internal enclosure cooling fan Every three years See nternal enclosure fan replacement replacement on 274 IP54 UL type 12 drives Capacitor reforming Every year when stored See Reforming on page 275 Capacitor replacement Every nine years See Replacement on page 275 frame sizes R5 and R6 Replace battery in the Assistant Every ten years See Battery on page 275 Control Panel Consult your local ABB representative for more details on the maintenance On the Internet go to www abb com drives and select Service Maintenance Heatsink The heatsink fins accumulate dust from the cooling air Since a dusty heatsink is less efficient at cooling the drive overtemperature faults become more likely In a normal environment not dusty not clean check the heatsink annually in a dusty environment check more often Clean
235. arameters are selected for display that is just MA Lour one or two of the values of parameters 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 3408 P 3404 d 0 4 SIGNAL2 PARAM 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM are other than 100 NOT 2 4 4 SELECTED the number and name of each displayed parameter are pzmR zu shown in addition to the value DIR 00 00 MENU 100 NOT SELECTED First parameter not displayed 101 178 Displays parameter 0101 0178 If parameter does not exist the display shows n a 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Defines the minimum expected value for the first display parameter Use parameters 3402 3403 3406 and 3407 for example to convert a Group 01 OPERATING DATA parameter such as 0102 SPEED in P 3407 i rpm to the speed of a conveyor driven by the motor in ft min For such a conversion the source values in the figure are the min and max motor speed and the display values are the corresponding min Display value and max conveyor speed Use parameter 3405 to select the proper P3406 units for the display Note Selecting units does not convert values Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT DSP FORM 9 DIRECT 3403 SIGNAL1 MAX Defines the maximum expected value for the first display parameter Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 9 DIRECT 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM P3402 P 3403 Source value
236. arm is generated when the condition defined by 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than half of the time defined by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 3703 USER LOAD C TIME Defines the time limit for generating a fault Half of this time is used as the limit for generating an alarm 3704 LOAD FREQ 1 Defines the frequency value of the first load curve definition point Must be smaller than 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 3705 LOAD TORQ LOW 1 Defines the torque value of the first underload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 Defines the torque value of the first overload curve definition point 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 Defines the frequency value of the second load curve definition point Must be smaller than 3710 LOAD FREQ 3 3708 LOAD TORQ LOW 2 Defines the torque value of the second underload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 Defines the torque value of the second overload curve definition point 3710 LOAD FREQ 3 Defines the frequency value of the third load curve definition point Must be smaller than 3713 LOAD FREQ 4 3711 LOAD TORQ LOW 3 Defines the torque value of the third underload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3712 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3 3712 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3 Defines the torque value of the third overload curve definition point
237. ate buc an whee E M ieu e uei 80 Motor Potentiometer macro 81 Hand A to macro suu zc ed ata Yaka eV she han RES 82 PID Gontrol macro LER EE E ee 83 iaces RO ee aet t AN 84 Torque Control macro 85 Connection examples of two wire and three wire sensors 86 Connection for obtaining 0 10 V from analog outputs 87 User parameter Sets cei ise Rd d s une es Meets de 88 Table of contents 10 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Macro default values for parameters 89 Parameters Complete parameter list 91 Complete parameter descriptions 106 Embedded fieldbus OVEIVIGW e hte ed M e ert 203 Planning eed hoa eee sd Pad ee eee es 204 Mechanical and electrical installation EFB 204 Communication set up 205 Activate drive control functions EFB 207 Feedback from the drive EFB 211 Diagnostics EEB 20 Ru gave ER P agus 212 Modbus protocol technical data 215 ABB cont
238. auxiliary motor Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 193 Code Description The table below shows the ACS550 PFC motor assignments for some typical settings in the Relay Output parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 where the settings are either 31 PFC or X anything but 31 and where the Autochange function is disabled 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 0 Parameter setting ACS550 Relay assignment 1 Autochange disabled 1 alee RO1 RO2 RO3 RO4 RO5 ROG 1 3 2 X 31131 31131 31 x x x Aux Aux x x Aux Aux Aux X X Aux Aux X X X X Aux Aux 31131 1 Aux Aux X X X One additional relay output for the that is in use One motor is in sleep when the other is rotating X X X X N NON gt N x gt lt x x Nv gt Xx gt lt XxX XxX x A gt x x x x x o a xox L x x w o x lt gt lt gt lt The table below shows the ACS550 PFC motor assignments for some typical settings in the Relay Output parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 where the settings are either 31 PFC or X anything but 31 and where the Autochange function is enabled 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV value gt 0 0 Parameter setting ACS550 Relay assignment 1 Autochange enabled 4 RO1 RO2 RO4 RO5 RO6 0 2 31 31131 X 31
239. be replaced using the original mounting holes For R1 and R2 frame sizes the mounting holes are identical For R3 and R4 frame sizes the inside mounting holes on the top of ACS550 drives match ACS400 mounts Installation ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Remove the front cover IP21 UL type 1 1 Remove the control panel if attached 2 Loosen the captive screw at the top 3 Pull near the top to remove the cover IP54 UL type 12 1 If hood is present Remove screws 2 holding hood in place 2 If hood is present Slide hood up and off of the cover 3 Loosen the captive screws around the edge of the cover 4 Remove the cover 21 2000 Installation 22 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Mount the drive 1 IP21 UL type 1 1 Position the ACS550 onto the mounting screws or bolts and securely tighten in all four corners yl ASAAN Note Lift the ACS550 by its metal chassis frame size R6 by the lifting holes on both sides at the top 2 Non English speaking locations Add a warning sticker in the appropriate language over the existing warning on the top of the module IP54 UL type 12 For the IP54 UL type 12 enclosures rubber plugs are required in the holes provided for access to the drive mounting slots 1P2002 1 As required for
240. bit from this channel is not granted 31 ACK OFF ILCK 1 Start inhibit due to OFF button 0 Normal operation Embedded fieldbus ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual State diagram ABB Drives profile 231 To illustrate the operation of the state diagram the following example ABB DRV LIM implementation of the ABB Drives profile uses the control word to start the drive First the requirements for using the CONTROL WORD must be met See above When the power is first connected the state of the drive is not ready to switch on See dotted lined path in the state diagram below Use the CONTROL WORD to step through the state machine states until the OPERATING State is reached meaning that the drive is running and follows the given reference See the table below Step CONTROL WORD Value Description 1 CW 0000 0000 0000 0110 This CW value changes the drive state to READY TO SWITCH ON bit 15 bit O 2 Wait at least 100 ms before proceeding CW 0000 0000 0000 0111 This CW value changes the drive state to READY TO OPERATE 4 CW 0000 0000 0000 1111 This CW value changes the drive state to OPERATION ENABLED The drive starts but will not accelerate 5 CW 0000 0000 0010 1111 This CW value releases the ramp function generator RFG output and changes the drive state to RFG ACCELERATOR ENABLED 6 CW 0000 0000 0110 1111 This CW value releases the ramp function generator RFG
241. bout the completion Press X to return to the Par Backup menu To perform downloads select the appropriate operation here DOWNLOAD FULL SET is used as an example on the Par Backup menu with keys 7 and S vw 2 and press The display shows the transfer status as percentage of completion Press 7 if you want stop the operation After the download is completed the display shows a message about the completion Press lt lt to return to the Par Backup menu LOC WPAR BACKUP Copying parameters 50 a amad ABORT 00 00 LOC UMESSAGE Parameter_upload successful OK 00 00 LOC UPAR BACKUP Downloading parameters full set 50 ee ABORT 00 00 LOC UMESSAGE Parameter_download successful ly completed OK 00 00 Control panels 66 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual How to view information about the backup Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing SS if you are in the Output mode otherwise LOC UMAIN MENU 1 by pressing EZ repeatedly until you get to the Main menu PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR 7 EXIT 00 00 ENTER 2 Go to the Par Backup mode by selecting PAR BACKUP on the menu with keys LOC T PAR BACKUP 1 UPLOAD PANEL A and amp vw 2 and pressing S DOWNLOAD FULL SET DOWNLOAD APPLICATION DOWNLOAD USER 5
242. brake time parameter 137 DC current control parameter 136 DC current ref parameter 137 emergency devices 283 emergency select parameter 137 flux braking parameter 145 function 136 stress tests lesse Rp RII 307 supervision parameter 153 parameter low limit parameters 153 parameter selection parameters 153 supply cable checking 30 supply phase fault 262 switching 289 control 146 erating fone cuis eR eR mme 280 146 symmetrically grounded network see corner grounded TN system symmetrically grounded TN system 285 system controls parameter group 129 T temperature 280 template mounting 20 terminal lugs 288 terminals control description 28 control specifications 300 location diagram 1 4 25 location diagram 5 6 26 205 test date parameter 155 thermal fail 262 three wir
243. cal data parameter 110 ring MUGS es i i iea Ac hie one a 287 RS 232 baud rate parameter 183 parity 183 station id 183 RS 232 counts buffer overruns parameter 183 CRC errors 183 frame errors parameter 183 ok messages parameter 183 parity errors parameter 183 RS485 204 run enable source select parameter 129 run time data parameter 108 110 maintenance trigger 147 S safety uus sepe Rm Se a 5 save changes parameter 130 saving energy See energy saving scalar frequency mode 106 scaling actual value FBA ABB drives profile 255 actual value FBA generic profile 257 actual values EFB 211 reference EFB ABB drives profile 233 reference EFB DCU profile 233 reference FBA ABB drives profile 252 reference FBA generic profile 256 screw on terminal lugs 288 s curve ramp parameter 139 second environment C3 compliance with IEC EN 61800 3 312 C3 motor cable length 290 definitlon 311 sensor type 160 sensorless vect
244. cation is lost and either Drive is in local control mode the control panel displays LOC or Drive is in remote control mode REM and is parameterized to accept start stop direction or reference from the control panel To correct check Communication lines and connections Parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR Parameters in Group 10 START STOP DIR and Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT if drive operation is REM Diagnostics 268 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Alarm ar cod Display Description 2009 DEVICE Drive heatsink is hot This alarm warns that a DEVICE OVERTEMP fault OVERTEMP may be near R1 R4 100 C 212 F R5 R6 110 C 230 F Check for and correct Fan failure Obstructions in the air flow Dirt or dust coating on the heat sink Excessive ambient temperature Excessive motor load 2010 MOTOR TEMP Motor is hot based on either the drive s estimate or on temperature feedback This alarm warns that a MOT OVERTEMP fault trip may be near Check Checkfor overloaded motor Adjustthe parameters used for the estimate 3005 3009 e Check the temperature sensors and Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS 2011 RESERVED Not used 2012 MOTOR STALL Motor is operating in the stall region This alarm warns that a MOTOR STALL fault trip may be near 2013 AUTORESET This alarm warns that the drive is about to perform an automatic fault Note 1 reset which may start the mo
245. circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC 5 2 Not used 6 AGND Analog input circuit common D 7 AO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA D 8 AO2 Output current 0 20 mA t719 AGND Analog output circuit common 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 11 IGND Auxiliary voltage output common 12 DCOM Digital input common for all 113 011 Start Momentary activation with DI2 activated starts the drive 14 DI2 Stop Momentary deactivation stops the drive 15 DI3 Fwd Rev Activation reverses rotation direction 16 DI4 Constant speed selection 17 DI5 Constant speed selection 118 DI6 Not used 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A A Default operation Note 1 Code 21 RO1B Ready gt 19 connected to 21 0 open 1 connected 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable 23 RO2A Default operation DI4 015 Output 24 RO2B L Running gt 22 connected to 24 0 0 Reference through AT1 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable 0 const SPEED 7 1202 26 RO3A lt Default operation 0 7 _ CONST SPEED 2 1203 27 Fault 1 2225 connected to 27 1 1 CONST SPEED 1204 Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Analog reference 11 Analog output AO1 Speed J1 Start stop and direction DI1 2 3 gt Analog output AO2 Current 9 Al1 0 10 V Constant speed selection 014 5 Relay output 1 Ready 9 gt Al2 0 4 20 mA Relay output 2 Run
246. control more responsive to error value changes The longer the derivation time the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change f the derivation time is set to zero the controller works as a PI controller otherwise as a PID controller The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant A oes aoe ent 5 Controller output Ae Ko Tp Ts Kp Error value Gain 1 p F T Integration time gt 0 Kp e Tp Derivation time gt 0 t T Sample time period 2 ms gt Ae Error value change between two samples Parameters 142 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Description 2304 COMPENSATION Sets the derivation time for acceleration compensation Adding a derivative of the reference to the output of the speed controller compensates for inertia during acceleration 2303 DERIVATION TIME describes the principle of derivative action Rule of thumb Set this parameter between 50 and 100 of the sum of the mechanical time constants for the motor and the driven machine The figure shows the speed responses when a high inertia load is accelerated along a ramp No acceleration compensation Acceleration compensation A A Speed reference Actual speed t Note You use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN to automatically set acceleration
247. correct Excessive motor load Insufficient acceleration time parameters 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 and 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 Faulty motor motor cables or connections 2002 OVERVOLTAGE Overvoltage controller is active Check for and correct Static or transient overvoltages in the input power supply Insufficient deceleration time parameters 2203 DECELER TIME 1 and 2206 DECELER TIME 2 2003 UNDERVOLTAGE Undervoltage controller is active Check for and correct Undervoltage on mains 2004 DIR LOCK The change in direction being attempted is not allowed Either Do not attempt to change the direction of motor rotation or Change parameter 1003 DIRECTION to allow direction change if reverse operation is safe 2005 IO COMM Fieldbus communication has timed out Check for and correct Fault setup 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Communication settings Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE or Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL as appropriate Poor connections and or noise on line 2006 AI1 LOSS Analog input 1 is lost or value is less than the minimum setting Check nput source and connections Parameter that sets the minimum 3021 Parameter that sets the alarm fault operation 3001 2007 AI2 LOSS Analog input 2 is lost or value is less than the minimum setting Check Input source and connections Parameter that sets the minimum 3022 Parameter that sets the alarm fault operation 3001 2008 PANEL LOSS Panel communi
248. counter value is accumulated till it reaches 65535 after which the counter rolls over and starts again from 0 Cannot be reset 0142 REVOLUTION CNTR The motor s accumulated revolutions in millions of revolutions Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameters mode 0143 DRIVE ON TIME HI The drive s accumulated power on time in days Cannot be reset 0144 DRIVE ON TIME LO The drive s accumulated power on time in 2 second ticks 30 ticks 60 seconds Shown in format hh mm ss Cannot be reset 0145 MOTOR TEMP Motor temperature in degrees Celsius PTC resistance in ohms Applies only if motor temperature sensor is set up See parameter 3501 0146 MECH ANGLE Defines the motor shaft s angular position to about 0 01 32 768 divisions for 360 The position is defined as 0 at power up During operation the zero position can be set by Z pulse input if parameter 5010 Z PLS ENABLE 1 ENABLE parameter 5011 POSITION RESET if parameter 5010 z PLS ENABLE 2 DISABLE any status change of parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE 0147 MECH REVS signed integer that counts full revolutions of the motor shaft The value increments when parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE changes from 32767 to 0 decrements when parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE changes from 0 to 32767 0148 Z PLS DETECTED Encoder zero pulse detector When a Z pu
249. creases the pressure at the output end of the pipe drops relative to the pressure measured at the input end As auxiliary motors step in to increase the flow the adjustments below correct the reference to more closely match the output pressure When the first auxiliary pump operates increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 When two auxiliary pumps operate increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 parameter 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 When three auxiliary pumps operate increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 parameter 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 parameter 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3 Parameters 190 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Description 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference Applies only when at least two auxiliary constant speed motors are running See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3 Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference Applies only when at least three auxiliary constant speed motors are running See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 8109 START FREQ 1 Sets the frequency limit used to start the first auxiliary motor The first auxiliary motor starts if No auxiliary motors are running f Hz ACS550 output frequency exceeds the limit Fg 8109 1 Hz A Pany Output frequency stays above a relaxed limit fmaxt 8109
250. d 1 Bit 0305 FAULT WORD 1 0306 FAULT WORD 2 0307 FAULT WORD e When a fault is active the 0 OVERCURRENT Obsolete EFB 1 corresponding bit for the active fault is set in the Fault Words 1 IDC OVERVOLT THERM FAIL EFB 2 Each fault has a dedicated bit 2 OVERTEMP OPEX LINK EFB 3 allocated within Fault Words See section Fault listing on page 260 3 SHORT CIRC OPEX PWR INCOMPATIBLE SW for a description of the faults 4 Reserved CURR MEAS USER LOAD CURVE e The control panel displays the word in 5 5c UNDERVOLT SUPPLY PHASE Reserved hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit 0 displays as 0001 All zeros and a 6 Al1LOSS ENCODER ERR Reserved 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000 7 AIl2LOSS OVERSPEED Reserved 0306 FAULT WORD 2 8 MOTOVERTEMP Reserved Reserved Read only copy of the Fault Word 2 9 PANELLOSS DRIVE ID Reserved See parameter 0305 0307 IFAULT WORD 3 10 ID RUN FAIL CONFIG FILE System error Read only copy of the Fault Word 3 11 STALL SERIAL 1 ERR System error See parameter 0305 12 CB OVERTEMP EFB CON FILE System error 13 JEXT FAULT 1 FORCE TRIP System error 14 EXT FAULT 2 MOTOR PHASE System error 15 EARTH FAULT OUTP WIRING Param setting fault 0308 ALARM WORD 1 e When an alarm is active the Bit 0308 ALARM WORD 1 0309 ALARM WORD 2 corresponding bit for the active alarm is set in the Alarm Words 0 JOVERCURRENT Reserved Each alarm has a dedicated bit 1 OVERVOLTAGE PID SLEEP a
251. d and the display goes to the Output mode Start up control with I O and ID Run ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 43 j i CHOICE After completing a set up task the Start up Assistant suggests the bo ou Rt Em next one conti nue with gt Press X when 59019 is highlighted to continue with the lid suggested task 5 00 00 oK Press key to highlight and then press E wl to move to the following task without doing the suggested task EXIT Press Cz to stop the Start up Assistant SAVING A USER PARAMETER SET AND FINAL CHECK The start up is now completed However it might be useful at this stage to set the parameters required by your application and save the settings as a user parameter set as instructed in section User parameter sets on page 88 After the whole set up is completed check there are no faults or alarms shown on the display and the panel LED is green and does not blink The drive is now ready for use Start up control with I O and ID Run 44 How to control the drive through the I O interface ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual The table below instructs how to operate the drive through the digital and analog inputs when the motor start up is performed and the default standard parameter settings are valid Displays of the Basic Control Panel are shown as an example PRELIMINARY SETTINGS
252. d parameter bits parameters 0305 to 0309 See Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS on page 112 for the bit definitions The form of the display depends on the severity of the error You can specify the severity for many errors by directing the drive to ignore the error situation report the situation as an alarm report the situation as a fault Faults The drive signals that it has detected a severe error or fault by enabling the red LED on the drive LED is either steady on or blinking showing the steady red status LED on the control panel if attached to the drive setting an appropriate bit in a Fault Word parameter 0305 to 0307 overriding the control panel display with the display LOC FAULT of a fault code in the Fault mode figures on the FAULT 7 ight right AI1 LOSS stopping the motor if it was on 00 00 The fault code on the control panel display is LOC temporary Pressing any of the following keys removes 0 0 0 7 the fault message MENU ENTER UP DOWN key FWD Diagnostics 260 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual The message reappears after a few seconds if the control panel is not touched and the fault is still active Flashing green Alarms For less severe errors called alarms the diagnostic display is advisory For these situations the drive is simply reporting that it had detected something unusual In these situations the driv
253. d regulated motor P8119 7 3PFC Switches off the contactor of the speed regulated motor 3PFC Increments the starting order counter to change the starting order for the motors 2PFC T Identifies the next motor in line to be the speed regulated motor 1PFC f Switches off the above motor s contactor if the motor was running Any other running motors are not interrupted Switches on the contactor of the new speed regulated motor The autochange switchgear connects this motor to gt 4 8122 m P8118 gt P8118 B the ACS550 power output A Area above 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Delays motor start for the time 8122 PFC START DELAY autochange not allowed Starts the speed regulated motor B Autochange occurs Identifies the next constant speed motor in the rotation 1PFC etc PID output associated with each motor Switches the above motor on but only if the new speed regulated motor had been running as a constant speed motor This step keeps an equal number of motors running before and after autochange Continues with normal PFC operation Starting order counter Output The operation of the starting order counter frequency No aux 1 2aux The relay output parameter definitions 1401 1403 and motors motor motors 1410 1412 establish the initial motor sequence The lowest parameter number with a value 31 PFC identifies the relay connected
254. d stops the drive For thermistors or PTC connected to a digital input 0 de activated 1 activated Parameters 162 Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS This group defines the timed functions The timed functions include four daily start and stop times ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual four weekly start stop and boost times four timers for collecting selected periods together A timer can be connected to multiple time periods and a time period can be in multiple timers Time Period 1 3602 START TIME 1 3603 STOP TIME 1 3604 START DAY 1 3605 STOP DAY 1 Time Period 2 3606 START TIME 2 3607 STOP TIME 2 3608 START DAY 2 3609 sTOP DAY 2 Time Period 3 3610 START TIME 3 3611 STOP TIME 3 3612 START DAY 3 3613 sTOP DAY 3 Time Period 4 3614 START TIME 4 3615 STOP TIME 4 3616 START DAY 4 3617 STOP DAY 4 Booster 3622 BOOSTER SEL 3623 BOOSTER TIME Timer 1 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC Timer 2 3627 TIMED FUNC 2 SRC Timer 3 3628 TIMED FUNC 3 SRC Timer 4 3629 TIMED FUNC 4 SRC A parameter can be connected to only one timer Timer 1 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC Timer 2 3627 TIMED FUNC 2 SRC gt lt 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 1412 RELAY OUTPUT 6 Available if OREL 01 is installed
255. de REM i ME To browse the signals forward press key repeatedly To browse OUTPUT FWD them backward press key CY 7 repeatedly 0 D A REM OUTPUT FWD 107 n OUTPUT FWD Control panels 72 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Reference mode In the Reference mode you can set the speed frequency or torque reference start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to set the speed frequency or torque reference Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing X if you are the Output mode otherwise by pressing 77 repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom REM PA P MENU WD 2 If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the left switch to local LOC control by pressing 0 The display briefly shows LoC before switching PA P to local control MENU WD Note With Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT you can allow the reference modification in remote control REM 3 If the panel is not in the Reference mode rEF not visible press key LOC A or SY 2 until you see and then press X Now the display E F shows the current reference value with under the value MENU LOC 49 1 4 increase the reference value press LOC D O decrease the reference value press amp w P The value changes immediately when you press the key It is stored the FWD d
256. de you can use assistants to guide you through the specification of a set of basic parameters start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to use an assistant The table below shows the basic operation sequence which leads you through assistants The Motor Set up Assistant is used as an example To ask for information on the requested parameter press key Scroll the EXIT help text with keys A and S w 7 Close the help by pressing CZ Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing m if you are in the Output mode otherwise LOC 0 MAIN MENU 1 by pressing repeatedly until you get to the Main menu PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER 2 Go to the Assistants mode by selecting ASSISTANTS on the menu with keys aus WESSEL 1 art up assistan and amp w 2 and pressing wil Motor Set up Application Speed control 1 Speed control 2 EXIT 00 00 SEL 3 Select the assistant with keys A and S w 2 and press Ew LOC PAR EDIT If you select any other assistant than the Start up Assistant it guides you 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT through the task of specification of its parameter set as shown in steps 4 and 5 below After that you can select another assistant on the Assistants menu or exit the Assistants mode The Motor Set up Assistant is used here as an example EXIT 00 00 SAVE If you selec
257. dentification magnetization when the drive is started for the first time and after any motor parameter Group 99 START UP DATA is changed This is valid when parameter 9910 ID RUN has value 0 OFF IDMAGN and parameter 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ or parameter 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ and parameter 2101 3 SCALAR FLYST or 5 FLY BOOST In most applications there is no need to perform a separate ID Run 9970 ID RUN 1 ON The ID Run should be selected if vector control mode is used parameter 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ and or the operation point is near zero speed and or operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback is required Note If motor parameters Group 99 START UP DATA are changed after the ID Run it must be repeated ID Run procedure The general parameter setting procedure is not repeated here For Assistant Control Panel see page 55 and for Basic Control Panel page 73 in chapter Control panels AN PRE CHECK WARNING The motor will run at up to approximately 50 80 of the nominal speed during the ID Run The motor will rotate in the forward direction Ensure that it is safe to run the motor before performing the ID Run De couple the motor from the driven equipment Check that the values of the motor data param
258. dge of the digital input The User Parameter Set changes only when the drive is stopped 2 6 012 016 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets See DI1 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets The drive loads User Parameter Set 1 on the rising edge of the digital input The drive loads User Parameter Set 2 on the falling edge of the digital input The User Parameter Set changes only when the drive is stopped 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets See DI1 INV above 1606 LOCAL LOCK Defines control for the use of the LOC mode The LOC mode allows drive control from the control panel When LOCAL LOCK is active the control panel cannot change to LOC mode 0 NOT SEL Disables the lock The control panel can select LOC and control the drive 1 011 Defines digital input 011 as the control for setting the local lock Activating the digital input locks out local control De activating the digital input enable the LOC selection 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for setting the local lock See DI1 above 7 ON Sets the lock The control panel cannot select LOC and cannot control the drive 8 coMM Defines bit 14 of the Command Word 1 as the control for setting the local lock The
259. e Code Description 9802 COMM PROT SEL Selects the communication protocol 0 NOT SEL No communication protocol selected 1 STD MODBUS The drive communicates with Modbus via the RS485 channel X1 communications terminal See also Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL 4 EXT The drive communicates via a fieldbus adapter module in option slot 2 of the drive See also Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE Parameters 202 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 203 Embedded fieldbus Overview The ACS550 can be set up to accept control from an external system using standard serial communication protocols When using serial communication the ACS550 can either receive all of its control information from the fieldbus or be controlled from some combination of fieldbus control and other available control locations such as digital or analog inputs and the control panel Fieldbus controller Fieldbus m Other devices Connect using either Standard embedded fieldbus EFB at terminals X1 28 32 fieldbus adapter module mounted in slot 2 option Rxxx m Two basic serial communications configurations are available embedded fieldbus EFB Using the RS485 interface at terminals
260. e flashes the green LED on the drive does not apply to alarms that arise from control panel operation errors flashes the green LED on the control panel if attached to the drive sets an appropriate bit in an Alarm Word parameter 0308 or 0309 See Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS on page 112 for the bit definitions overrides the control panel display with the display of an alarm code and or name in the Fault mode figures on the right Alarm messages disappear from the control panel display after a few seconds The message returns periodically as long as the alarm condition exists Correcting faults The recommended corrective action for faults is LOC W ALARM PANEL LOSS ALARM 2008 00 00 A2008 FWD Use the table in section Fault listing below to find and address the root cause of the problem Reset the drive See section Fault resetting on page 265 Fault listing The following table lists the faults by code number and describes each The fault name is the long form shown in the Fault mode of the Assistant Control Panel when the fault occurs The fault names shown for Assistant Control Panel only in the Fault Logger mode see page 67 and the fault names for parameter 0401 LAST FAULT may be shorter Fault Fault name in code panel Description and recommended corrective action Excessive motor load 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 1 OVERCURRENT Output
261. e Bit 6 1 Indicates the features not in ABB DRV LIM OPERATING SW Bit8 1 This state transition also occurs if the fault is reset from any other source e g digital input Embedded fieldbus ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Reference scaling 233 Fieldbus references REF1 and REF2 are scaled as shown in the following tables Fieldbus scaling for ABB Drives profile Reference Reference Range type Scaling Remarks REF1 32767 Speed 20000 1105 Final reference limited by i frequency 0 0 1104 1105 Actual motor 32767 20000 par 1105 speed limited by 2001 2002 20000 corresponds to 100 speed or 2007 2008 frequency REF2 32767 Speed or 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by he frequency 0 0 1107 1108 Actual motor 32767 10000 par 1108 speed limited by 2001 2002 10000 corresponds to 100 speed or 2007 2008 frequency Torque 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by 2015 2017 torque1 or 2016 10000 par 1108 2018 torque2 10000 corresponds to 10096 PID 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by Reference 0 0 4012 4013 PID set1 or 10000 par 1108 10000 corresponds to 10096 4112 4113 PID set2 Note The setting of parameter 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN has no effect on the scaling of references Fieldbus scaling for DCU profile Reference Reference
262. e Not allowed 1 011 012 Free DI3 Speed Reg Motor DI4 First PFC Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI1 DI2 Free DI3 First PFC Relay DI4 DI6 Free 2 011 012 Free 3 Speed Reg Motor DI4 First PFC Relay 5 Second PFC Relay 6 Free DI1 DI2 Free DI3 First PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay DI5 DI6 Free 1 DI2 Free DI3 Speed Reg Motor 4 First PFC Relay 5 Second Relay 6 Third PFC Relay DI1 DI2 Free DI3 First PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay DI5 Third PFC Relay DI6 Free 4 Not allowed 011 012 Free DI3 First PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay DI5 Third PFC Relay DI6 Fourth PFC Relay 5 6 Not allowed Not allowed 4 DI4 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with DI4 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on the number of relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFC the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 0 and otherwise enabled No PFC Autochange disabled Autochange enabled relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 DI3 Free Not allowed 014 Speed Reg Motor DI5 DI6 Free 1 DI1 DI3 Free 011 013 Free 014 Speed Reg Motor 014 First PFC Relay 015 First PFC Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI6 Free 2 011 013 Free 011 013 Free 0
263. e content of the STATUS WORD depends on the protocol profile used See the user s manual provided with the FBA module and or section ABB Drives profile technical data on page 248 Reference The contents of each REFERENCE word can be used as speed or frequency reference isa 16 bit word comprised of a sign bit and a 15 bit integer Negative references indicating reversed rotation direction are indicated by the two s complement of the corresponding positive reference value The use of a second reference REF2 is supported only when a protocol is configured for the ABB Drives profile Reference scaling is fieldbus type specific See the user s manual provided with the FBA module and or the following sections as appropriate Reference scaling on page 252 ABB Drives profile technical data Reference scaling on page 256 Generic profile technical data Actual Values Planning Actual Values are 16 bit words containing information on selected operations of the drive Drive Actual Values for example Group 10 START STOP DIR parameters can be mapped to Input Words using Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE parameters protocol dependent but typically parameters 5104 5126 Network planning should address the following questions What types and quantities of devices must be connected to the network What control information must be sent down to the drives What feedback information must be sent from the drives to the cont
264. e maximum value for ACT2 See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 4022 SLEEP SELECTION Defines the control for the PID sleep function 0 NOT SEL Disables the PID sleep control function 1 D11 Defines digital input 011 as the control for the PID sleep function Activating the digital input activates the sleep function De activating the digital input restores PID control 2 6 012 016 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for the PID sleep function See DI1 above 7 INTERNAL Defines the output rpm frequency process reference and process actual value as the control for the PID sleep function Refer to parameters 4025 WAKE UP DEV and 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for the PID sleep function De activating the digital input activates the sleep function Activating the digital input restores PID control 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for the PID sleep function See DI1 INV above Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 175 Code Description 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL Sets the motor speed frequency that enables the PID sleep function a motor speed frequency below this level for at least the time period 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY enables the PID sleep function stopping the drive Requires 4022 7 INTERNAL e See the figure A PID output level B
265. e motor auxiliary Index 314 B backing up parameters Assistant Control Panel 64 Basic Control Panel 75 Basic Control Panel see control panel Basic battery Assistant Control Panel 275 baud rate RS 232 parameter 183 braking components 295 protection from overheated resistor 298 resistor heat dissipation 298 selecting brake choppers resistors 295 WILD oreet ie aie RYE 298 break point frequency fault parameter 149 buffer overruns count parameter 183 cable requirements control e Rates 299 groundihg or eR 285 input 284 MOTOT die a ce ux 292 capacitor 2 22 5 pig adieu 275 replacement 275 category IEC EN 61800 3 definition 2 Ai 311 o 311 CB see control board CE markihg 25 tede ta ee ae 309 changed parameters Assistant Control Panel 60 chopper see braking clock see time and date setting Assistant Control Panel CO2 conversion factor See energy saving communication see EFB embedded fieldbus see EFB drive parameters see FBA fieldbus adapter see FBA drive parameters compatibility 13 conduit Kit
266. e of 100 ref 100 9 defines 100 Scaled Value 10 0 1 1500 rpm 10 0 1 1500 RPM 100 15 rpm 100 0 1 500 Hz 100 0 1 500 Hz 100 50 Hz 1 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9908 MOT NOM SPEED as the 10096 reference and that 9908 1500 rpm 2 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9907 MOT NOM FREQ as the 10096 reference and that 9907 500 Hz Actual Value mapping See the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Fieldbus adapter 258 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Fieldbus adapter ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 259 Diagnostics WARNING Do not attempt any measurement parts replacement or other service procedure not described in this manual Such action will void the warranty may endanger correct operation and increase downtime and expense WARNING All electrical installation and maintenance work described in this chapter should only be undertaken by qualified service personnel The safety instructions in chapter Safety instructions on page 5 must be followed Diagnostic displays Red The drive detects error situations and reports them using the green and red LED on the body of the drive the status LED on the control panel if an Assistant Control Panel is attached to the drive the control panel display if a control panel is attached to the drive the Fault Word and Alarm Wor
267. e of parameter 0178 SAVED 2 reduction on carbon dioxide emissions in tn 4508 PUMP POWER Pump power as a percentage of the nominal motor power when connected directly to supply DOL Used for reference when energy savings are calculated See parameters 0174 SAVED KWH 0175 SAVED MWH 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 and 0178 SAVED 2 It is possible to use this parameter as the reference power also for other applications than pumps The reference power can also be some other constant power than a motor connected directly online 4509 ENERGY RESET Resets energy calculators 0174 SAVED KWH 0175 SAVED MWH 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 and 0178 SAVED 2 Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 181 Group 50 ENCODER This group defines the setup for encoder use Sets the number of encoder pulses per shaft revolution Enables the encoder operation Defines how mechanical angle and revolution data is reset See also User s Manual for Pulse Encoder Interface Module OTAC 01 3AUA0000001938 English Code Description 5001 PULSE NR Sets the number of pulses provided by an optional encoder for each full motor shaft revolution ppr 5002 ENCODER ENABLE Enables disables an optional encoder 0 DISABLE Drive uses speed feedback derived from the internal motor model applies for any setting of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 ENABLE Dri
268. e panel and verifying that the red LED is not lit and the green LED is lit but not blinking Assistant Control Panel Check that there are no faults or alarms shown on the display and that the panel LED is green and does not blink ION TIMES 41 LOC 2001 PAR FWD LOC 2002 PAR FWD LOC 2202 PAR FWD LOC 2203 PAR FWD CHECK LOC 9902 PAR FWD The drive is now ready for use Start up control with I O and ID Run 42 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual How to perform the guided start up To be able to perform the guided start up you need the Assistant Control Panel Before you start ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand SAFETY the start up procedure The start up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician The safety instructions given in chapter Safety instructions must be followed during The drive will start up automatically at power up if the external run command is on Check the installation See the checklist in chapter nstallation page 35 Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger De couple the driven machine if there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation or an ID Run needs to be performed during the drive start up ID Run is essential only in applications that require the ultimate in motor control accuracy POWER UP
269. e right of each step are references to the detailed information needed for the correct installation of the drive Task See PREPARE for installation Preparing for installation on page 16 v PREPARE the mounting location Prepare the mounting location on page 20 v REMOVE the front cover Remove the front cover on page 21 v MOUNT the drive Mount the drive on page 22 v INSTALL wiring Wiring overview on page 23 and Check the insulation of the assembly on page 30 v CHECK installation Check installation on page 35 v REINSTALL the cover Reinstall the cover on page 36 v START UP How to start up the drive on page 37 Installation 16 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Preparing for installation Lifting the drive Lift the drive only by the metal chassis Unpacking the drive 1 Unpack the drive 2 Check for any damage and notify the shipper immediately if damaged components are found 1P2040 3 Check the contents against the order and the shipping label to verify that all parts have been received Drive identification Drive labels To determine the type of drive you are installing refer to either serial number label attached on upper part of the choke plate between the mounting holes or ACS550 01 08A8 4 g Type designation we aes 2 2 6 8 6 9 A PN Phd 40 30 kW 65006704 Serial number type designation label attached on the heat sink o
270. e sensor transmitter connection example 86 time and date setting Assistant Control Panel 62 323 timed functions parameter 162 autochange parameter 200 booster 164 enable parameter 163 source parameter 164 speed 122 start time parameter 163 stop time parameter 163 timed mode 122 TN S adaa ea a i 285 tOOlS ix enean eatin et 18 top cover see hood torque at fault history parameter 114 boost current parameter 137 data 108 max limit select parameter 134 max limit 135 min limit select parameter 134 min limit 134 ramp down 143 ramp up 143 torque control parameter 143 ITlaerO sh ava ds 85 ramp down parameter 143 ramp up 143 vector torque mode 106 training iue ee dE 325 trim mode PID 178 scale PID
271. e supply is 100 providing that the input power cable of the drive is protected with IEC 629 appropriate fuses US 100 000 AIC Frequency 48 63 Hz Imbalance Max 3 of nominal phase to phase input voltage Fundamental power factor cos phi4 0 98 at nominal load Cable temperature rating 90 194 F rating minimum Disconnecting device for isolation Install a hand operated input disconnecting device disconnecting means between the AC power source and the drive The disconnecting device must be of a type that can be locked to the open position for installation and maintenance work Europe To meet the European Union Directives according to standard EN 60204 1 Safety of Machinery the disconnecting device must be one of the following types a switch disconnector of utilization category AC 23B EN 60947 3 a disconnector having an auxiliary contact that in all cases causes switching devices to break the load circuit before the opening of the main contacts of the disconnector EN 60947 3 acircuit breaker suitable for isolation in accordance with EN 60947 2 Other regions The disconnecting device must conform to the applicable safety regulations Fuses Branch circuit protection must be provided by the end user and sized per national and local electric codes The following tables provide fuse recommendations for short circuit protection on the drive s input power
272. e the direction of rotation and adjust the speed of the motor through the I O interface perform an Identification Run for the drive Using the control panel to do these tasks is explained briefly in this chapter For details on how to use the control panel refer to chapter Control panels starting on page 47 How to start up the drive How you start up the drive depends on the control panel you have If you have an Assistant Control Panel you can either run the Start up Assistant see section How to perform the guided start up on page 42 or perform a limited start up see section How fo perform the limited start up on page 37 The Start up Assistant which is included in the Assistant Control Panel only guides you through all essential settings to be done In the limited start up the drive gives no guidance you go through the very basic settings by following the instructions given in the manual f you have a Basic Control Panel follow the instructions given in section How to perform the limited start up on page 37 How to perform the limited start up For the limited start up you can use the Basic Control Panel or the Assistant Control Panel The instructions below are valid for both control panels but the displays shown are the Basic Control Panel displays unless the instruction applies to the Assistant Control Panel only Before you start ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand A A
273. e value of 1604 FAULT RESET SEL the following could also be used to reset the drive digital input serial communication When the fault has been corrected the motor can be started History No For reference the last three fault codes are stored into parameters 0401 0412 0413 For the most recent fault identified by parameter 0401 the drive stores additional data in parameters 0402 0411 to aid in troubleshooting a problem For example parameter 0404 stores the motor speed at the time of the fault The Assistant Control Panel provides additional information about the fault history See section Fault Logger mode on page 67 for more information To clear the fault history all of the Group 04 FAULT HISTORY parameters Using the control panel in the Parameters mode select parameter 0401 Press EDIT or ENTER on the Basic Control Panel Press UP and DOWN at the same time Press SAVE Correcting alarms The recommended corrective action for alarms is Determine if the alarm requires any corrective action action is not always required Use the table in section Alarm listing below to find and address the root cause of the problem Diagnostics ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Alarm listing 267 The following table lists the alarms by code number and describes each n Display Description 2001 OVERCURRENT Current limiting controller is active Check for and
274. ed temperature value based on a motor thermal model see parameters 3005 MOT THERM PROT 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ or an actual temperature indication given by motor temperature sensors see Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS The user can tune the thermal model further by feeding in additional motor and load data Technical data 292 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual The most common temperature sensors are motor sizes IEC180 225 thermal switch e g Klixon motor sizes IEC200 250 and larger PTC or PT100 Ground fault protection 5550 internal fault logic detects ground faults in the drive motor or motor cable This fault logic is NOT a personal safety or fire protection feature can be disabled using parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT Note Disabling earth fault ground fault may void the warranty could be tripped by leakage currents input power to ground associated with long high capacitance motor cables Grounding and routing Motor cable shielding Motor cables require shielding using conduit armored cable or shielded cable Conduit When using conduit Bridge joints with a ground conductor bonded to the conduit on each side of the joint Bond conduit run to the drive enclosure Use a separate conduit run for motor cables also separate input power and control cables Use a separate conduit run for each drive Armored cable When using armored cable Use six conductor 3 phases and
275. ee MAX Linear Sets the acceleration time for zero to maximum frequency for ramp pair 1 See A in FREQ the figure Actual acceleration time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 See 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 2203 DECELER TIME 1 B 0 Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp pair 1 T Actual deceleration time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 See 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ MAX S curve 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 FREQ Selects the shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp for ramp pair 1 See B in the figure Shape is defined as a ramp unless additional time is specified here to reach the maximum frequency A longer time provides a softer transition at each end of the slope The shape becomes an s curve Rule of thumb 1 5 is a suitable relation between the ramp shape time and the acceleration ramp time A 0 0 LINEAR Specifies linear acceleration deceleration ramps for ramp pair 1 0 1 1000 0 S CURVE Specifies s curve acceleration deceleration ramps for 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 ram 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 1 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 Sets the acceleration time for zero to maximum frequency for ramp pair 2 See 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 Used also as jogging acceleration time See 1004 JOGGING SEL 2206 DECELER TIME 2 Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp pair 2 See 2203 DECELER TIME 1 Used also as jogging deceleration
276. eference 13 DIBU 6D NC Same as DI3U 4D NC above except Uses digital inputs DI5 and DI6 14 AI1 AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 15 Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 16 AI1 AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 17 AI1 AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 19 INTERNAL A constant value set using parameter 4011 provides reference 20 PID20UT Defines PID controller 2 output parameter 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT as the reference source Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 173 Code Description Analog input reference correction Parameter values 9 10 and 14 17 use the formula in the following table Value setting Calculation of the Al reference C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value 50 of reference value B value C B C value 50 of reference value B value Where C Main reference value 120 COMM for values 9 10 and Al1 for values 14
277. egisters any user defined analog inputs The following table summarizes the input registers Modbus ACS550 Remarks reference all profiles 30001 Alt This register shall report the level of Analog Input 1 0 100 30002 AI2 This register shall report the level of Analog Input 2 0 100 The ACS550 supports the following Modbus function codes for 3xxxx registers Function code Description 04 Read 3xxxx input status 4xxxx Register mapping The drive maps its parameters and other data to the 4xxxx holding registers as follows 40001 40099 map to drive control and actual values These registers are described in the table below 40101 49999 map to drive parameters 0101 9999 Register addresses that do not correspond to drive parameters are invalid If there is an attempt to read or write outside the parameter addresses the Modbus interface returns an exception code to the controller Embedded fieldbus 220 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual The following table summarizes the 4xxxx drive control registers 40001 40099 for 4xxxx registers above 40099 see the drive parameter list e g 40102 is parameter 0102 Modbus register Access Remarks 40001 CONTROL WORD R W Maps directly to the profile S CONTROL WORD Supported only if 5305 0 or 2 ABB Drives profile Parameter 5319 holds a copy in hex format If 5305
278. eld into a bundle pig tail 8 Route control cable s through clamp s and tighten clamp s 9 Connect the ground shield bundle pig tail for digital and analog I O cables at X1 1 Ground only at the drive end 10 Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals See section Control terminals table on page 28 Use a tightening torque of 0 4 N m 0 3 Ib ft 5005 Installation 34 Wiring 1 54 UL type 12 enclosure with conduit 1 on Remove and discard the cable seals where conduit will be installed The cable seals are cone shaped rubber seals on the bottom of the drive For each conduit run install water tight conduit connectors not supplied Route the power wiring through the conduit Route the motor wiring through the conduit Strip the wires Connect the power motor and ground wires to the drive terminals See the table on the right for tightening torques ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 5016 1P5007 Note For R6 frame size refer to section Power terminal considerations R6 frame size on page 287 7 Route the control cable through the conduit 8 Strip the control cable sheathing and twist the 10 copper shield into a bundle pig tail Frame Tightening torque size N m lb ft
279. eldbus 1 More than 3 relays requires the addition of a relay extension module Note Relay status feedback occurs without configuration as defined below Modbus protocol Drive parameter Description reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 0122 RO 1 3 STATUS Relay 1 3 status 40122 0123 RO 4 6 STATUS Relay 4 6 status 40123 Analog output control Using the fieldbus for analog output control e g PID setpoint requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied analog value s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus protocol Drive parameter Value Description reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 135 COMM VALUE 1 Analog Output 1 controlled by writing to 0135 COMM VALUE 1 parameter 0135 40135 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 136 COMM VALUE 2 Analog Output 2 0136 2 controlled by writing to 40136 parameter 0136 Embedded fieldbus 210 PID control setpoint source ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Using the following settings to select the fieldbus as the setpoint source for PID loops Modbus protocol Drive parameter Value Description reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 4010 SET POINT SEL 8 COMM VALUE 1 Setpoint is input reference 2 40003 Set 1
280. environmentally compatible and recyclable metal parts can be recycled The plastic parts can either be recycled or burned under controlled circumstances according to local regulations Most recyclable parts are marked with recycling marks If recycling is not feasible all parts excluding electrolytic capacitors and printed circuit boards can be landfilled The DC capacitors contain electrolyte and if the drive is not provided with the RoHS marking the printed circuit boards contain lead both of which are classified as hazardous waste within the EU They must be removed and handled according to local regulations For further information on environmental aspects and more detailed recycling instructions contact your local ABB representative Technical data ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Applicable standards 309 Drive compliance with the following standards is identified by the standard marks on the type designation label The following standards are applicable to the drive Mark Applicable standards 50178 1997 Electronic equipment for use in power installations IEC EN 60204 1 2005 Safety of machinery Electrical equipment of machines Part 1 General requirements Provisions for compliance The final assembler of the machine is responsible for installing anemergency stop device asupply disconnecting device IEC EN 60529 1989 A1 1999 A2 2013 Degrees of protection
281. eons 263 mounting 25 222 eem i ee 22 mounting dimensions 303 outside dimensions 304 rating 155 temperature data parameter 108 Welght PORE DAR 306 drive on time data parameters 110 E EAC 0 311 Index 316 earth fault detection 151 fault code 262 150 earthing see ground EFB embedded fieldbus 203 actual value scaling 211 actual 211 analog output control activate 209 comm fault response 210 206 configure for loss of communication 213 control interface 203 control word 224 diagnostics 212 drive control of functions activate 207 exception codes 223 fault code 28 214 fault code 31 214 fault code 32 ee 214 fault code 33 214 fault tracing parameters 212 fault duplicate stations 213 fault intermittent 214 fault no master station on line 213 fault swapped
282. er 6404 70 80 distribution Parameters 188 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Description 6432 AL2RANGE80TO90 Amplitude logger 2 signal selection with parameter 6404 80 90 distribution 6433 ALZRANGE90TO Amplitude logger 2 signal selection with parameter 6404 over 90 distribution Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 189 Group 81 PFC CONTROL This group defines a Pump Fan Control PFC mode of operation The major features of PFC control are The ACS550 controls the motor of pump no 1 varying the motor speed to control the pump capacity This motor is the speed regulated motor Direct line connections power the motor of pump no 2 and pump no 3 etc The ACS550 switches pump no 2 and then pump no 3 etc on and off as needed These motors are auxiliary motors The ACS550 PID control uses two signals a process reference and an actual value feedback The PID controller adjusts the speed frequency of the first pump such that the actual value follows the process reference When demand defined by the process reference exceeds the first motor s capacity user defined as a frequency limit the PFC control automatically starts an auxiliary pump The PFC also reduces the speed of the first pump to account for the auxiliary pump s addition to total output Then as before the PID controller adjusts the speed frequency of the first pump such that the actual value follo
283. er interface words are not restricted by the ACS550 However the profile used may set particular meanings Fieldbus controller Fieldbus Control Word CW p References A Process I O cyclic Status Word SW Actual Values 7 Service H Messages Parameter R W Requests Responses lt Acyclic A Control Word The CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The fieldbus controller sends the CONTROL WORD to the drive The drive switches between states according to the bit coded instructions in the CONTROL WORD Using the CONTROL WORD requires that The drive is in remote REM control The serial communication channel is defined as the source for controlling commands from EXT1 set using parameters 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS and 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL The external plug in fieldbus adapter is activated Fieldbus adapter ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 239 Parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL 4 EXT FBA The external plug in fieldbus adapter is configured to use the drive profile mode or drive profile objects The content of the CONTROL WORD depends on the protocol profile used See the user s manual provided with the FBA module and or section ABB Drives profile technical data on page 248 Status Word The STATUS WORD is a 16 bit word containing status information sent by the drive to the fieldbus controller Th
284. er s Manual Group 42 EXT TRIM PID This group defines the parameters used for the second PID controller PID2 which is used for the External Trimming PID The operation of parameters 4201 4221 is analogous with Process PID set 1 PID1 parameters 4001 4021 Code Description 4201 See 4001 4021 4221 4228 ACTIVATE Defines the source for enabling the external PID function Requires 4230 TRIM MODE 0 NOT SEL 0 SEL Disables external PID control 1 011 Defines digital input 011 as the control for enabling external PID control Activating the digital input enables external PID control De activating the digital input disables external PID control 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for enabling external PID control See DI1 above 7 DRIVE RUN Defines the start command as the control for enabling external PID control Activating the start command drive is running enables external PID control 8 ON Defines the power on as the control for enabling external PID control Activating power to the drive enables external PID control 9 12 TIMED FUNC 1 4 Defines the Timed function as the control for enabling external PID control Timed function active enables external PID control See Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for enabling external PID control Activating the digital input disables external
285. er supplied command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus protocol reference Drive parameter Value Description ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 10 COMM Start Stop by fieldbus 40001 bits 0 3 40031 bits 0 1 with Ext1 selected 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 10 Start Stop by fieldbus 40001 bits 0 3 40031 bits 0 1 with Ext2 selected 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Direction by fieldbus 4002 4003 40031 bit 3 1 For Modbus the protocol reference can depend on the profile used hence two columns in these tables One column refers to the ABB Drives profile selected when parameter 5305 0 ABB DRV LIM or 5305 2 ABB DRV FULL The other column refers to the DCU profile selected when parameter 5305 1 DCU PROFILE See section ABB control profiles technical data on page 224 2 The reference provides direction control a negative reference provides reverse rotation Embedded fieldbus 208 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Input reference select Using the fieldbus to provide input references to the drive requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied reference word s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus protocol Drive parameter Value Description reference
286. erent control panel types Basic Control Panel This panel described in section Basic Control Panel on page 68 provides basic tools for manual entry of parameter values Assistant Control Panel This panel described below includes pre programmed assistants to automate the most common parameter setups The panel provides language support It is available with different language sets Compatibility The manual is compatible with the following panel versions Basic Control Panel ACS CP C Rev M or later Assistant Control Panel Area 1 ACS CP A Rev F or later new panel series manufactured since 2007 with serial number XYYWWRXXXX where year 07 or greater and revision R F G E Assistant Control Panel Asia ACS CP D Rev Q or later See page 51 for how to find out the version of your Assistant Control Panel See parameter 9901 LANGUAGE to see the languages supported by the different Assistant Control Panels Control panels 48 Assistant Control Panel Features ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual The Assistant Control Panel features alphanumeric control panel with an LCD display language selection for the display Start up Assistant to ease drive commissioning copy function parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system context sensitive help real time clock Overview The following table summari
287. ero Speed Delay With Zero Speed Delay Speed Speed Speed controller switched off Motor coasts to stop Speed controller remains live Motor is decelerated to true 0 speed lt gt Delay Zero speed delay can be used e g with jogging function or mechanical brake No Zero Speed Delay The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp When the motor actual speed falls below an internal limit called Zero Speed the speed controller is switched off The drive modulation is stopped and the motor coasts to standstill With Zero Speed Delay The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp When the motor actual speed falls below an internal limit called Zero Speed the zero speed delay function activates During the delay the functions keeps the speed controller live The drive modulates motor is magnetized and drive is ready for a quick restart Note Parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION must be 2 RAMP for zero speed delay to operate 0 0 NOT SEL Disables the Zero Speed Delay function Zero Speed gt t Zero Speed gt t 2113 START DELAY Defines the Start delay After the conditions for start have been fulfilled the drive waits until the delay has elapsed and then starts the motor Start delay can be used with all start modes f START DELAY zero the delay is disabled During the Start delay alarm 2028 START DELAY is shown Parameters ACS550 01
288. ers reference and analog min and max settings provide scale and offset adjustment for the reference See the figure at parameter 1104 Example To set the minimum analog input value to 4 mA Configure the analog input for 0 20 mA current signal Calculate the minimum 4 mA as a percent of full range 20 mA 4 mA 20 mA 100 20 1302 MAXIMUM 1 Defines the maximum value of the analog input Define value as a percent of the full analog signal range The maximum analog input signal corresponds to 1105 REF1 MAX or 1108 REF2 MAX See the figure at parameter 1104 1303 PIETER y 4 Unfiltered signal Defines the filter time constant for analog input 1 A11 e The filtered signal reaches 63 of a step change within the time 7 specified 100 BOE i signal RIED gt t Time constant 1304 MINIMUM AI2 Defines the minimum value of the analog input See MINIMUM AI1 above 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 Defines the maximum value of the analog input e See MAXIMUM AI1 above 1306 FILTER Al2 Defines the filter time constant for analog input 2 12 e See FILTER AI1 above Parameters 124 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS This group defines the condition that activates each of the relay outputs Relay outputs 4 6 are only available if OREL 01 Relay Output Extension Module is installed Code Description 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Defines the event or cond
289. essing keys and Cw 7 simultaneously changes the displayed value to the default value of the parameter T Use keys A and S v 7 to select the parameter value When you have 10 changed the parameter value starts flashing PAR FWD save the displayed parameter value press S LOC 2292 Control panels 74 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual How to select the monitored signals Step Action Display 1 You can select which signals monitored in the Output mode how LOC L they are displayed with Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY parameters See page 55 for detailed instructions on changing parameter values PAR FWD By default you can monitor three signals by browsing see page 71 The LOc 1 0 4 particular default signals depend on the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO For macros whose default value of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL PAR FWD MODE is 1 VECTOR SPEED the default for signal 1 is 0102 SPEED otherwise 0103 OUTPUT FREQ The defaults for signals 2 and 3 are always 0104 1 0 5 CURRENT and 0105 TORQUE respectively PAR FWD To change the default signals select from Group 01 OPERATING DATA up to three signals to be browsed Signal 1 Change the value of parameter 3407 SIGNAL1 PARAM to the index of the signal parameter in Group 01 OPERATING DATA number of the parameter without the leading zero e g 105 means parameter 0705 TORQUE Value 100
290. etailed instructions on changing parameter values OUTPUT FREQ By default the display shows three signals The particular default signals 103 depend on the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO For macros whose CANCEL 00 00 SAVE default value of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE is 1 VECTOR SPEED the LOC UPAR EDIT default for signal 1 is 0102 SPEED otherwise 0103 OUTPUT FREQ The defaults 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM for signals 2 and 3 are always 0104 CURRENT and 0105 TORQUE respectively CURRENT To change the default signals select up to three signals from Group 01 104 OPERATING DATA to be shown CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Signal 1 Change the value of parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM to the index of ROC U PAR EDET the signal parameter in Group 01 OPERATING DATA number of the 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM parameter without the leading zero e g 105 means parameter 0105 TORQUE 105 TORQU E Value 100 means that no signal is displayed 3 dbi CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Repeat for signals 2 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM and 3 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM 2 Select how you want the signals to be displayed as a decimal number or a bar LOC PAR EDIT graph For decimal numbers you can specify the decimal point location or use 3404 ouTPUT1 DSP FORM the decimal point location and unit of the source signal setting 9 DIRECT For DIRECT details see parameter 3404 9 Signal 1 parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Signal 2 parameter 3411 OUTPUT2 DSP FORM Signal
291. eter 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 1014 PAR PFC IO 3 IO configuration is not complete the drive is unable to allocate a digital input interlock for each PFC motor parameters 8120 INTERLOCKS and 8127 MOTORS 1015 RESERVED Not used 1016 PAR USER LOAD C Parameter values for the user load curve are inconsistent Check that the following conditions are met 3704 LOAD FREQ 1 lt 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 lt 3710 LOAD FREQ lt 3713 LOAD FREQ 4 lt 3716 LOAD FREQ 5 3705 LOAD TORQ LOW 1 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 3708 LOAD LOW 2 lt 3709 LOAD HIGH 2 3711 LOAD LOW 3 lt 3712 LOAD HIGH 3 3714 LOAD LOW 4 lt 3715 LOAD HIGH 4 3717 LOAD TORQ LOW 5 3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 Fault resetting The ACS550 can be configured to automatically reset certain faults Refer to parameter Group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET WARNING If an external source for start command is selected and it is active the ACS550 may start immediately after fault reset Diagnostics 266 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Flashing red LED To reset the drive for faults indicated by a flashing red LED Turn the power off for 5 minutes Red LED To reset the drive for faults indicated by a red LED on not flashing correct the problem and do one of the following Press RESET from the control panel Turn the power off for 5 minutes Depending on th
292. eters 9905 9909 are equivalent to those on the motor nameplate as shown in the steps on page 39 If parameter values Group 01 OPERATING DATA to Group 98 OPTIONS are changed before the ID Run check that the new settings meet the following conditions 2001 MINIMUM SPEED lt 0 rpm 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED gt 80 of the motor rated speed 2003 MAXIMUM CURRENT gt 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 gt 50 or 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 gt 50 depending on which limit is in use according to parameter 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL Check that the Run Enable signal is on parameter 1607 Ensure that the panel is in local control LOC shown on the left at the top Press key to switch between local and remote control Start up control with I O and ID Run 46 ID RUN WITH THE ASSISTANT CONTROL PANEL Change parameter 9970 ID RUN to 1 ON Save the new setting SAVE by pressing wb If you want to monitor actual values during the ID Run go to EXIT the Output mode by pressing Cz repeatedly until you get there Press to start the ID Run The panel keeps switching between the display that was shown when you started the ID Run and the alarm display presented on the right In general it is recommended not to press any control panel keys during the ID Run However you can stop the ID Run at any time by pressing CQ After the ID Run is completed the alarm display is n
293. etizing start mode Note The DC Magnetizing start mode cannot start a rotating motor Note The drive starts when the set pre magnetizing time parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME has passed even if motor magnetization is not complete Vector control modes Magnetizes the motor within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current The normal control is released exactly after the magnetizing time This selection guarantees the highest possible break away torque SCALAR FREQ mode Magnetizes the motor within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current The normal control is released exactly after the magnetizing time 3 SCALAR FLYST Selects the flying start mode Vector control modes Not applicable SCALAR FREQ mode The drive automatically selects the correct output frequency to start a rotating motor useful if the motor is already rotating and if the drive will start smoothly at the current frequency Cannot be used in multimotor systems 4 TORQ BOOST Selects the automatic torque boost mode SCALAR FREQ mode only May be necessary in drives with high starting torque Torque boost is only applied at start ending when output frequency exceeds 20 Hz or when output frequency is equal to reference In the beginning the motor magnetizes within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current See parameter 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR 5 FLY BOOS
294. ex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit 0 displays as 0001 All zeros anda 10 RAMP_2 Reserved 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000 11 OUT 0 REF CONST 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 12 RAMP HOLD REF AVE Read only copy of the Fieldbus 13 RAMP IN 0 LINK ON Command Word 2 14 RREQ LOCALLOC REQ STARTINH See parameter 0301 15 TORQLIM2 OFF INTERLOCK 0303 FB STS WORD 1 Bese only copy of the Status Word 1 Bit 0303 FB STS WORD 1 0304 FB STS WORD 2 The drive sends status information to the fieldbus controller The status REARY ALARM consists of two Status Words 1 ENABLED NOTICE e The control panel displays the word in 2 STARTED DIRLOCK hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit 0 displays as 0001 All zeros anda 3 RUNNING LOCALLOCK 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000 4 ZERO_SPEED CTL_MODE 0304 FB STS WORD 2 5 ACCELERATE Reserved Read only copy of the Status Word 2 6 IDECELERATE Reserved See parameter 0303 7 AT SETPOINT CPY CTL 8 LIMIT CPY REF1 9 SUPERVISION CPY REF2 10 REV REF REQ CTL 11 ACT 12 PANEL_LOCAL REQ REF2 13 FIELDBUS LOCAL REQ REF2EXT 14 EXT2 ACT ACK STARTINH 15 FAULT ACK OFF ILCK Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 113 Code Description 0305 FAULT WORD 1 Read only copy of the Fault Wor
295. faults in the Output and Fault modes 3 MENU ENTER Enters deeper into menu level In the Parameter mode saves the displayed value as the new setting 4 Up Scrolls up through a menu or list Increases a value if a parameter is selected Increases the reference value in the Reference mode Holding the key down changes the value faster 5 Down Scrolls down through menu or list Decreases a value if a parameter is selected Decreases the reference value in the Reference mode Holding the key down changes the value faster LOC REM Changes between local and remote control of the drive DIR Changes the direction of the motor rotation STOP Stops the drive in local control START Starts the drive in local control o CO N Control panels ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Operation 69 You operate the control panel with menus and keys You select an option e g operation mode or parameter by scrolling the and lt 2 arrow keys until the option is visible in the display and then pressing the x7 key With the 77 key you return to the previous operation level without saving the made changes The Basic Control Panel has five panel modes Output Reference Parameter Copy and Fault The operation in the first four modes is described in this chapter When a fault or alarm occurs the panel goes automatically to the Fault mode showing the faul
296. ference range commands full reverse operation do not use 0 V as the lower end of the reference range Doing so means that if the control signal is lost which is a 0 V input the result is full reverse operation Instead use the following set up so that loss of the analog input triggers a fault stopping the drive Set parameter 1301 MINIMUM AI1 1304 MINIMUM AI2 at 2096 2 V or 4 mA Set parameter 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT to a value 5 or higher Set parameter 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION to 1 FAULT AIZ JOYST Defines analog input 2 12 configured for joystick operation as the reference source Hysteresis 4 of full scale See above AI1 JOYST description Parameters 118 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Description 5 DI3U 4D R Defines digital inputs as the speed reference source motor potentiometer control Digital input DI3 increases the speed the U stands for up Digital input D14 decreases the speed the D stands for down A Stop command resets the reference to zero the R stands for reset Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal s rate of change 6 DI3U 4D Same as above DI3U 4D R except A Stop command does not reset the reference to zero The reference is stored When the drive restarts the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored reference 7 0150 6 Same as above DI3U 4D except that
297. ficient 100 0 5 Par 1105 10096 input signal g 100 0 5 par 1105 0 50 100 Fieldbus adapter ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 253 ABB Drives profile FBA Reference Value setting Al reference scaling REF1 1 COMM Al 96 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus reference Acorrection coefficient 20096 100 P AI1 input signal 100 0 5 par 1105 96 0 50 100 REF2 COMM A 1 COMM Al 96 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus reference A correction coefficient 100 0 5 Par 1108 96 10096 input signal 100 0 5 par 1108 96 0 50 100 REF2 COMM AI1 COMM Al 96 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus reference A correction coefficient 200 de rct 100 7 EA l z input signal 0 gt 0 50 100 Fieldbus adapter 254 Reference handling ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Use Group 10 START STOP DIR parameters to configure for control of rotation direction for each control location ExT1 and EXT2 The following diagrams illustrate how group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce REFERENCE values REF1 and REF2 Note fieldbus references are bipolar that is they can be positive or negative ABB Drives profile Parameter Value setting Al reference
298. fines two ranges one positive and one negative A negative minimum speed value defines one speed range Speed range allowed Time 0 See the figure P 2001 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED Speed 2001 value is 0 Defines the maximum speed rpm allowed P 2002 Speed range allowed P 2001 0 rime P 2001 Speed range allowed P 2002 2003 CURRENT Defines the maximum output current A supplied by the drive to the motor 2005 OVERVOLT CTRL Sets the DC overvoltage controller on or off Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the DC bus voltage to rise to the overvoltage control limit To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the trip limit the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the braking torque by increasing output frequency DISABLE Disables controller 1 ENABLE Enables controller Note If a braking chopper or a braking resistor is connected to the drive this parameter value must be set to 0 DISABLE to ensure proper operation of the chopper 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL Sets the DC undervoltage controller on or off When on e If the DC bus voltage drops due to loss of input power the undervoltage controller decreases the motor speed in order to keep the DC bus voltage above the lower limit When the motor speed decreases the inertia of the load causes regeneration back into the drive keeping the DC bus charged and preventing an undervoltage trip The DC undervoltage controller increases power loss ride
299. function if used requires an additional relay output for the speed regulated motor The following describes the set up of the required relay outputs Relay outputs As noted above each auxiliary motor requires a relay output which the drive uses to send start stop signals The following describes how the drive keeps track of motors and relays The ACS550 provides relay outputs RO1 RO3 An external digital output module OREL 01 can be added to provide relay outputs RO4 RO6 Parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 define respectively how relays RO1 RO6 are used the parameter value 31 PFC defines the relay as used for PFC The ACS550 assigns auxiliary motors to relays in ascending order If the Autochange function is disabled the first auxiliary motor is the one connected to the first relay with a parameter setting 31 and so on If the Autochange function is used the assignments rotate Initially the speed regulated motor is the one connected to the first relay with a parameter setting 31 the first auxiliary motor is the one connected to the second relay with a parameter setting 31 and so on Relay logic ACS550 ACS550 Standard PFC mode PFC with Autochange mode The fourth auxiliary motor uses the same reference step low frequency and start frequency values as the third
300. g errors 5309 EFB STATUS value varies depending on network traffic Loss of communication The ACS550 behavior if communication is lost was configured earlier in section Communication fault on page 210 The parameters are 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Section Complete parameter descriptions on page 106 describes these parameters in detail No master station on line If no master station is on line Neither the EFB OK MESSAGES nor the errors 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS and 5308 EFB UART ERRORS increase on any of the stations To correct Check that a network master is connected and properly programmed on the network Verify that the cable is connected and that it is not cut or short circuited Duplicate stations If two or more stations have duplicate numbers Two or more drives cannot be addressed Everytime there is a read or write to one particular station the value for 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS or 5308 EFB UART ERRORS advances To correct Verify the station numbers of all stations Change conflicting station numbers Swapped wires If the communication wires are swapped terminal A on one drive is connected to terminal B on another The value of 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES does not advance The values of 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS and 5308 EFB UART ERRORS are advancing To correct Check that the RS 485 lines are not swapped Embedded fieldbus 214 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Fault 28 Serial 1 E
301. g input Parameter settings for Al1 FAULT LIMIT 3021 and 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION Al2 LOSS Analog input 2 loss Analog input value is less than AI2 FAULT LIMIT 3022 Check for and correct Source and connection for analog input Parameter settings for AI2 FAULT LIMIT 3022 and 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION MOT OVERTEMP Motor is too hot based on either the drive s estimate or on temperature feedback Check for overloaded motor Adjust the parameters used for the estimate 3005 3009 e Check the temperature sensors and Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS parameters 10 PANEL LOSS Panel communication is lost and either Drive is in local control mode the control panel displays LOC or Drive is in remote control mode REM and is parameterized to accept start stop direction or reference from the control panel To correct check Communication lines and connections Parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR Parameters in Group 10 START STOP DIR and Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT if drive operation is REM Diagnostics 262 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Fault code Fault name in panel Description and recommended corrective action 11 ID RUN FAIL The Motor ID Run was not completed successfully Check for and correct Motor connections Motor parameters 9905 9909 12 MOTOR STALL Motor or process stall Motor is operating in the stall region Check for and
302. gnostics information see chapter Diagnostics on page 259 The three most recent ACS550 faults are reported to the fieldbus as defined below Modbus protocol reference Drive parameter ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 0401 LAST FAULT 40401 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 40412 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 40413 Serial communication diagnostics Network problems can be caused by multiple sources Some of these sources are loose connections incorrect wiring including swapped wires bad grounding duplicate station numbers incorrect setup of drives or other devices on the network The major diagnostic features for fault tracing on an EFB network include Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters 5306 5309 Section Complete parameter descriptions on page 106 describes these parameters in detail Embedded fieldbus ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 213 Diagnostic situations The sub sections below describe various diagnostic situations the problem symptoms and corrective actions Normal operation During normal network operation 5306 5309 parameter values act as follows at each drive 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES advances advances for each message properly received and addressed to this drive 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS does not advance at all advances when an invalid message CRC is received 5308 EFB UART ERRORS does not advance at all advances when character format errors are detected such as parity or framin
303. h 203 DSP OVERLOAD 6100h 204 DSP STACK ERROR 6100h 205 Reserved obsolete 5000h 206 CB ID ERROR 5000h 207 EFB LOAD ERROR 6100h 1000 PAR HZRPM 6320h 1001 PAR PFC REF NEG 6320h 1002 Reserved obsolete 6320h 1003 PAR Al SCALE 6320h 1004 PAR AO SCALE 6320h 1005 PAR PCU 2 6320h 1006 PAR EXT RO 6320h 1007 PAR FIELDBUS MISSING 6320h 1008 PAR PFC MODE 6320h 1009 PAR PCuU 1 6320h 1012 PAR PFC IO 1 6320h 1013 PAR PFC IO 2 6320h 1014 PAR PFC IO 3 6320h 1016 PAR USER LOAD C 6320h ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Fieldbus adapter ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 247 Serial communication diagnostics Besides the drive fault codes the FBA module has diagnostic tools Refer to the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Fieldbus adapter 248 ABB Drives profile technical data Overview ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual The ABB Drives profile provides a standard profile that can be used on multiple protocols including protocols available on the FBA module This section describes the ABB Drives profile implemented for FBA modules Control Word As described earlier in section Control interface on page 238 the CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the CONTROL WORD content for the ABB Drives profile ABB Drives profi
304. h and air flowing from the resistor is very hot Materials near the brake resistor must be non flammable Provide protection from accidental contact with the resistor To ensure that the input fuses protect the resistor cable use resistor cables with the same rating as used for the power input to the drive The maximum length of the resistor cable s is 10 m 33 ft See section Power connection diagrams on page 25 for the resistor cable connection points Mandatory circuit protection The following setup is essential for safety it interrupts the main supply in fault situations involving chopper shorts Equip the drive with a main contactor Wire the contactor so that it opens if the resistor thermal switch opens an overheated resistor opens the contactor Below is a simple wiring diagram example L1 L2 L3 4 off Espey Fuses 2 1 3 5 13 3 N N nE 2 4 6 14 4 x E ACS550 U1 V1 W1 Thermal switch standard in ABB resistors Parameter set up To enable dynamic braking switch off the drive s overvoltage control Set parameter 2005 0 DISABLE Technical data ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Control connections 299 Control connection specifications Control connection specifications Analog inputs and See section Control terminals table on page 28
305. he characters with a framing error that the bus receives For high counts check e Communication speed settings of devices connected on the bus they must not differ Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors 5207 BUFFER OVERRUNS Contains a count of the characters received that cannot be placed in the buffer Longest possible message length for the drive is 128 bytes Received messages exceeding 128 bytes overflow the buffer The excess characters are counted 5208 ERRORS Contains a count of the messages with a CRC error that the drive receives For high counts check Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors CRC calculations for possible errors Parameters 184 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL This group defines set up variables used for an embedded fieldbus EFB communication protocol The standard EFB protocol in the ACS550 is Modbus See chapter Embedded fieldbus page 203 Code Description 5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID Contains the identification and program revision of the protocol Format XXYY where xx protocol ID and program revision 5302 EFB STATION ID Defines the node address of the RS485 link The node address on each unit must be unique 5303 EFB BAUD RATE Defines the communication speed of the RS485 link in kbits per second kb s 1 2 kb s 2 4 kb s 4 8 kb s 9 6 kb s 19 2 kb
306. he digital inputs used to select Constant Speeds See general comments in introduction 0 NOT SEL Disables the constant speed function 1 011 Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input 011 Digital input activated Constant Speed 1 activated 2 6 DI2 DI6 Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input DI2 DI6 See above 7 DI1 2 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using 011 and 012 e Uses two digital inputs as defined below 0 de activated 1 DI activated 011 012 Function 0 0 constant speed 1 0 Constant speed 1 1202 0 1 Constant speed 2 1203 1 1 Constant speed 3 1204 Can be set up as a so called fault speed which is activated if the control signal is lost Refer to parameter 3001 AI lt MIN function and parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR 8 DI2 3 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI2 and DI3 See above 011 2 for code 9 013 4 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI3 and See above 011 2 for code 10 014 5 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using 014 and Di5 e See above 11 2 for code 11 015 6 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using 015 and DI6 See above 011 2 for code 12 DI1 2 3 Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using 011 012 and 013 Uses three digital inputs as defined below 0 de activated 1 activated z
307. he drive s control terminals Control Frame size 1 Maximum wire size Tightening torque mm AWG N m Ib ft All 1 5 16 0 4 0 3 1 Values given for solid wires For stranded wires the maximum size is 1 mm2 Efficiency Approximately 98 at nominal power level Technical data ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 301 Losses cooling data and noise Cooling specifications Method Internal fan flow direction from bottom to top Free space above and below the ACS550 drive 200 mm 8 in Requirement Free space is not required on the drive s sides ACS550 drives can be mounted side by side Air flow 208 240 V drives The following table lists the requirements for the cooling air flow data for 208 240 V drives at full load in all ambient conditions listed in Ambient conditions on page 307 Drive Heat dissipation Air flow Noise ACS550 x1 Frame size BTU hr m h ft min dB 04A6 2 R1 55 189 44 26 52 06A6 2 R1 73 249 44 26 52 07A5 2 R1 81 276 44 26 52 012A 2 R1 118 404 44 26 52 017A 2 R1 161 551 44 26 52 024A 2 R2 227 776 88 52 66 031A 2 R2 285 973 88 52 66 046A 2 R3 420 1434 134 79 67 059A 2 R3 536 1829 134 79 67 075A 2 R4 671 2290 280 165 75 088A 2 R4 786 2685 280 165 75 114A 2 R4 1014 3463 280 165 75 143A 2 R6 1268 4431 405 238 77 178A 2 R6 1575 5379 405 238 77 221A 2 R6 1
308. he frame size For more information on the different system types see T systems on page 286 and Corner grounded TN systems on page 285 The locations of screws EM1 and EM3 are shown in the diagram on page 25 The locations of screws F1 and F2 are shown in the diagram on page 26 Frame screw grounded TN systems Comerarounded TN S systems y grounded gt 30 ohm EM1 x x R1 R3 1 X 1 x x R4 1 x x R5 R6 F2 x x x Install the screw EMC filter will be connected Replace the screw with the provided polyamide screw EMC filter will be disconnected Remove the screw EMC filter will be disconnected 1 ACS550 U1 drives are shipped with screw EM3 already removed Installation 28 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Control terminals table The following provides information for connecting control wiring at X1 on the drive X1 Hardware description 1 SCR Terminal for signal cable shield screen Connected internally to chassis ground 2 Analog input channel 1 programmable Default frequency reference Resolution 0 196 accuracy 196 Two different DIP switch types can be used J1 AI OFF 0 10 V R 312 kohm 2 9 J1 AI1 ON 0 20 mA 100
309. hile the drive is not running See also parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT and 3028 EARTH FAULT LVL Note Disabling earth fault ground fault may void the warranty 0 DISABLE No drive response to ground faults 1 ENABLE Ground faults display fault 16 EARTH FAULT and if running the drive coasts to stop 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC Defines the drive response if the fieldbus communication is lost NOT SEL No response 1 FAULT Displays a fault 28 SERIAL 1 ERR and the drive coasts to stop 2 CONST SP 7 Displays an alarm 2005 1 0 COMM and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 This alarm speed remains active until the fieldbus writes a new reference value LAST SPEED Displays an alarm 2005 1 0 COMM and sets speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds This alarm speed remains active until the fieldbus writes a new reference value WARNING If you select CONST SP 7 or LAST SPEED make sure that continued operation is safe when fieldbus communication is lost 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Sets the communication fault time used with 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC Brief interruptions in the fieldbus communication are not treated as faults if they are less than the COMM FAULT TIME value 3021 FAULT LIMIT Sets a fault level for analog input 1 See 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT Sets a fault level for analog input
310. hing frequency derating When using the 8 kHz switching frequency parameter 2606 derate all rated currents and powers including drive s overload currents to 80 When using the 12 kHz switching frequency parameter 2606 derate all rated currents and powers including drive s overload currents to 65 to 50 for 600 V R4 frame sizes that is for ACS550 U1 032A 6 ACS550 U1 062A 6 derate ambient temperature maximum to 30 C 86 F e Note The continuous maximum current is limited to Note Setting parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL 1 ON allows the drive to reduce the switching frequency if when the drive s internal temperature exceeds 80 with 12 kHz switching frequency or 90 with 8 kHz switching frequency See the parameter description for 2607 for details Technical data ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Input power connections 281 WARNING Do not operate the drive outside the nominal input line voltage range Overvoltage can result in permanent damage to the drive Input power specifications Input power mains connection specifications Voltage U4 208 220 230 240 V AC 3 phase or 1 phase 15 10 for 5550 1 2 380 400 415 440 460 480 V 3 phase 15 10 for ACS550 x1 XXXx 4 500 525 575 600 V AC 3 phase 15 10 for ACS550 U 1 xxxx 6 Prospective short circuit current Maximum allowed prospective short circuit current in th
311. i edere n ba ete aa See ac we E 289 Brake components 295 Control connections 299 ETICI TI Cy aote Bhs 300 Losses cooling data and noise 301 Table of contents ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 11 Dimensions and weights 303 Degrees of protection 306 Ambient conditl ris eso teh bbe hades Gee idi 307 Materials cet sie dee ea n ku Pea E eee eee eee oes 308 Applicable standards 309 Marklngs s Sx DX Rie eas Rave ae gee E 309 IEC EN 61800 3 2004 Definitions 311 Compliance with the IEC EN 61800 3 2004 A1 2012 311 Index Further information Product and service inquiries 325 Prod ct training seise vlan gas Ge kal eho ee 325 Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals 325 Document library the Internet 325 Table of contents 12 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Table of contents ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 13 Contents of this manual Compatibility This manual covers ACS550 01 U1 drives The manual
312. if Two auxiliary motors are running e ACS550 output frequency drops below the limit 8113 1 Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8113 1 Hz for at least the time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 8114 LOW FREQ 3 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the third auxiliary motor See 8112 Low FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The third auxiliary motor stops if Three auxiliary motors are running ACS550 output frequency drops below the limit 8114 1 Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8114 1 Hz for at least the time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 8115 AUX MOT START D Sets the Start Delay for the auxiliary motors The output frequency must remain above the start frequency limit parameter 8109 8110 or 8111 for this time period before the auxiliary motor starts See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation 8116 AUX MOT STOP D Sets the Stop Delay for the auxiliary motors The output frequency must remain below the low frequency limit parameter 8112 8113 or 8114 for this time period before the auxiliary motor stops See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation Parameters 192 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Description 8117 NR OF AUX MOT Sets the number of auxiliary motors Each auxiliary motor requires a relay output which the drive uses to send start stop signals The Autochange
313. imensions the same rating does not require a derating Technical data ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Ambient conditions 307 The following table lists the ACS550 environmental requirements Ambient environment requirements Installation site Storage and transportation in the protective package Altitude e 0 1000 m 0 3 300 ft 1000 2000 m 3 300 6 600 ft if Py and lzy derated 1 every 100 m above 1000 m 300 ft above 3 300 ft Ambient temperature Min 15 5 F frost allowed Max fsw 1 or 4 40 C 104 F 50 C 122 F if and derated to 90 Max fsw 8 40 C 104 F if and derated to 80 Max fsw 12 30 C 86 F if and lzy derated to 65 to 50 for 600 V R4 frame sizes that is for ACS550 U1 032A 6 ACS550 U1 062A 6 40 70 C 40 158 F Relative humidity 5 95 no condensation allowed Contamination levels IEC 60721 3 3 Noconductive dust allowed The ACS550 should be installed in clean air according to enclosure classification Cooling air must be clean free from corrosive materials and free from electrically conductive dust Chemical gases Class 3C2 Solid particles Class 3S2 Storage Noconductive dust allowed Chemical gases Class 1C2 Solid particles Class 152 Transportation Noconductive dust allowed Chemical gases Class
314. in the Parameters mode 0116 APPL BLK OUTPUT Application block output signal Value is from either PFC control if PFC Control is active or Parameter 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 109 Code Description 0118 DI 1 3 STATUS Status of the three digital inputs e Status is displayed as a binary number 1 indicates that the input is activated l LI e 0 indicates that the input is deactivated A ES 0119 DI 4 6 STATUS 011 012 013 Status of the three digital inputs See parameter 0118 DI 1 3 STATUS 0120 AI 1 The relative value of analog input 1 in 96 0121 12 The relative value of analog input 2 in 96 0122 RO 1 3 STATUS Status of the three relay outputs 1 1 indicates that the relay is energized l LI l 0 indicates that the relay is de energized 0123 RO 4 6 STATUS RELAY 1 STATUS Status of the three relay outputs Available if OREL 01 Relay Output RELAY 2 STATUS Extension Module is installed RELAY 3 STATUS See parameter 0122 0124 AO 1 The analog output 1 value in milliamperes 0125 AO2 The analog output 2 value in milliamperes 0126 PID 1 OUTPUT The PID controller 1 output value in 96 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT The PID controller 2 output value in 96 0128 PID 1 SETPNT The PID 1 controller setpoint signal Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0129 PID 2 SETPNT
315. ing the source for start and stop signals of the two external control locations EXT1 and EXT2 Selecting between EXT1 and EXT2 Defining the direction control Defining the start and stop modes Selecting the use of Run Enable signal 1001 1002 1102 1003 2101 2103 1601 Timed functions Setting the timed functions Selecting the timed start stop control for external control locations EXT1 and EXT2 Selecting timed EXT1 EXT2 control Activation of timed constant speed 1 Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 1001 1002 1102 1201 Control panels ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 59 Name Description Selecting timed function status indicated through relay output RO Selecting timed PID1 parameter set 1 2 control Set parameters 1401 4027 Protections Setting the current and torque limits 2003 2017 Output signals Selecting the signals indicated through relay output RO Selecting the signals indicated through analog output AO Setting the minimum maximum scaling and inversion Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS Control panels 60 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Changed Parameters mode In the Changed Parameters mode you can view a list of all parameters that have been changed from the macro default values change these parameters start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control
316. is compatible with the ACS550 01 U1 drive firmware version 3 14e or later See parameter 3301 FIRMWARE on page 155 Intended use The ACS550 01 U1 is a general purpose drive The macros should only be applied to the applications defined in the respective section Intended audience This manual is intended for personnel who install commission operate and service the drive Read the manual before working on the drive The reader is expected to know the fundamentals of electricity wiring electrical components and electrical schematic symbols Contents of this manual 14 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Contents of this manual ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 15 Installation A Study these installation instructions carefully before proceeding Failure to observe the warnings and instructions may cause a malfunction or personal hazard WARNING Before you begin read chapter Safety instructions on page 5 Note The installation must always be designed and made according to applicable local laws and regulations ABB does not assume any liability whatsoever for any installation which breaches the local laws and or other regulations Furthermore if the recommendations given by ABB are not followed the drive may experience problems that the warranty does not cover Installation flow chart The installation of the ACS550 adjustable speed AC drive follows the outline below The steps must be carried out in the order shown At th
317. is not included in the address field of a Modbus message Note The ACS550 supports the zero based addressing of the Modbus specification Holding register 40002 is addressed as 0001 in a Modbus message Similarly coil 33 is addressed as 0032 in a Modbus message Refer again to the Mapping summary above The following sections describe in detail the mapping to each Modbus reference set Oxxxx Mapping Modbus coils The drive maps the following information to the Oxxxx Modbus set called Modbus Coils bit wise map of the CONTROL WORD selected using parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE The first 32 coils are reserved for this purpose Embedded fieldbus ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 217 relay output states numbered sequentially beginning with coil 00033 The following table summarizes the Oxxxx reference set Modbus Internal location ABB DRV LIM DCU PROFILE ABB DRV FULL ref all profiles 5305 0 5305 1 5305 2 00001 CONTROL BitO OFF1 STOP orFr1 00002 CONTROL Bit 1 OFF2 START OFF2 00003 CONTROL WORD Bit 2 OFF3 REVERSE 00004 CONTROL WORD Bit3 START LOCAL START 00005 CONTROL WORD Bit 4 N A RESET RAMP OUT ZERO 00006 CONTROL WORD Bit 5 RAMP HOLD EXT2 RAMP_HOLD 00007 CONTROL WORD Bit 6 RAMP IN ZERO RUN DISABLE RAMP IN ZERO
318. ith par 3201 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM 100 NOT SELECTED 101 178 1 104 parameter 0104 CURRENT 3205 SUPERV 2 LIM LO Depends on the signal selected with par 3204 3206 SUPERV 2 LIM HI Depends on the signal selected with par 3204 3207 SUPERV PARAM 100 NOT SELECTED 101 178 1 105 parameter 0105 TORQUE 3208 SUPERV 3 LIM LO Depends on the signal selected with par 3207 3209 SUPERV 3 LIM HI Depends on the signal selected with par 3207 Group 33 INFORMATION 3301 FIRMWARE 0000 FFFF hex 1 Firmware version 3302 LOADING PACKAGE 0000 FFFF hex 1 Type dependent 3303 TEST DATE yy ww 0 01 3304 RATING Type dependent 3305 PARAMETER TABLE 0000 FFFF hex 1 Type dependent Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 100 NOT SELECTED 101 178 1 103 parameter 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Depends on the signal selected with par 3401 3403 SIGNAL1 MAX Depends on the signal selected with par 3401 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 0 9 1 9 DIRECT 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT 0 127 1 Depends on the signal selected with par 3401 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN Depends on the signal selected with par 3401 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX Depends on the signal selected with par 3401 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM 100 NOT SELECTED 101 178 1 104 parameter 0104 CURRENT 3409 SIGNAL2 MIN Depends on the signal selected with par 3408 3410 SIGNAL2 MAX Depends on the signal
319. ition that activates relay 1 what relay output 1 means 0 NOT SEL Relay is not used and is de energized 1 READY Energize relay when drive is ready to function Requires Run enable signal present No faults exist Supply voltage is within range Emergency Stop command is not on 2 RUN Energize relay when the drive is running 3 FAULT 1 Energize relay when power is applied De energizes when a fault occurs 4 FAULT Energize relay when a fault is active 5 ALARM Energize relay when an alarm is active 6 REVERSED Energize relay when motor rotates in reverse direction 7 STARTED Energize relay when drive receives a start command even if Run Enable signal is not present De energized relay when drive receives a stop command or a fault occurs 8 SUPRV1 OVER Energize relay when first supervised parameter 3201 exceeds the limit 3203 See Group 32 SUPERVISION starting on page 153 9 SUPRV1 UNDER Energize relay when first supervised parameter 3201 drops below the limit 3202 See Group 32 SUPERVISION starting on page 153 10 SUPRV2 OVER Energize relay when second supervised parameter 3204 exceeds the limit 3206 See Group 32 SUPERVISION starting on page 153 11 SUPRV2 UNDER Energize relay when second supervised parameter 3204 drops below the limit 3205 See Group 32 SUPERVISION starting on page 153 12 SUPRV3 OVER Energize relay when third
320. l sources EXT1 and EXT2 for commands that enable start stop and direction changes locks direction or enables direction control To select between the two external locations use the next group parameter 1102 Code Description 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS Defines external control location 1 EXT1 the configuration of start stop and direction commands 0 NOT SEL No external start stop and direction command source 1 011 Two wire Start Stop Start Stop is through digital input DI1 DI1 activated Start DI1 de activated Stop Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecting 1003 3 REQUEST is the same as 1003 1 FORWARD 2 011 2 Two wire Start Stop Direction Start Stop is through digital input DI1 DI1 activated Start DI1 de activated Stop Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST is through digital input DI2 DI2 activated Reverse de activated Forward 3 DITP 2P Three wire Start Stop Start Stop commands are through momentary push buttons the P stands for pulse Start is through a normally open push button connected to digital input DI1 In order to start the drive the digital input 012 must be activated prior to the pulse in 011 Connect multiple Start push buttons in parallel Stop is through a normally closed push button connected to digital input DI2 Connect multiple Stop push buttons in series Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecti
321. lay DI3 Third PFC Relay DI4 Third PFC Relay DI4 DI6 Free DI5 DI6 Free 4 011 Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFC Relay DI2 First PFC Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI3 Third PFC Relay DI4 Third PFC Relay DI4 Fourth PFC Relay DI5 Fourth PFC Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI6 Free 5 011 Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFC Relay DI2 First PFC Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI3 Third PFC Relay DI4 Third PFC Relay DI4 Fourth PFC Relay 015 Fourth PFC Relay DI5 Fifth PFC Relay DI6 Fifth PFC Relay DI6 Free 6 Not allowed 011 First PFC Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Third PFC Relay DI4 Fourth PFC Relay DI5 Fifth PFC Relay DI6 Sixth PFC Relay Parameters 196 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Description 2 012 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with 012 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on the number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFC the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 0 and otherwise enabled DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI3 First PFC Relay 014 016 Free No Autochange disabled Autochange enabled relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 Free Not allowed DI2 Speed Reg Motor 013 016 Free 1 DI1 Free DI1 Free DI2 First PFC Relay DI3
322. le FBA CONTROL WORD Name Value Commanded state Comments 0 OFF1 1 READY TO OPERATE Enter READY TO OPERATE CONTROL 5 0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive ramps to stop according to currently active deceleration ramp 2203 or 2205 Normal command sequence Enter OFF1 ACTIVE Proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks OFF2 OFF3 are active 1 OFF2 1 OPERATING Continue operation OFF2 inactive CONTROL 0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive coasts to stop Normal command sequence Enter OFF2 ACTIVE Proceed to SWITCHON INHIBITED 2 OFF3 1 OPERATING Continue operation OFF3 inactive CONTROL PEE E 0 EMERGENCY STOP Drive stops within in time specified by parameter 2208 Normal command sequence Enter OFF3 ACTIVE Proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED WARNING Be sure motor and driven equipment can be stopped using this mode 3 INHIBIT 1 OPERATION Enter OPERATION ENABLED Note the Run OPERATION ENABLED enable signal must be active See 1601 If 1601 is set to COMM this bit also actives the Run Enable signal 0 OPERATION Inhibit operation Enter OPERATION INHIBITED INHIBITED 4 RAMP OUT 1 NORMAL OPERATION Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ZERO ACCELERATION ENABLED 0 RFG OUT ZERO Force ramp function generator output to Zero Drive ramps to stop current and DC voltage limits in force Fieldbus adapter ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 249 ABB Drives profile FBA CONTROL WORD Bit Name Value Commanded state Comments
323. les see chapter Technical data page 277 to determine the frame size Mounting dimensions w1 See detail A H1 n fL See detail gt a d Detail A Detail B X0032 IP21 UL type 1 and IP54 UL type 12 Dimensions for each frame size Rok R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in wi 980 3 9 98 0 3 9 160 63 160 63 238 9 4 263 10 4 w2 98 0 39 980 39 H1 318 12 5 418 164 473 18 6 578 22 8 588 23 2 675 26 6 a 5 5 0 2 5 5 0 2 6 5 0 25 6 5 0 25 6 5 0 25 9 0 0 35 b 10 0 0 4 10 0 0 4 13 0 0 5 13 0 05 14 0 0 55 18 0 0 71 5 5 0 2 5 5 0 2 8 0 0 3 8 0 0 3 8 5 0 3 8 5 0 3 d 5 5 0 2 5 5 0 2 6 5 0 25 6 5 0 25 6 5 0 25 9 0 0 35 1 Center to center dimension Technical data 304 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Outside dimensions Drives with IP21 UL type 1 enclosures Types ACS550 x1 221A 2 ACS550 x1 246A 4 ACS550 x1 248A 2 and ACS550 01 290A 4 frame size R6 D j z T 1 Q X0031 IP21 UL type 1 dimensions for each frame size R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 Ref mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in 125 4 9 125 49 203 8 0 203 8 0 265 10 4 302 11 9 H 330 13 0
324. ling of the REFERENCE see the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Generic profile Reference type REF Fieldbus Speed 100 par 9908 Final reference limited by specific 0 1104 1105 100 par 9908 Actual motor speed limited by 2001 2002 speed Frequency 100 par 9907 Final reference limited by 0 0 1104 1105 100 par 9907 Actual motor speed limited by 2007 2008 frequency Reference Range Scaling Remarks Actual Values As described earlier in section Control interface on page 238 Actual Values are words containing drive values Fieldbus adapter ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Actual Value scaling 257 For Actual Values scale the feedback integer using the parameter s resolution See section Complete parameter list on page 91 for parameter resolutions For example Feedback Parameter resoluti n Feedback integer Parameter resolution integer Scaled Value 1 0 1 MA 1 0 1 mA 0 1 mA 10 0 196 10 0 1 1 Where parameters in percent the Complete parameter list section specifies what parameter corresponds to 100 In such cases to convert from percent to engineering units multiply by the value of the parameter that defines 100 and divide by 100 For example Feedback Paramet r Value of the Feedback integer Parameter resolution integer resolution parameter that Valu
325. llocated within Alarm Words 2 IUNDERVOLTAGE ID RUN e Bits remain set until the whole alarm word is reset Reset by writing zero to DIRLOCK Reserved i T d 4 OCOMM START ENABLE 1 MISSING e control panel displays the word in hex For example all zeros and a 1 in 5 Al1LOSS START ENABLE 2 MISSING Bit 0 displays as 0001 All zeros and a 6 AI2LOSS EMERGENCY STOP 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000 7 PANELLOSS ENCODER ERROR 0309 ALARM WORD 2 8 DEVICE OVERTEMP FIRST START See parameter 0308 9 MOTOR TEMP Reserved 10 Reserved USER LOAD CURVE 11 MOTOR STALL START DELAY 12 AUTORESET Reserved 13 AUTOCHANGE Reserved 14 PFCILOCK Reserved 15 Reserved Reserved Parameters 114 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Group 04 FAULT HISTORY This group stores a recent history of the faults reported by the drive Code Description 0401 LAST FAULT 0 Clear the fault history on panel NO RECORD Fault code of the last recorded fault The fault code is displayed as a name See section Fault listing on page 260 for the fault codes and names The fault name shown for this parameter may be shorter than the corresponding name in the fault listing which shows the names as they are shown in the fault display 0402 FAULT TIME 1 The day on which the last fault occurred Either as A date if real time clock is operating The number of days after power on if real time clock is not used or was not set 04
326. load in all ambient conditions listed in Ambient conditions on page 307 Drive Heat dissipation Air flow Noise ACS550 U1 Frame size Ww BTU hr m h ft Imin dB 02A7 6 R2 52 178 88 52 66 03A9 6 R2 73 249 88 52 66 06A1 6 R2 127 434 88 52 66 09A0 6 R2 172 587 88 52 66 011A 6 R2 232 792 88 52 66 017A 6 R2 337 1151 88 52 66 022A 6 R3 457 1561 134 79 67 027 6 R3 562 1919 134 79 67 032A 6 R4 667 2278 280 165 75 041A 6 R4 907 3098 280 165 75 052A 6 R4 1117 3815 280 165 75 062A 6 R4 1357 4634 280 165 75 077A 6 R6 2310 7889 405 238 77 099A 6 R6 2310 7889 405 238 77 125A 6 R6 2310 7889 405 238 77 Technical data ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 303 Drive Heat dissipation Air flow Noise ACS550 U1 Frame size Ww BTU hr m h ft min dB 144A 6 R6 2310 7889 405 238 77 00467918 xls Dimensions and weights The dimensions and mass for the ACS550 depend on the frame size and enclosure type If unsure of the frame size first find the Type designation on the drive labels see sections The labels contain information on the Type designation page 17 Ratings and frame size page 17 Serial number page 17 degree of protection see also Degrees of protection on page 306 and valid markings see also Markings on page 309 on page 17 and Drive labels on page 16 Then look up that type designation in the rating tab
327. lowed by the parameter number Actual value scaling The scaling of actual values can be protocol dependent In general for Actual Values scale the feedback integer using the parameter s resolution See section Complete parameter list on page 91 for parameter resolutions For example Feedback Parameter Feedback integer Parameter resolution Scaled value integer resolution 1 0 1 mA 1 0 1 mA 0 1 mA 10 0 196 10 0 196 1 Where parameters are in percent the Complete parameter descriptions section specifies what parameter corresponds to 10096 In such cases to convert from percent to engineering units multiply by the value of the parameter that defines 100 and divide by 100 Embedded fieldbus 212 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual For example Feedback Parameter Feedback integer Parameter resolution i i 0 integer resolution defines 100 Value of 100 ref 100 Scaled value 10 0 1 1500 rpm 10 0 1 1500 RPM 100 15 rpm 100 0 196 500 Hz 100 0 1 500 Hz 100 50 Hz 1 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9908 MOT NOM SPEED as the 100 reference and that 9908 1500 rpm 2 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9907 MOT NOM FREQ as the 10096 reference and that 9907 500 Hz Diagnostics EFB Fault queue for drive diagnostics For general ACS550 dia
328. lse defines the zero position the shaft must pass through the zero position to trigger a Z pulse Until then the shaft position is unknown the drive uses the shaft position at power up as zero This parameter signals when parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE is valid The parameter starts at 0 NOT DETECTED on power up and changes to 1 DETECTED only if parameter 5010 z PLS ENABLE 1 ENABLE and an encoder Z pulse has been detected 0150 CB TEMP Temperature of the drive control board in degrees Celsius Note Some drives have a control board OMIO that does not support this feature These drives always show the constant value of 25 0 C Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 111 Code Description 0153 THERM STRESS Estimated rise of the motor temperature Value equals to the estimated motor thermal stress as a percentage of the motor temperature trip level 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 Data received from fieldbus for PID control PID1 and PID2 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 Data received from fieldbus for PID control PID1 and PID2 0174 SAVED KWH Energy saved in kWh compared to the energy used when the pump is connected directly to the supply See the note page 780 The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 999 9 after which the counter rolls over and starts again from 0 0 and the counter value of signal 0175 is incremented by one Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESE
329. ltiplier PID parameter 173 on ABB 325 select PID parameter 173 field weakening point 289 fieldbus see EFB embedded fieldbus see EFB drive parameters see FBA fieldbus adapter see FBA drive parameters fieldbus adapter see FBA see FBA drive parameters fieldbus embedded see EFB see EFB drive parameters firmware 13 panel 47 51 version 66 155 first environment C2 compliance with IEC EN 61800 3 311 C2 motor cable length 290 definition mee 311 flange mounting 20 FlashDrop application macro parameter 106 connection 25 parameter view parameter 132 floating network see IT system flux braking 145 flux optimization parameter 145 force trip fault code 263 frame errors count parameter 183 frame SIZE cadets daa 277 free fall stress 307 frequency at fault history parameter 114 max limit parameter 134 min limit 134 motor 2
330. m the drive Inputs to the controller drive outputs have pre defined meanings established by the protocol This feedback does not require drive configuration The following table lists a sample of feedback data For a complete listing see all parameters listed in section Complete parameter descriptions on page 106 Drive parameter Protocol reference 0102 SPEED 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 0104 CURRENT 0105 TORQUE 0106 POWER 0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 0 STOP 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 2 REV 0118 DI 1 3 STATUS bit 0 DI3 Scaling To scale the drive parameter values see the following sections as appropriate Actual Value scaling on page 255 ABB Drives profile technical data Actual Value scaling on page 257 Generic profile technical data Fieldbus adapter ACS550 01 U1 User Diagnostics s Manual FBA Fault handling The ACS550 provides fault information as follows 245 The control panel display shows a fault code and text See chapter Diagnostics on page 259 for a complete description Parameters 0401 LAST FAULT 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT1 and 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT2 store the most recent faults For fieldbus access the drive reports faults as a hexadecimal value assigned and coded according to the DRIVECOM specification See the table below Not
331. maintenance trigger data previous faults history parameters process PID sets parameter groups process variables data parameter product INQUINGS dee ee debe training profiles EFB proportional gain parameter 147 321 protection circuit required w chopper 298 disconnecting device disconnecting means 281 enclosure standard 309 306 motor 291 PT100 temperature 160 PTC temperature 160 pump power see energy saving R radiation limits conducted EN 6 1800 3 eee dius 294 ramp pair accel decel parameter 139 range listing for parameters 91 ratings ose Beare eee he SRA 277 reference select parameter group 117 corrections for parameter values 118 keypad control parameter 117 maximum 119 minimum parameters 119 mode Basic Control Panel 72 select source parameter 117 step PFC parameters 189 reference scaling EFB ABB Drives profile 233 EFB DCU profile 233 FB
332. me sizes R2 R4 in scalar control mode 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL f The switching frequency may be reduced if the ACS550 limit A R1 R4 drives see par 2606 internal temperature rises above a limit See the figure 20 F This function allows the highest possible switching 12 kHz bom drives par 2606 frequency to be used based on operating conditions Higher switching frequency results in lower acoustic 8 2 1 Drive noise temperature In multimotor systems do no disable set OFF the 4 kHz DS MN function 0 oFF The function is disabled 80 C 90 C 100 C 1 ON The switching frequency is limited according to the figure 2608 SLIP COMP RATIO Sets gain for slip compensation in 96 A squirrel cage motor slips under load Increasing the frequency as the motor torque increases compensates for the slip Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ 0 No slip compensation 1 200 Increasing slip compensation 10096 means full slip compensation 2609 NOISE SMOOTHING This parameter introduces a random component to the switching frequency Noise smoothing distributes the acoustic motor noise over a range of frequencies instead of a single tonal frequency resulting in lower peak noise intensity The random component has an average of 0 Hz It is added to the switching frequency set by parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ This parameter has no effect if parameter 2606 12 kHz DISABLE
333. meter 0146 MECH ANGLE to zero 5011 POSITION RESET Resets the encoder s position feedback This parameter is self clearing DISABLE Inactive 1 ENABLE Resets the encoder position feedback Parameters reset depends on the state of parameter 5010 z PLS ENABLE 5010 0 DISABLE Reset applies to parameters 0147 MECH REVS and 0146 MECH ANGLE 5010 1 ENABLE Reset applies only to parameter 0147 MECH REVS Parameters 182 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE This group defines set up variables for a fieldbus adapter FBA communication module For more information on these parameters refer to the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Code Description 5101 FBA TYPE Displays the type of the connected fieldbus adapter module 0 NOT DEFINED Module not found or not properly connected or parameter 9802 is not set to 4 EXT 1 PROFIBUS DP 21 LONWORKS 32 CANopen 37 DEVICENET 101 CONTROLNET 128 ETHERNET 132 PROFINET 135 EthercAT 136 EPL Ethernet POWERLINK 5102 5126 FB PAR 2 FB PAR 26 Refer to communication module documentation for more information on these parameters 5127 FBA PAR REFRESH Validates any changed fieldbus parameter settings 0 DONE Refreshing done 1 REFRESH Refreshing After refreshing the value reverts automatically to DONE 5128 FILE CPI FW
334. mit used See DI1 above 7 COMM Defines bit 15 of the Command Word 1 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The Command Word is parameter 0301 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used Activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 1 value De activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 2 value 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used See DI1 INV above 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL Defines control of the selection between two maximum torque limits 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 and 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 0 MAX TORQUE 1 Selects 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 as the maximum limit used 1 Di1 Defines digital input 011 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used Activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 2 value De activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 1 value 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used See DI1 above 7 COMM Defines bit 15 of the Command Word 1 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The Command Word is parameter 0301 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input di1 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used Activating
335. n or max limits Parameter is read only Message is too long Parameter write not allowed when start is active Parameter write not allowed when factory macro is selected Embedded fieldbus 224 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual ABB control profiles technical data Overview ABB Drives profile The ABB Drives profile provides a standard profile that can be used on multiple protocols including Modbus and the protocols available on the FBA module Two implementations of the ABB Drives profile are available ABB DRV FULL This implementation standardizes the control interface with ACS600 and ACS800 drives ABB DRV LIM This implementation standardizes the control interface with ACS400 drives This implementation does not support two control word bits supported by ABB DRV FULL Except as noted the following ABB Drives Profile descriptions apply to both implementations DCU profile The DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits It is the internal interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus environment Control Word The CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The fieldbus master station sends the CONTROL WORD to the drive The drive switches between states according to the bit coded instructions in the CONTROL WORD Using the CONTROL WORD requires that The drive is in remote REM control
336. n stress testing 307 voltage at fault history parameter 114 rating code 17 voltage frequency ratio parameter 145 wake up delay PID parameter 175 deviation PID parameter 175 warning automatic start 7 dangerous voltages 5 6 disconnecting device disconnecting means 7 ELV Extra Low Voltage EM1 EM3 F1 and F2 screws 6 filter on corner grounded TN system 6 filter on IT 6 high 5 5 not field repairable 5 6 parallel control connections qualified 5 Weight 2 024 4 Re 306 wiring iu t da d aedis 28 fault 151 30 installation steps IP21 cables 30 installation steps IP21 conduit 32 installation steps IP54 cables 33 installation steps IP54 conduit 34 OVerVIOW eee eal dd eas Sede 23 requirements general 23 XYZ zero pulse detected data parameter 110 enable 181 zero speed delay 138
337. n the right side of the drive cover Two examples of the type designation label are given below ut 3 380 480 V IP21 UL type 1 NEMA 1 AE A ABB Oy n 48 63 Hz C Qiu u2 3 0 U1 V MA N7213 41065006 PN Phd 4 0 3 0 kW ACS550 01 08A8 4 4 amp Type designation 704 lt a Serial number For more informabon see Users Manwal 43 He 1PH4 43r ABB INC 192114 1 8 240 Vac 206 240 Vac MTR OL INCL SEE MANUAL 424 424 Short 100 RA RMS Symmetrical 600 max isee MO 1 Mig ebruary 2008 Ong V3 3A 2080601940 Serial number LIEU 2 8 amp Type designation Installation ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 17 The labels contain information on the Type designation page 17 Ratings and frame size page 17 Serial number page 17 degree of protection see also Degrees of protection on page 306 and valid markings see also Markings on page 309 Type designation Use the following chart to interpret the type designation found on both the type designation and the serial number label ACS550 01 08A8 4 J404 AC Standard Drive 550 product series Construction region specific 01 Setup and parts specific to IEC installation and compliance U1 Setup and parts specific to US installation and NEMA compliance Output current rating e g
338. nd then to save the data as two user parameter sets When the motor is changed only the corresponding user parameter set needs to be loaded and the drive is ready to operate Application macros ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Macro default values for parameters 89 Parameter default values are listed in section Complete parameter list on page 97 Changing from the default macro ABB Standard that is editing the value of parameter 9902 changes the parameter default values as defined in the following tables Note There are two sets of values because the defaults are configured for 50 Hz IEC compliance ACS550 01 and 60 Hz NEMA compliance ACS550 U1 ACS550 01 Motor ABB PID PFC Torque Parameter Standard 3 wire Alternate foe Hand auto Control Control 9902 APPLIC MACRO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ABB STANDARD 3 WIRE ALTERNATE MOTOR HAND AUTO PID CONTROL PFC CONTROL TORQUE CTRL 9904 CTRL 3 SCALAR 1 VECTOR 1 VECTOR 1 VECTOR 1 VECTOR 1 VECTOR 3 SCALAR 2 VECTOR MODE FREQ SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED FREQ TORQUE 1001 1 COMMANDS 2 011 2 4 011 2 3 9 DI1F 2R 2 011 2 2 011 2 1 011 1 011 2 011 2 1002 2 COMMANDS 0 NOT SEL 0 SEL O NOT SEL O SEL7 016 5 6 016 6 7 016 2 7 011 2 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST 3 REQUEST
339. nd wiring type conduit or cable Be sure to select the appropriate procedure Determine electro magnetic compliance EMC requirements per local codes See section Motor cable requirements for CE amp C Tick compliance on page 293 In general Follow local codes for cable size Keep these four classes of wiring separated input power wiring motor wiring control communications wiring and braking unit wiring When installing input power and motor wiring refer to the following as appropriate Terminal Description Specifications and notes U1 V1 W11 3 phase power supply input Input power connections on page 281 PE Protective Ground Ground connections on page 285 U2 V2 W2 Power output to motor Motor connections on page 289 1 The ACS550 x1 xxxx 2 208 240 V series can be used with a single phase supply if output current is derated by 50 For single phase supply voltage connect power at U1 and W1 To locate input power and motor connection terminals see section Power connection diagrams on page 25 For specifications on power terminals see section Drive s power connection terminals on page 286 For corner grounded TN systems see section Corner grounded TN systems on page 285 For IT systems see section T systems on page 286 Installation 24 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual For frame size R6 see section Power terminal considerations R6 frame size on page 287 t
340. nes and connections parameter 3002 parameters in groups 10 and 11 EXIT 00 00 OK Control panels 62 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Time and Date mode In the Time and Date mode you can show or hide the clock change date and time display formats setthe date and time enable or disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control The Assistant Control Panel contains a battery to ensure the function of the clock when the panel is not powered by the drive How to show or hide the clock change display formats set the date and time and enable or disable clock transitions due to daylight saving changes Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing lt you are in the Output mode otherwise LOC UMAIN MENU 1 by pressing repeatedly until you get to the Main menu PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER 2 Go to the Time and Date mode by selecting TIME amp DATE on the menu with LOC 1 TIME amp DATE 1 CLOCK VISIBILITY keys and SY 2 and pressing S I ISIN DATE FORMAT SET TIME SET DATE EXIT 00 00 SEL 3 To show hide the clock select CLOCK VISIBLILITY on the menu press LOC CLOCK VISIB 1 select Show clock Hide clock and press AX or if you want to return to the previous display without making changes press
341. ng 1003 3 REQUEST is the same as 1003 1 FORWARD 4 DITP 2P 3 Three wire Start Stop Direction Start Stop commands are through momentary push buttons as described for DI1P 2P Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST is through digital input DI3 DI3 activated Reverse de activated Forward 5 DITP 2P 3P Start Forward Start Reverse and Stop Start and Direction commands are given simultaneously with two separate momentary push buttons the P stands for pulse Start Forward command is through a normally open push button connected to digital input DI1 In order to start the drive the digital input DI3 must be activated prior to the pulse in DI1 Start Reverse command is through a normally open push button connected to digital input DI2 In order to start the drive the digital input DI3 must be activated during the pulse in DI2 Connect multiple Start push buttons in parallel Stop is through a normally closed push button connected to digital input DI3 Connect multiple Stop push buttons in series Requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST 6 DI6 Two wire Start Stop Start Stop is through digital input DI6 DI6 activated Start DI6 de activated Stop Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecting 1003 3 REQUEST is the same as 1003 1 FORWARD 7 DI6 5 Two wire Start Stop Direction Start Stop is through digital input DI6 DI6 activated Start DI6 de activated Sto
342. ngle Coil 15 Force Multiple Coils Status Bits Discrete Inputs 1xxxx 02 Read Input Status Discrete Inputs Analog Inputs Input Registers 3xxxxx 04 Read Input Registers Parameters Holding Registers 4xxxx 03 Read Registers Control Status Words 06 Preset Single 4X Register References 16 Preset Multiple 4X Registers 23 Read Write 4X Registers Communication profiles When communicating by Modbus the ACS550 supports multiple profiles for control and status information Parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE selects the profile used ABB DRV LIM The primary and default profile is the ABB DRV LIM profile This implementation of the ABB Drives profile standardizes the control interface with ACSA00 drives The ABB Drives profile is based on the PROFIBUS interface It is discussed in detail in the following sections DCU PROFILE The DCU PROFILE profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits It is the internal interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus environment ABB DRV FULL ABB DRV FULL is the implementation of the ABB Drives profile that standardizes the control interface with ACS600 and ACS800 drives This implementation supports two control word bits not supported by the ABB DRV LIM implementation Modbus addressing With Modbus each function code implies access to a specific Modbus reference set Thus the leading digit
343. ning or Relay output 3 Fault 1 141 o 0 10 V N Z Al2 0 4 20 mA Application macros 80 Alternate macro ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual This macro provides an I O configuration adopted to a sequence of DI control signals used when alternating the rotation direction of the motor To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 3 ALTERNATE Connection example x1 41 40 kohm4 1 ISCR Signal cable shield screen 2 AI1 External speed reference 1 0 10 V a 3 AGND Analog input circuit common MoV Reference voltage 10 V DC 5 2 Not used 6 AGND Analog input circuit common lt D H7 1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA D 8 2 Output current 0 20 mA 9 AGND Analog output circuit common L 4110 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC r 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 112 DCOM Digital input common for all 13 DI1 Start fwd If DI1 state is the same as DI2 the drive stops 14 DI2 Start reverse 15 DI3 Constant speed selection 16 014 Constant speed selection 17 015 Ramp pair selection Activation selects 2nd acc dec ramp pair L 118 016 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A A Default ope
344. nput registers 1 amp 2 Force Single Coil 0x05 Write a single discrete output For the ACS550 the individual bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1 16 Relay outputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 e g RO1 Coil 33 Write Single 0x06 Write single holding register For the ACS550 the entire Holding Register parameter set is mapped as holding registers as well as command status and reference values Diagnostics 0x08 Perform Modbus diagnostics Subcodes for Query 0x00 Restart 0x01 amp Listen Only 0x04 are supported Force Multiple Coils OxOF Write multiple discrete outputs For the ACS550 the individual bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1 16 Relay outputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 e g RO1 Coil 33 Write Multiple 0x10 Write multiple holding registers For the ACS550 the entire Holding Registers parameter set is mapped as holding registers as well as command status and reference values Read Write Multiple 0x17 This function combines functions 0x03 and 0x10 into a single command Embedded fieldbus 216 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Mapping summary The following table summarizes the mapping between the ACS550 parameters and 1 0 and Modbus reference space For details see Modbus addressing below ACS550 Modbus reference Supported function codes Control Bits Coils 0xxxx 01 Read Coil Status Relay Outputs 05 Force Si
345. nt Category C3 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class second environment unrestricted distribution Compliance with the IEC EN 61800 3 2004 A1 2012 The immunity performance of the drive complies with the demands of IEC EN 61800 3 category C2 see page 311 for IEC EN 61800 3 definitions The emission limits of IEC EN 61800 3 comply with the provisions described below First environment drives of category C2 1 The internal EMC filter is connected 2 The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual 3 4 The motor cable length does not exceed the allowed maximum length specified in The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual section Motor cable length for 400 V drives on page 290 for the frame size and switching frequency in use Technical data 312 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual WARNING In a domestic environment this product may cause radio inference in which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required Second environment drives of category C3 1 The internal EMC filter is connected 2 The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual 3 4 The motor cable length does not exceed the allowed maximum length specified in The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual section Motor cable length for 400 V drives on page 290 for the frame size and switching frequency in
346. nt Control Panel 64 Basic Control Panel 75 parity RS 232 183 errors count parameter 183 PE earth earth fault 150 PE earth connection terminal Size rex ee ear ee ee 286 erus rue 286 peak value logging see load analyzer PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage 29 PFC control parameter group 189 acceleration time parameter 200 aux start order parameter 200 aux motor start delay parameter 191 aux motor stop delay parameter 191 deceleration time parameter 200 enable 199 low frequency parameters 191 Machos esis S 84 number of aux motors parameter 192 number of motors parameter 200 reference step parameters 189 start delay parameter 199 start frequency parameters 190 Index ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual PID process sets parameter groups external trimming parameter group 0 actual signal parameter 100 actual signal parameter actual input select parameters actual value max parameters actual value min parameters adjustment
347. ntrol flow control etc To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 6 PID CONTROL Note Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting OFF Connection example x1 1 10 kohnm41 SCR Signal cable shield screen ot 2 External ref 1 Manual or Ext ref 2 PID 0 10 yt 3 3 AGND Analog input circuit common Note 1 4 HOY Reference voltage 10 V DC Manual 0 10V gt speed reference D gt 5 2 Actual signal PID 4 20 mA PID 0 10V gt 0 100 PID 6 AGND Analog input circuit common setpoint DH H7 A01 Motor output speed 0 20 mA D 8 2 Output current 0 20 mA Note 3 9 AGND Analog output circuit common The sensor for Al2 is powered exter nally See the manufacturer s instruc 10124V Auxiliary voltage output 24 tions To use sensors supplied by the 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common drive aux voltage output see page 86 12 DCOM Digital input common for all 13 DI1 Start Stop Hand Activation starts the drive 14 DI2 EXT1 EXT2 selection Activation selects PID control 15 DI3 Constant speed selection 1 Not used in PID control 16 014 Constant speed selection 2 Not used in PID control 17 015 Run enable Deactivation
348. o install the appropriate cable lugs For drives using braking optional refer to the following as appropriate Frame size Terminal Description Braking accessory R1 R2 BRK BRK Braking resistor Braking resistor See section Brake components on page 295 R3 R4 R5 R6 UDC UDC DC bus Contact your ABB representative to order either braking unit or chopper and resistor When installing control wiring refer to the following chapters or sections as appropriate Control terminals table on page 28 Control connections on page 299 Application macros on page 77 Complete parameter descriptions on page 106 Embedded fieldbus on page 203 Fieldbus adapter on page 237 Installation ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Power connection diagrams 25 The following diagram shows the terminal layout for frame size R3 which in general applies to frame sizes R1 R6 except for the R5 R6 power and ground terminals J1 J1 DIP switches for analog inputs two types can be used J1 f 11 in voltage position Al2 in current position DC lo 2 X1 Analog inputs and outputs and 10 V ref voltage output X1 Digital inputs and 24 V aux voltage output X1 Relay outputs Frame sizes R5 R6 differ See next page J2 DIP switch for
349. ohm 22118 AGND Analog input circuit common connected internally to chassis through 1 Mohm 9 4 10V Potentiometer reference source 10 V 2 max 10 mA 1 kohm lt R lt 10 kohm 9 5 AI2 Analog input channel 2 programmable Default not used Resolution 0 1 9 accuracy 1 Two different DIP switch types be used J1 Al2 OFF 0 10 V Rj 312 kohm 2 9 J1 12 ON 0 20 mA R 100 ohm 1 de 6 AGND Analog input circuit common connected internally to chassis gnd through 1 Mohm AO1 Analog output programmable Default frequency 0 20 mA load 500 ohm Accuracy 396 8 AO2 Analog output programmable Default 7 current 0 20 mA load 500 ohm Accuracy 396 9 AGND Analog output circuit common connected internally to chassis gnd through 1 Mohm 10 24 Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 250 mA reference to GND short circuit protected 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common connected internally as floating 12 DCOM Digital input common To activate a digital input there must be gt 10 V or lt 10 V between that input and DCOM The 24 V be provided by the n ACS550 X1 10 or by an external 12 24 V source of either polarity a 13 DI1 Digital input 1 programmable Default start stop T 14 DI2 Digital input 2 programmable Default fwd rev 15 DI3 Digital input 3 programmable Default constant speed sel code 16
350. oise on page 301 The distance between the motor and the drive is limited by the maximum motor cable length See section Motor connection specifications on page 289 The mounting site must support the drive s modest weight See section Weight on page 306 Installation 20 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Installing the drive WARNING Before installing the ACS550 ensure the input power supply to the drive is off For flange mounting mounting the drive in a cooling air duct see the appropriate Flange Mounting Instructions IP21 UL type 1 IP54 UL type 12 Kit Code English Kit Code English R1 FMK A R1 100000982 FMK B R1 100000990 R2 FMK A R2 100000984 FMK B R2 100000992 R3 FMK A R3 100000986 FMK B R3 100000994 R4 FMK A R4 100000988 FMK B R4 100000996 R5 AC8 FLNGMT R5 1 ACS800 PNTG01U R6 AC8 FLNGMT R6 1 1 Not available in ACS550 01 series Prepare the mounting location The ACS550 should only be mounted where all of the requirements defined in section Preparing for installation on page 76 are met 1 Mark the position of the mounting holes with the help of 1 the mounting template provided with the drive 2 Drill the holes X0002 Note Frame sizes R3 and R4 have four holes along the top Use only two If possible use the two outside holes to allow room to remove the fan for maintenance Note ACS400 drives can
351. ol cables The cable seals are cone shaped rubber seals on the bottom of the drive The conical part of the seals must face downwards when the seals are inserted in the lead through plate holes 2 On the input power cable strip the sheathing back far enough to route individual wires 3 On the motor cable strip the sheathing back far enough to expose the copper wire shield so that the shield can be twisted into a bundle pig tail Keep the bundle not longer than five times its width to minimize noise radiation 360 grounding under the clamp is recommended for the motor cable to minimize noise radiation In this case remove the sheathing at the cable clamp 4 Route both cables through the clamps and tighten the clamps 5 Strip and connect the power motor wires and the power ground wire to the drive terminals See the table on the right for tightening torques 33 IP5003 RO a T i 7 IP5004 Frame Tightening torque Size lb ft R1 R2 14 1 R3 2 5 1 8 R4 5 6 PE 2 4 PE 1 5 R5 15 11 R6 40 PE 8 30 6 Note For R6 frame size refer to section Power terminal considerations R6 frame size on page 287 6 Connect the bundle pig tail created from the motor cable shield to the GND terminal 7 Strip control cable sheathing and twist the copper shi
352. on EFB the power source A WARNING Connections should be made only while the drive is disconnected from Drive terminals 28 32 are for RS485 communications Use Belden 9842 or equivalent Belden 9842 is a dual twisted shielded pair cable with a wave impedance of 120 ohm Use one of these twisted shielded pairs for the RS485 link Use this pair to connect all A terminals together and all B terminals together Use one of the wires in the other pair for the logical ground terminal 31 leaving one wire unused Do not directly ground the RS485 network at any point Ground all devices on the network using their corresponding earthing terminals As always the grounding wires should not form any closed loops and all the devices should be earthed to a common ground Connect the RS485 link in a daisy chained bus without dropout lines Embedded fieldbus ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 205 To reduce noise on the network terminate the RS485 network using 120 resistors at both ends of the network Use the DIP switch to connect or disconnect the termination resistors See the following diagram Terminated Terminated station Station Station station 00000 00000 00000 00000 Drive RS485 Terminal block X1 c c se 2 3 Note 1 8 gt amp ON ON z z X amp B E 28 29 30 32
353. on page 106 The general parameter setting procedure is described below for the Basic Control Panel You find more detailed instructions for the Basic Control Panel on page 73 Instructions for the Assistant Control Panel are on page 55 The general parameter setting procedure 1 To go to the Main menu press X if the bottom line shows OUTPUT otherwise press 77 repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom 2 Press keys A K v 7 until you see PAr and press 3 Find the appropriate parameter group with Keys a Y 2 and press 4 Find the appropriate parameter the group with Keys K w 2 5 Press and hold X for about two seconds until the parameter value is shown with under the value 6 Change the value with keys 2 The value changes faster while you keep the key pressed down 7 Save the parameter value by pressing 00 OUTPUT FWD REM I CHOICE Do you want to use the start up assistant NO EXIT 00 00 OK REM EDIT 9901 LANGUAGE ENGLISH 0 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE PEF 01 2001 2002 _1290 1600 2002 Start up control with I O and ID Run ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 39 i REM parameter setting procedure is given above The default value 1 ABB STANDARD is suitable in most cases Select the motor control mode
354. opagated to neighboring low voltage networks In some cases the natural suppression in transformers and cables is sufficient If in doubt use a supply transformer with static screening between the primary and secondary windings Do NOT install an external RFI EMC filter Using an EMC filter grounds the input power through the filter capacitors which could be dangerous and could damage the drive Drive s power connection terminals The following table provides specifications for the drive s power connection terminals Note See the recommended cable sizes for different load currents in section nput power cables wiring on page 284 U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 Earthing PE terminal Frame BRK UDC terminals size Minimum Maximum Tightening Maximum Tightening wire size wire size torque wire size torque mm AWG mm AWG Ib ft mm AWG Nm Ib ft R1 0 75 18 10 8 1 4 1 10 8 1 4 1 R2 0 75 18 10 8 1 4 1 10 8 1 4 1 R3 2 5 14 25 3 2 5 1 8 16 6 1 8 1 3 R4 6 10 50 1 0 5 6 4 25 3 2 R5 6 10 70 2 0 15 11 70 2 0 15 11 R6 951 3 0 240 350 MCM 40 30 95 3 0 8 6 00467918 xls 1 See section Power terminal considerations R6 frame size on page 287 Technical data ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 287 Power terminal considerations R6 frame size WARNING For R6 power terminals if screw on terminal lugs are supplied they can only be used for wire sizes
355. or control mode 106 serial 1 error fault code 28 214 serial 1 error fault code 263 serial communication see EFB embedded fieldbus see EFB drive parameters see FBA fieldbus adapter see FBA drive parameters serial 16 17 SetvI CO coetu eda SEES 325 setpoint maximum PID parameter 173 setpoint minimum PID parameter 173 setpoint select PID parameter 172 shock stress testing 307 short circuit fault code 261 single phase supply connection 23 derating us e RA 280 sleep selection PID parameter 174 slip compensation ratio parameter 146 soft keys Assistant Control Panel 48 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual specifications control connections 299 input 281 mains it a ee dur 281 speed and direction signed data parameter 108 at fault history parameter 114 data 108 max limit 133 min limit 133 speed control parameter 141 acceleration compensation parameter 142 automatic tuning parameter 141 142 derivation time parameter
356. or each frame size Variations within each frame size due to components associated with voltage current ratings and options are minor Weight Enclosure R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 kg Ib kg Ib kg Ib kg Ib kg Ib kg Ib IP21 ULtype1 6 5 14 3 9 0 19 8 16 35 24 53 34 75 69 152 IP54 UL type 12 8 0 17 6 11 0 24 3 17 0 37 5 26 0 57 3 42 0 93 0 86 0 190 00467918 xls C 1 ACS550 x1 221A 2 IP21 UL type 1 70 kg 154 Ib 5550 1 246 4 IP21 UL type 1 70 kg 154 Ib ACS550 x1 248A 2 IP21 UL type 1 80 kg 176 Ib 5550 01 290 4 IP21 UL type 1 80 kg 176 Ib 2 ACS550 x1 246A 4 IP54 UL type 12 80 kg 176 Ib ACS550 01 290A 4 IP54 90 kg 198 Ib UL type 12 not available Degrees of protection Available enclosures P21 UL type 1 enclosure The site must be free of airborne dust corrosive gases or liquids and conductive contaminants such as condensation carbon dust and metallic particles P54 UL type 12 enclosure This enclosure provides protection from airborne dust and light sprays or splashing water from all directions Note UL type 12 enclosure is not available for type ACS550 01 290A 4 Compared to the IP21 UL type 1 enclosure the IP54 UL type 12 enclosure has the same internal plastic shell as the IP21 enclosure different outer plastic cover an additional internal fan to improve cooling larger d
357. orner of the drive At the motor end the motor cable shield must be earthed 360 degrees with an EMC cable gland or the shield wires must be twisted together into a bundle pig tail not longer than five times its width and connected to the PE terminal of the motor See section Motor cable length for 400 V drives columns EMC limits on page 290 to check the maximum motor cable lengths and the need for filters for 400 V drives for IEC EN 61800 3 compliance N WARNING Do not use RFI EMC filters on IT systems Technical data ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 295 Brake components Availability Braking availability for ACS550 drives by frame size is R1 and R2 a built in brake chopper is standard equipment Add appropriate resistor as determined using the following section Resistors are available from ABB R3 R6 does not include an internal brake chopper Connect a chopper and a resistor or a brake unit to the DC link terminals on the drive Contact your ABB representative for appropriate parts Selecting the braking resistors frame sizes R1 and R2 Braking resistor must meet three requirements Resistance must be always higher than the minimum value defined for the drive type in the following tables Never use resistance below this value Resistance must be low enough to be able to produce the desired braking torque To achieve the maximum braking torque the larger of 15096 of heavy duty or 1
358. ot shown any more If the ID Run fails the fault display presented on the right is shown ID RUN WITH THE BASIC CONTROL PANEL Change parameter 9910 ID RUN to 1 ON Save the new setting by pressing If you want to monitor actual values during the ID Run go to the Output mode by pressing 77 repeatedly until you get there Press to start the ID Run The panel keeps switching between the display that was shown when you started the ID Run and the alarm display presented on the right In general it is recommended not to press any control panel keys during the ID Run However you can stop the ID Run at any time by pressing CQ After the ID Run is completed the alarm display is not shown any more If the ID Run fails the fault display presented on the right is shown ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual LOC UPAR EDIT 9910 ID RUN 1 CANCEL 1 00 00 SAVE 0 0 Hz 0 0 A 0 0 96 DIR 00 00 MENU LOC I ALARM ALARM 2019 ID run 00 00 LOC v LOC C FAULT FAULT 11 ID RUN FAIL 00 00 9910 PAR FWD LOC 1 PAR FWD i 00 OUTPUT FwD A2019 FWD F0011 Start up control with I O and ID Run ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 47 Control panels About control panels Use a control panel to control the drive read status data and adjust parameters The drive works with either of two diff
359. otation direction 15 DI3 EXT1 EXT2 Selection Activation selects auto control 16 DI4 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 17 DI5 Forward Reverse Auto Activation reverses rotation direction 18 DI6 Start Stop Auto Activation starts the drive 19 1 Relay output 1 programmable 20 Default operation 21 RO1B Ready gt 19 connected to 21 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable Note 1 23 RO2A Default operation The sensor for AI2 is powered 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 externally See the manufacturer s 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable instructions To use sensors 26 RO3A A Default operation supplied by the drive aux voltage 27 Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 f output see page 86 Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Two analog references 11 2 Analog output AO1 Speed J1 Start stop hand auto D11 6 Analog output AO2 Current 9 Al1 0 10 V Direction hand auto Control location selec Run enable D14 DI2 5 Relay output 1 Ready 9 AI2 0 4 20 mA tion DI3 Relay output 2 Running or Relay output 3 Fault 1 141 g A 1 0 10 V 327 AI2 0 4 20 mA Application macros ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 83 PID Control macro This macro provides parameter settings for closed loop control systems such as pressure co
360. otors in the system Using the delay the drive works as follows e Switches on the contactor of the speed regulated motor connecting the motor to the ACS550 power output Delays motor start for the time 8122 PFC START DELAY Starts the speed regulated motor Starts auxiliary motors See parameter 8115 for delay A WARNING Motors equipped with star delta starters require a PFC Start Delay e After the ACS550 relay output switches a motor on the star delta starter must switch to the star connection and then back to the delta connection before the drive applies power e So the PFC Start Delay must be longer than the time setting of the star delta starter 8123 IPFC ENABLE Selects PFC control When enabled PFC control e Switches in or out auxiliary constant speed motors as output demand increases or decreases Parameters 8109 START FREQ 1 to 8114 LOW FREQ 3 define the switch points in terms of the drive output frequency Adjusts the speed regulated motor output down as auxiliary motors are added and adjusts the speed regulated motor output up as auxiliary motors are taken off line Provides Interlock functions if enabled Requires 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ 0 NOT SEL Disables PFC control 1 ACTIVE Enables PFC control Parameters 200 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Description 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP Sets the PFC acceleration time for a zero to maximum frequency
361. oup defines a set of parameters used with the Process PID PID1 controller Typically only parameters in this group are needed PID controller Basic set up In PID control mode the drive compares a reference signal setpoint to an actual signal feedback and automatically adjusts the speed of the drive to match the two signals The difference between the two signals is the error value Typically PID control mode is used when the speed of a motor needs to be controlled based on pressure flow or temperature In most cases when there is only 1 transducer signal wired to the ACS550 only parameter group 40 is needed The following is a schematic of setpoint feedback signal flow using parameter group 40 Panel REF1 P 1101 Panel REF 2 5 56 REF1 0 17 REF2 a Panel REF2 309 PID Setpoint 20 21 500 19 Al P4016 G40 Current 4 PID1 LOC REM o ae selection A P4017 P4014 1P4015F LOC Current 4 Torque PID Act Value BER Power Panel REF 1 1103 PIU DI eg P1104 ae Al Speed P1105 Comm REF 1 EXT 2
362. output speed 0 20 mA 2 Output current 0 20 mA 9 AGND Analog output circuit common r 41 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC r 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 112 0 Digital input common for all 13 DI1 Start stop Activation starts the drive 14 DI2 Forward reverse Activation reverses rotation direction 15 DI3 Reference up Activation increases the reference 16 014 Reference down Activation decreases the reference 17 015 Constant speed 1 1202 18 DIG Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A A Default operation 21lRO1B l Ready gt 19 connected to 21 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable Note 1 For DI3 and 014 23 RO2A Default operation 24 IRO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable f both are active or inactive the speed reference is unchanged The existing speed reference is E 26 RO3A Default operation 27 ROSB Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 stored during stop power down Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Note 2 Settings of the ramp times with acceleration and deceleration time 2 parameters 2205 and 2206 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Start stop and direction DI1 2 Analog output A
363. p Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST is through digital input DI5 DI5 activated Reverse de activated Forward 8 KEYPAD Control Panel Start Stop and Direction commands are through the control panel when EXT1 is active Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST 9 DI1F 2R Start Stop Direction commands through 011 and 012 combinations Start forward 011 activated 012 de activated Start reverse DI1 de activated and DI2 activated Stop both 011 and 012 activated or both de activated Requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST 10 Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start stop and direction commands Bits 0 1 2 of Command Word 1 parameter 0301 activates the start stop and direction commands See Fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions Parameters 116 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Description 11 TIMED FUNC 1 Assigns Start Stop control to Timed Function 1 Timed Function activated START Timed Function de activated STOP See Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 12 14 TIMED FUNC 2 4 Assigns Start Stop control to Timed Function 2 4 See TIMED FUNC 1 above 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS Defines external control location 2 2 the configuration of start stop and direction commands See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS above 1003 DIRECTION Defines the control of motor
364. p mode no op STPMODE_C Coast stop mode no op 10 RAMP 2 Ramp pair 2 Ramp pair 1 11 RAMP OUT 0 Ramp output to 0 no op 12 RAMP HOLD Ramp freeze no op 13 RAMP IN 0 Ramp input to 0 no op 14 RREQ LOCALL Local mode lock In lock drive will not switch to local mode 15 TORQLIM2 Torque limit pair 2 Oo oj Oj SA oj oj oO Torque limit pair 1 DCU profile CONTROL WORD See parameter 0302 Bit Name Value Function Comments 16 26 Reserved 27 REF_CONST purposes 28 REF_AVE Average speed ref no op Constant speed ref These bits are only for supervision 29 O O LINK_ON Master is detected in link 0 Link is down 30 REQ_STARTINH Start inhibit request is pending 0 Start inhibit request is OFF 31 OFF_INTERLOCK Panel OFF button For the control panel or PC tool this is pressed the OFF button interlock 0 no op Status Word The contents of the STATUS WORD is status information sent by the drive to the master station Embedded fieldbus 228 ABB Drives profile ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the STATUS WORD content for the ABB Drives profile ABB Dri
365. panel to change parameter values The lock can be opened by entering the valid pass code to parameter 1603 1 OPEN You can use the control panel to change parameter values 2 NOT SAVED You can use the control panel to change parameter values but they are not stored in permanent memory Set parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE to 1 SAVE to store changed parameter values to memory 1603 PASS CODE Entering the correct pass code allows you to change the parameter lock See parameter 1602 above The code 358 allows you to change the value of the parameter 1602 once This entry reverts back to 0 automatically 1604 FAULT RESET SEL Selects the source for the fault reset signal The signal resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists KEYPAD Defines the control panel as the only fault reset source Fault reset is always possible with control panel 1 011 Defines digital input DI1 as a fault reset source Activating the digital input resets the drive 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as a fault reset source See DI1 above 7 START STOP Defines the Stop command as a fault reset source Do not use this option when fieldbus communication provides the start stop and direction commands 8 COMM Defines the fieldbus as a fault reset source The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The bit 4 of the Command Word 1 parameter
366. panels ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual How to get help 51 Step Action Display Press to read the context sensitive help text for the item that is highlighted If help text exists for the item it is shown on the display LOC UPAR GROUPS 10 01 OPERATING DATA 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS 04 FAULT HISTORY 10 START STOP DIR REFERENCE SELECT EXIT 00 00 SEL LOC HELP This group defines external sources and EXT2 for commands that enable start stop and EXIT 00 00 If the whole text is not visible scroll the lines with keys and amp v P LOC HELP external sources 1 and EXT2 for commands that enable start stop and direction changes EXIT 00 00 EXIT After reading the text return to the previous display by pressing 77 LOC UPAR GROUPS 10 01 OPERATING DATA 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS 04 FAULT HISTORY 10 START STOP DIR 11 REFERENCE SELECT EXIT 00 00 SEL How to find out the panel version Step Action Display If the power is switched on switch it off Keep key pressed down while you switch on the power and read the information The display shows the following panel information Panel FW panel firmware version ROM CRC panel ROM check sum Flash Rev flash content version Flash content comment When you release the key the panel goes to the Output mode PANEL VERSION INFO
367. parameter ramp shape parameter ramp time PFC parameter ramp zero select parameter time activate external PID parameter actual input PID parameters actual max PID parameters actual min PID parameters actual values mapping generic profile scaling EFB scaling FBA scaling ABB drives profile scaling FBA generic profile alarm codes Basic Control Panel display enable parameter listin words data parameters alternate altitude erating 2 2 2 0 22 0 ee environment limit shipping limit ambient conditions 313 ambient temperature erating meter oak as 280 environment limit 307 shipping limit 307 amplitude logging see load analyzer analog cable requirements 300 analog I O connectlons c 4 9 ILA 28 specifications 28 analog input parameter 123 data 109 fault limit 150 filter parameters 1
368. parameter 9904 9 0 4 1 VECTOR SPEED is suitable in most cases 2 VECTOR TORQ is suitable for PAR FWD torque control applications 3 SCALAR FREQ is recommended Select the application macro parameter 9902 The general 9 0 2 FWD for multimotor drives when the number of the motors connected to the drive is variable when the nominal current of the motor is less than 2096 of the nominal current of the drive when the drive is used for test purposes with no motor connected Enter the motor data from the motor nameplate Note Set the motor data to gt ue exactly the same value as on the motor nameplate For ABB Motors C i example if the motor nominal 2 MZAA ZOO MLA 4 speed is 1470 rpm on the No nameplate setting the value of F 55 parameter 9908 MOTOR NOM v__ Hz kw A cos g an tE s SPEED to 1500 rpm results in the 690Y 50 30 1475 32 5 0 83 4000 50 30 1475 56 083 wrong operation of the drive 660 50 30 1470 083 380 V 3800 50 30 7470 59 083 supply 415D 50 30 1475 54 0 83 440D 60 35 1770 59 0 83 voltage Cat no 3GAA 202 001 ADA 6312 C3 6210 C3 180 kg e IEC 34 1 O motor nominal voltage parameter 9905 e 9 9 0 D PAR FWD mo
369. provided by enclosures IP code IEC 60664 1 2002 Insulation coordination for equipment within low voltage systems Part 1 Principles requirements and tests IEC EN 61800 5 1 2007 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 5 1 Safety requirements Electrical thermal and energy IEC EN 61800 3 2004 A1 2012 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC requirements and specific test methods IEC EN 61000 3 12 2011 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Part 3 12 Limits Limits for harmonic currents produced by equipment connected to public low voltage systems with input current gt 16 A and 75 A per phase IEC EN 61800 3 2004 A1 2012 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC requirements and specific test methods UL 508C UL Standard for Safety Power Conversion Equipment third edition LISTED C22 2 No 14 CSA Standard for Industrial Control Equipment for ACS550 U1 drives only Markings CE marking C A CE mark is attached to the drive to verify that the drive follows the provisions of the European Low Voltage EMC and RoHS Directives Note The 600 V ACS550 U1 drives not CE approved Compliance with the European Low Voltage Directive The compliance with the European Low Voltage Directive has been verified according to standards IEC EN 60204 1 2005 and EN 50178 1997 Compliance with the European EMC Directive
370. r See parameter 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 0178 SAVED CO2 Reduction on carbon dioxide emissions in tn See the note on page 180 The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 6553 5 the counter does not roll over Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET resets all energy calculators at the same time CO2 conversion factor is set with parameter 4507 CO2 CONV FACTOR See Group 45 ENERGY SAVING Parameters 112 Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS This group monitors fieldbus communications ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Description 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 Read only copy of the Fieldbus Bit 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 Command Word 1 The fieldbus command is the principal STO means for controlling the drive from 1 START FBLOCAL_REF fieldbus controller The command 2 IREVERSE START DISABLE1 consists of two Command Words Bit coded instructions in the Command 3 LOCAL START DISABLE2 Words switch the drive between 4 RESET Reserved states To control the drive using the 5 Reserved Command Words an external location 6 RUN_DISABLE Reserved EXT1 or EXT2 must be active and set 7 STPMODE R Reserved to COMM S ters 1001 and eye ee 8 STPMODE_EM Reserved The control panel displays the word in 9 STPMODE Reserved h
371. r 9902 APPLIC MACRO see section User parameter sets on page 88 and then uploaded to panel copy USER S2 parameters from the control panel to the drive dL u2 Download User Set 2 As dL u1 Download User Set 1 above start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control Control panels 76 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual How to upload and download parameters For the upload and download functions available see above Step Action Display Al Go to the Main menu by pressing X if you are in the Output mode Loc otherwise by pressing 77 repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom PA P MENU WD 2 If the panel is not the Copy mode CoPY not visible press key A LOC or S w 2 until you see CoPY C PY MENU id dL ul MENU 3 upload all parameters including user sets from the drive to the control Loc panel step to uL with keys A and S w 2 U L MENU FWI Press X During the transfer the display shows the transfer status asa 10 L 5 0 percentage of completion To perform downloads step to the appropriate operation here dL A LOC d L A Download All is used as an example with keys and amp MENU Press X During the transfer the display shows the transfer status asa OC d L 5 0 x percentage of completion Basic Control Panel alarm codes In addition
372. r identification If the speed limits are notin 9970 the allowed range Setting the limits Application Selecting the application macro 9902 parameters associated to the macro Option modules Activating the option modules Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS Group 52 PANEL COMM 9802 Speed control EXT1 Selecting the source for the speed reference If AI1 is used Setting analog input AI1 limits scale inversion Setting the reference limits Setting the speed frequency limits Setting the acceleration and deceleration times 1103 1301 1303 3001 1104 1105 2001 2002 2007 2008 2202 2203 Speed control Selecting the source for the speed reference 1106 EXT2 If 11 is used Setting analog input AI1 limits scale inversion 1301 1303 3001 Setting the reference limits 1107 1108 Torque control Selecting the source for the torque reference 1106 If AI1 is used Setting analog input AI1 limits scale inversion 1301 1303 3001 Setting the reference limits 1107 1108 Setting the torque ramp up and ramp down times 2401 2402 PID control Selecting the source for the process reference 1106 If AI1 is used Setting analog input AI1 limits scale inversion 1301 1303 3001 Setting the reference limits 1107 1108 Setting the speed reference limits Setting the source and limits for the process actual value 2001 2002 2007 2008 4016 4018 4019 Start Stop control Select
373. r settings related to I O terminals To save the new value press Ew CANCEL To cancel the new value and keep the original press CZ Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing xu if you are in the Output mode otherwise LOC U MAIN MENU 1 by pressing repeatedly until you get to the Main menu PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER 2 Go the I O Settings mode by selecting SETTINGS on the menu with keys LOC _UI O_ SETTINGS 1 and S 2 and pressing wl ANALOG INPUTS AI RELAY OUTPUTS du ANALOG OUTPUTS AOUT PANEL EXIT 00 00 SEL 3 Select the I O group e g DIGITAL INPUTS with keys and amp Y 2 and LOC UI O SETTINGS press wl After a brief pause the display shows the current settings for the STOP selection 2 DI3 EXIT 00 00 4 Select the setting line with a parameter number with keys A and 2 LOC UPAR EDIT EDIT and press 1001 COMMANDS 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 5 Specify a new value for the setting with keys A and amp w 2 LOC UPAR EDIT Pressing the key once increments or decrements the value Holding the key 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS down changes the value faster Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed value with the default value 2 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 6 SAVE LOC cries SETTINGS 1001 START STOP El DI2 005 PIR 1 E
374. ramp This PFC acceleration ramp Applies to the speed regulated motor when an auxiliary motor is switched off Replaces the acceleration ramp defined in Group 22 ACCEL DECEL Applies only until the output of the regulated motor increases by an amount equal to the output of the switched off auxiliary motor Then the acceleration ramp defined in Group 22 ACCEL DECEL applies NOT SEL 0 1 1800 Activates this function using the value entered as the acceleration time 8125 DEC IN AUX START Sets the PFC deceleration time for a maximum to zero speed regulated motor accelerating using Group 22 frequency ramp This PFC deceleration ramp ACCEL DECEL parameters 2202 or 2205 Applies to the speed regulated motor when an auxiliary B speed regulated motor decelerating using Group motor is switched on 22 ACCEL DECEL parameters 2203 or 2206 Replaces the deceleration ramp defined in Group 22 At aux motor start speed regulated motor decelerates ACCEL DECEL using 8125 DEC IN AUX START Applies only until the output of the regulated motor At aux motor stop speed regulated motor accelerates decreases by an amount equal to the output of the using 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP auxiliary motor Then the deceleration ramp defined in Group 22 ACCEL DECEL applies NOT SEL 0 1 1800 Activates this function using the value entered as the deceleration time 8126 TIM
375. ration Note 1 Code 21 RO1B H Ready gt 19 connected to 21 0 open 1 connected 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable 23 RO2A Default operation DIS 014 Output 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 2410 0 Reference through 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable T 0 SPEED 1 1202 26 RO3A A Default operation 0 1 SPEED 2 1203 27 RO3B Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 7 1 CONST SPEED 1204 Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Analog reference Al1 Analog output AO1 Speed J1 Start stop and direction DI1 2 Constant speed selection DI3 4 Ramp pair 1 2 selection DI5 Run enable DI6 Analog output AO2 Current 9 11 0 10 V Relay output 1 Ready 9 gt Al2 0 4 20 mA Relay output 2 Running or Relay output 3 Fault 1 AI 0 10 V 2 0 4 20 mA J1 Application macros ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 81 Motor Potentiometer macro This macro provides a cost effective interface for PLCs that vary the speed of the motor using only digital signals To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 4 MOTOR POT Connection example 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 AM Not used 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC 5 AI2 Not used 6 7 8 AGND Analog input circuit common 1 Motor
376. re full motor power is required oversize the drive so that the derated value provides sufficient capacity For example if your application requires 15 4 A of motor current and a 8 kHz switching frequency calculate the appropriate drive size requirement as follows The minimum size required 15 4 A 0 80 19 25 A Where 0 80 is the derating for 8 kHz switching frequency see section Switching frequency derating on page 280 Referring to lzy in the ratings tables starting from page 277 the following drives exceed the oy requirement of 19 25 A ACS550 x1 023A 4 or ACS550 x1 024A 2 Temperature derating In the temperature range 40 50 C 104 F 122 F the rated output current is decreased 1 for every 1 C 1 8 F above 40 C 104 F Calculate the output current by multiplying the current given in the rating table by the derating factor Example If the ambient temperature is 50 C 122 F the derating factor is 100 1 10 C 90 or 0 90 The output current is then 0 90 oy or 0 90 ong Altitude derating In altitudes 1000 4000 m 3300 13 200 ft above sea level the derating is 196 for every 100 m 330 ft If the installation site is higher than 2000 m 6600 ft above sea level contact your local ABB representative for further information Single phase supply derating For 208 240 V series drives a single phase supply can be used In that case the derating is 50 Switc
377. reated by the ID Run view the information about the backup stored to the control panel with UPLOAD TO PANEL BACKUP INFO This includes e g the type and rating of the drive where the backup was made It is useful to check this information when you are going to copy the parameters to another drive with DOWNLOAD FULL SET to ensure that the drives match restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive DOWNLOAD FULL SET This writes all parameters including the internal non user adjustable motor parameters to the drive It does not include the user sets of parameters Note Only use this function to restore a drive from a backup or to transfer parameters to systems that are identical to the original system copy a partial parameter set part of the full set from the control panel to a drive DOWNLOAD APPLICATION The partial set does not include user sets internal motor parameters parameters 9905 9909 1605 1607 5201 nor any Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE and Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters The source and target drives and their motor sizes do not need to be the same copy USER S1 parameters from the control panel to the drive DOWNLOAD USER SET1 A user set includes Group 99 START UP DATA parameters the internal motor parameters The function is only shown on the menu when User Set 1 has been first saved using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO see section User parameter sets on page 88 and then uploaded to
378. riods 3 and 4 selected in the timer 13 T1 13 74 Time Periods 1 3 and 4 selected in the timer 14 T2 T3 T4 Time Periods 2 3 and 4 selected the timer 15 T1 T2 T3 14 Time Periods 1 2 3 and 4 selected in the timer 16 BOOSTER Booster selected in the timer 17 T1 B Booster and Time Period 1 selected in the timer 18 T2 B Booster and Time Period 2 selected in the timer 19 1 2 Booster and Time Periods 1 and 2 selected in the timer 20 T3 B Booster and Time Period 3 selected in the timer Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 165 Code Description 21 1 3 Booster and Time Periods 1 and 3 selected in the timer 22 T2 T3 B Booster and Time Periods 2 and 3 selected the timer 23 T1 T2 T3 B Booster and Time Periods 1 2 and 3 selected in the timer 24 T4 B Booster and Time Period 4 selected in the timer 25 1 4 Booster and Time Periods 1 and 4 selected in the timer 26 2 4 Booster and Time Periods 2 and 4 selected in the timer 27 T1 T2 T4 B Booster and Time Periods 1 2 and 4 selected in the timer 28 T3 T4 B Booster and Time Periods 3 and 4 selected in the timer 29 1 3 4 Booster and Time Periods 1 3 and 4 selected the timer 30 T2 T3 T4 B Booster and Time Periods 2 3 and 4 selected in the timer 31 1 2 3 4 Booster and Time Periods 1 2 3 and 4 selec
379. rive permanent memory and restored automatically after power switch off Control panels ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Parameter mode In the Parameter mode you can view and change parameter values select and modify the signals shown in the Output mode 73 start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to select a parameter and change its value cancel the new value and keep the original press 777 Step Action Display i Bs Go to the Main menu by pressing X if you are in the Output mode LOC otherwise by pressing 77 repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom E MENU FWD 2 If the panel is not in the Parameter mode not visible press key LOC A or 7 until you see and then press 57 The display PA r shows the number of one of the parameter groups MENU FWD 92 FWD 3 Use keys and amp Y 2 to find the desired parameter group LOC 1 1 FWD 4 Press The display shows one of the parameters in the selected LOC group PAR FWD 5 Use keys and amp v 2 to find the desired parameter LOC 1 1 O 3 PAR FWD 6 Press and hold 5 for about two seconds until the display shows the LOC value of the parameter with underneath indicating that changing of the value is now possible PAR FWD Note When is visible pr
380. rol profiles technical 224 Fieldbus adapter occi ve Reate od pear eet estis 237 Planning ase santen RAE EET LERRA ERE 239 Mechanical and electrical installation FBA 240 Communication set up 241 Activate drive control functions 241 Feedback from the drive FBA 244 Diagnostics FBA REA eem api 245 ABB Drives profile technical data 248 Generic profile technical data 256 Diagnostics Diagnostic displays iuo paea qr EP Mp tee pu ERUNT iR E 259 Correcting faults 4 Ru EA m ra ds 260 Gortrectinig alartms petu Paling or mod Wee x 266 Maintenance Maintenance intervals 271 Heatsink EDS 271 Main fan replacement 272 Internal enclosure fan replacement 274 Cap citots sud dep hee ten eeu order ductus ebd E Bl FON ped om d 275 Control panel usse RE ERE Yap ex e en P Ea 275 Technical data RatinGS ALT 277 Input power connections 281 Motor connectlons
381. rolling System Fieldbus adapter 240 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Mechanical and electrical installation WARNING Connections should be made only while the drive is disconnected from the power source Overview Mounting procedure 4 Route the network cable through the cable clamp 5 Connect the network cable to the module s network Insert the module carefully into the drive expansion slot 2 The FBA fieldbus adapter is a plug in module that fits in the drive s expansion slot 2 The module is held in place with plastic retaining clips and two screws The screws also ground the shield for the module cable and connect the module GND signals to the drive control board On installation of the module electrical connection to the drive is automatically established through the 34 pin connector Note Install the input power and motor cables first until the retaining clips lock the module into position Fasten the two screws included to the stand offs Note Correct installation of the screws is essential for fulfilling the EMC requirements and for proper operation of the module 7 X00301 Open the appropriate knockout in the conduit box and install the cable clamp for the network cable ve ss connector 6 Tighten the cable clamp 3 7 Install the conduit box cover 1 screw i m 8 For configuration information see the following
382. rotation direction 1 FORWARD Rotation is fixed in the forward direction 2 REVERSE Rotation is fixed in the reverse direction 3 REQUEST Rotation direction can be changed on command 1004 JOGGING SEL Defines the signal that activates the jogging function Jogging uses Constant Speed 7 parameter 1208 for speed reference and ramp pair 2 parameters 2205 and 2206 for accelerating and decelerating When the jogging activation signal is lost the drive uses ramp stop to decelerate to zero speed even if coast stop is used in normal operation parameter 2102 The jogging status can be parameterized to relay outputs parameter 1401 The jogging status is also seen in DCU Profile status bit 21 NOT SEL Disables the jogging function 1 011 Activates de activates jogging based on the state of DI1 011 activated jogging active 011 de activated jogging inactive 2 6 DI2 DI6 Activates jogging based on the state of the selected digital input See DI1 above 1 DI1 INV Activates jogging based on the state of DI1 D11 activated jogging inactive D11 de activated jogging active 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Activates jogging based on the state of the selected digital input See DI1 INV above Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 117 Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT This group defines how the drive selects between command sources characteristics and sources
383. rough a digital input Connect either a PTC sensor or a normally closed thermistor relay to a digital input When the digital input is 0 the motor is overheated See the connection figure on page 159 The table below and the graph show the resistance requirements for a PTC sensor connected between 24 V and a digital input as a function of the motor operating temperature Temperature Resistance Normal 3 kohm Excessive 28 kohm 6 THERM 1 Sensor configuration uses a thermistor Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input Connect a normally open thermistor relay to a digital input When the digital input is 1 the motor is overheated See the connection figure on page 159 3502 INPUT SELECTION Defines the input used for the temperature sensor 1 Ald PT100 and 2 AI2 PT100 and 3 8 DI1 DI6 Thermistor and 3503 ALARM LIMIT Defines the alarm limit for motor temperature measurement At motor temperatures above this limit the drive displays an alarm 2010 MOTOR TEMP For thermistors or PTC connected to a digital input 0 de activated 1 activated Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 161 Code Description 3504 FAULT LIMIT Defines the fault limit for motor temperature measurement At motor temperatures above this limit the drive displays a fault 9 MOT OVERTEMP an
384. rough standard Modbus are always volatile i e modified values are not automatically stored to permanent memory Use parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE to save all altered values The ACS550 supports the following Modbus function codes for 4xxxx registers Function code Description 03 Read holding 4xxxx registers 06 Preset single 4xxxx register 16 0x10 Hex Preset multiple 4xxxx registers 23 0x17 Hex Read write 4xxxx registers Embedded fieldbus ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 223 Actual values The contents of the register addresses 40005 40012 are ACTUAL VALUES and are specified using parameters 5310 5317 Read only values containing information on the operation of the drive 16 bit words containing a sign bit and a 15 bit integer when negative values written as the two s complement of the corresponding positive value scaled as described earlier in section Actual value scaling on page 211 Exception codes Exception codes are serial communication responses from the drive The ACS550 supports the standard Modbus exception codes defined below Exception Name Meaning code 01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION Unsupported Command 02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS The data address received in the query is not allowable It is not a defined parameter group 03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE A value contained in the query data field is not an allowable value for the ACS550 because it is one of the following Outside mi
385. rpm Parameter 0102 or 0103 is shown by default in the control panel Output mode 0103 OUTPUT FREQ The frequency Hz applied to the motor Parameter 0102 or 0103 is shown by default in the control panel Output mode 0104 CURRENT The motor current as measured by the ACS550 Shown by default in the control panel Output mode 0105 TORQUE Output torque Calculated value of torque on motor shaft in of motor nominal torque Shown by default in the control panel Output mode 0106 POWER The measured motor power in kW 0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE The DC bus voltage in V DC as measured by the ACS550 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE The voltage applied to the motor 0110 DRIVE TEMP The temperature of the drive power transistors in degrees Celsius 0111 EXTERNAL REF 1 External reference REF1 in rpm or Hz units determined by parameter 9904 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 External reference REF2 in 96 0113 CTRL LOCATION Active control location Alternatives are LOCAL 1 1 2 2 0114 RUN TIME drive s accumulated running time hours h Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameters mode 0115 KWH COUNTER The drive s accumulated power consumption in kilowatt hours The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 65535 after which the counter rolls over and starts again from 0 Can bereset by pressing UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when the control panel is
386. rr If the drive s control panel shows fault code 28 SERIAL 1 ERR check for either of the following The master system is down To correct resolve problem with master system The communication connection is bad To correct check communication connection at the drive The time out selection for the drive is too short for the given installation The master is not polling the drive within the specified time out delay To correct increase the time set by parameter 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Faults 31 33 EFB1 EFB3 The three EFB fault codes listed for the drive in chapter Diagnostics on page 259 fault codes 31 33 are not used Intermittent off line occurrences The problems described above are the most common problems encountered with ACS550 serial communication Intermittent problems might also be caused by marginally loose connections wear on wires caused by equipment vibrations insufficient grounding and shielding on both the devices and on the communication cables Embedded fieldbus ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 215 Modbus protocol technical data Overview The Modbus protocol was introduced by Modicon Inc for use in control environments featuring Modicon programmable controllers Due to its ease of use and implementation this common PLC language was quickly adopted as a de facto standard for integration of a wide variety of master controllers and slave devices Modbus is a serial asynchronous protocol
387. rrent Motor value is within this range 0 2 2 0 long long drive heavy duty current Type designation label on drive entry for Output long or Type designation on drive and rating table in chapter Technical data on page 277 Nominal frequency 10 500 Hz Voltage range Motor is compatible with the ACS550 voltage range 208 240 V for ACS550 X1 XXXX 2 or 380 480 V for ACS550 X1 XXXX 4 or 500 600 V for ACS550 U1 XXXX 6 Insulation 500 600 V drives Either the motor complies with NEMA MG1 Part 31 or a du dt filter is used between the motor and drive For ACS550 U1 XXXX 6 Tools required To install the ACS550 you need the following Screwdrivers as appropriate for the mounting hardware used wire stripper tape measure drill for installations involving ACS550 U1 frame sizes R5 or R6 and IP54 UL type 12 enclosures punch for creating conduit mounting holes for installations involving ACS550 U1 frame size R6 appropriate crimping tool for power cable lugs See section Power terminal considerations R6 frame size on page 287 mounting hardware screws or nuts and bolts four each The type of hardware depends on the mounting surface and the frame size For the dimensions and weights of the frames see Dimensions and weights on page 303 Frame size Mounting hardware R1 R4 M5 10 R5 M6 1 4 in R6 M8 5 16 in
388. rs This will damage the drive Note Disconnecting the internal EMC filter increases the conducted emission and reduces the drive EMC compatibility considerably See section Disconnecting the internal EMC filter on page 27 Also see sections IT systems on page 286 and Corner grounded TN systems on page 285 WARNING Do not attempt to install or remove EM1 EM3 F1 or F2 screws while power is applied to the drive s input terminals Maintenance WARNING The ACS550 01 U1 is not field repairable Never attempt to repair a malfunctioning drive contact your local ABB representative for replacement Safety instructions ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Control of the drive and motor WARNING Do not control the motor with the disconnecting device disconnecting means instead use the control panel start and stop keys and gt or commands via the I O board of the drive The maximum allowed number of charging cycles of the DC capacitors i e power ups by applying power is five in ten minutes WARNING The ACS550 will start up automatically after an input voltage interruption if the external run command is on Note For more technical information contact your local ABB representative Safety instructions 8 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Safety instructions ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 9 Table of contents List of related manuals Safety instructions Use of warnings and
389. s gt EMC requirements for Category C3 cannot be met with a 300 m 980 ft cable The installation configuration is not possible An EMC plan is recommended to overcome the situation R6 frame size 4 kHz fsw EMC limits not applicable 150 m 490 ft cable Check operational limits for R6 and 4 kHz gt for a 150 m 490 ft cable the basic unit is sufficient EMC limits do not need to be checked as there are no EMC requirements Motor cable length for 600 V drives The table below shows the maximum motor cable lengths for 600 V drives with different switching frequencies As the 600 V drives are not CE approved cable lengths for EMC limits are not given Maximum cable length for 600 V drives Operational limits 1 4 kHz 8 12 kHz Frame size m ft m ft R2 100 330 100 330 R3 R4 200 660 100 330 R6 300 980 150 4902 2 12 kHz switching frequency is not available WARNING Using a motor cable longer than specified in the table above may cause permanent damage to the drive Motor thermal protection According to regulations the motor must be protected against thermal overload and the current must be switched off when overload is detected The drive includes a motor thermal protection function that protects the motor and switches off the current when necessary Depending on a drive parameter value see parameter 3501 SENSOR TYPE the function either monitors a calculat
390. s 38 4 kb s 57 6 kb s 76 8 kb s 5304 EFB PARITY Defines the data length parity and stop bits to be used with the RS485 link communication The same settings must be used in all on line stations 0 8 NONE 1 8 data bits no parity one stop bit 1 8 NONE 2 8 data bits no parity two stop bits 2 8 EVEN 1 8 data bits even parity one stop bit 3 8 ODD 1 8 data bits odd parity one stop bit 5305 CTRL PROFILE Selects the communication profile used by the EFB protocol ABB DRV LIM Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACS400 1 DCU PROFILE Operation of Control Status Words conforms to 32 bit DCU Profile 2 ABB DRV FULL Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACS600 800 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES Contains a count of valid messages received by the drive During normal operation this counter is increasing constantly 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS Contains a count of the messages with a CRC error received by the drive For high counts check Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors CRC calculations for possible errors 5308 EFB UART ERRORS Contains a count of the messages with a character error received by the drive 5309 EFB STATUS Contains the status of the EFB protocol IDLE EFB protocol is configured but not receiving any messages 1 EXECUT INIT EFB protocol is initializing
391. s de energized whenever 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO 0 Sets the low limit for the first supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI Sets the high limit for the first supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above the supervised parameter goes below the active limit Energized 1 t 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM Selects the second supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above 3205 SUPERV 2 LIM LO Sets the low limit for the second supervised parameter See 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM above 3206 SUPERV 2 LIM HI Sets the high limit for the second supervised parameter See 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM above Parameters 154 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Description 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM Selects the third supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above 3208 SUPERV 3 LIM LO Sets the low limit for the third supervised parameter See 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM above 3209 SUPERV LIM HI Sets the high limit for the third supervised parameter See 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM above Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 155 Group 33 INFORMATION This group provides access to information about the drive s current programs versions and test date Code Description 3301 FIRMWARE Contains the version of the drive s firmware 3302 LOADING PACKAGE Contains the version of the loading package 3303 TEST DATE Con
392. s in the conduit gland box See section Conduit Gland kit on page 23 2 Install thin wall conduit clamps not supplied 3 Install conduit gland box 4 Connect conduit runs to box 5 Route input power and motor wiring through conduits must be separate conduit runs 6 Strip wires 7 Connect power motor and ground wires to the drive terminals See the table on the right for tightening torques 2004 Note For R6 frame size refer to section Power Frame Tightening torque terminal considerations R6 frame size on page size lb ft 287 R1 R2 14 1 R3 2 5 1 8 R4 5 6 PE 2 4 PE 1 5 R5 15 11 R6 40 PE 8 130 PE 6 8 Route the control cable through the conduit must be pm separate from input power and motor conduit runs 0 9 Strip the control cable sheathing and twist the copper shield into a bundle pig tail BL 10 Connect the ground shield bundle pig tail for digital and analog I O cables at X1 1 Ground only at the drive end 11 Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals See section Control terminals table on page 28 Use a tightening torque of 0 4 N m 0 3 Ib ft 12 Install the conduit gland box cover 1 screw 2005 Installation ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Wiring IP54 UL type 12 enclosure with cables 1 Cut the cable seals as needed for the power motor and contr
393. s parameter is visible only when it is activated by the optional FlashDrop device FlashDrop is designed for fast copying of parameters to unpowered drives It allows easy customization of the parameter list e g selected parameters can be hidden For more information see MFDT 01 FlashDrop User s Manual 3AFE68591074 English FlashDrop parameter values are activated by setting parameter 9902 to 31 LOAD FD SET 0 DEFAULT Complete long and short parameter lists are shown 1 FLASHDROP FlashDrop parameter list is shown Does not include short parameter list Parameters that are hidden by the FlashDrop device are not visible 1612 FAN CONTROL Selects drive cooling fan control Can be used to mitigate DC voltage fluctuations 0 AUTO Fan is controlled automatically default 1 ON Fan is always forced on 1613 FAULT RESET Allows to reset faults with a parameter Can be used to reset faults from remote monitoring systems that have access to drive parameters DEFAULT Fault is not reset default 1 RESET NOW Resets fault Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 133 Group 20 LIMITS This group defines minimum and maximum limits to follow in driving the motor speed frequency current torque etc Code Description Hoe bed Speed 2001 value is 0 Defines the minimum speed rpm allowed P 2002 A positive or zero minimum speed value de
394. s you can select to be followed To disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes select Off and press xL To enable automatic clock transitions select the country or area whose daylight saving changes are followed and press Ex To return to the previous display without making changes press eT Display LOC WC SET DATE 03 05 CANCEL 00 00 OK LOC DAYLIGHT SAV 1 off EU US Australial NSW Vict Australia2 Tasmania EXIT 00 00 SEL LOC HELP EU On Mar last Sunday Off Oct last Sunday US EXIT 00 00 Control panels 64 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Parameter Backup mode The Parameter Backup mode is used to export parameters from one drive to another or to make a backup of the drive parameters Uploading to the panel stores all drive parameters including up to two user sets to the Assistant Control Panel The full set partial parameter set application and user sets can then be downloaded from the control panel to another drive or the same drive Uploading and downloading can be performed in local control The control panel memory is non volatile and does not depend on the panel battery In the Parameter Backup mode you can copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel UPLOAD TO PANEL This includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal not adjustable by the user parameters such as those c
395. scaling 1003 DIRECTION 1 FORWARD Resultant ref ref lt 1 1 b o l 1 Fieldbus reference 163 100 100 163 Max ref 1003 DIRECTION 2 REVERSE ref Resultant ref Fieldbus 163 100 100 163 reference 001 l ref lt 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Resultant ref Max ref Fieldbus 163 100 reference 100 163 Max ref 2 22 Fieldbus adapter ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 255 Actual Value As described earlier in section Control interface on page 238 Actual Values are words containing drive values Actual Value scaling The scaling of the integers sent to the fieldbus as Actual Values depends on the resolution of the selected drive parameter Except as noted for ACT1 and ACT2 below scale the feedback integer using the resolution listed for the parameter in section Complete parameter list on page 91 For example Feedback integer Parameter resolution Scaled Value 1 0 1 mA 1 0 1 mA 0 1 mA 10 0 196 10 0 1 1 Data words 5 and 6 are scaled as follows ABB Drives profile Contents Scaling ACT1 ACTUAL SPEED 20000 20000 1105 par 1105 ACT2 TORQUE 10000 10000 100 100
396. several electrolytic capacitors Capacitor life can be prolonged by lowering the ambient temperature It is not possible to predict a capacitor failure Capacitor failure is usually followed by a input power fuse failure or a fault trip Contact ABB if capacitor failure is suspected Replacements for frame size R5 and are available from ABB Do not use other than ABB specified spare parts Control panel Cleaning Use a soft damp cloth to clean the control panel Avoid harsh cleaners which could scratch the display window Battery A battery is only used in Assistant Control Panels that have the clock function available and enabled The battery keeps the clock operating in memory during power interruptions To remove the battery use a coin to rotate the battery holder on the back of the control panel Replace the battery with type CR2032 Note The battery is NOT required for any control panel or drive function except the clock Maintenance 276 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Maintenance ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Technical data Ratings 277 By type designation the table below provides ratings for the ACS550 adjustable speed AC drive including IEC ratings NEMA ratings shaded columns frame size Ratings 208 240 V drives Abbreviated column headers are described in section Symbols on page 279 Type Normal use Heavy duty use Frame AC
397. signal Note Start enable functionality differs from the run enable functionality NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external start enable signal 1 011 Defines digital input DI1 as the start enable 2 signal This digital input must be activated for start enable 2 signal If the voltage drops and de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and show alarm 2022 on the panel display The drive will not start until start enable 2 signal resumes 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 2 signal See DI1 above 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start enable 2 signal Bit 3 of the Command word 2 parameter 0302 activates the start disable 2 signal See fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the start enable 2 signal 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 2 signal See 011 INV above 1610 DISPLAY ALARMS Controls the visibility of the following alarms 2001 Overcurrent alarm 2002 Overvoltage alarm 2003 Undervoltage alarm 2009 Device overtemperature alarm For more information see section Alarm listing on page 267 0 NO The above alarms are suppressed 1 YES All of the above alarms are enabled 1611 PARAMETER VIEW Selects the parameter view i e which parameters are shown Note Thi
398. signal 100 0 5 par 1105 50 100 REF2 COMM AI1 COMM 96 Al 96 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus reference correction coefficient 100 0 5 Par 1108 1 1009617 input signal 100 0 5 par 1108 gt 50 100 Embedded fieldbus ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 235 ABB Drives and DCU profiles Reference Al reference scaling setting REF2 COMM AI1 COMM 96 Al 96 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus reference correction coefficient 200 l 100 7777 7 0 Al input signal gt 0 50 100 Embedded fieldbus 236 Reference handling ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Use Group 10 START STOP DIR parameters to configure for control of rotation direction for each control location 1 and EXT2 The following diagrams illustrate how group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce REFERENCE values REF1 and REF2 Note fieldbus references are bipolar that is they can be positive or negative ABB Drives profile Parameter Value setting referen ce scaling 1003 DIRECTION 1 FORWARD Fieldbus Resultant ref reference 163 100 100 163 1003 DIRECTION 2 REVERSE Fieldbus Resultant ref 100 163 163 100 reference Max ref
399. speed load 149 maintenance triggers 147 nominal current parameter 107 nominal frequency parameter 107 nominal power parameter 107 nominal speed parameter 107 nominal voltage parameter 107 phase fault code 263 requirements 18 stall 262 thermal protection 291 motor cable checking 30 sese RR RRRRRE 289 length iu se Rene een 289 requirements 292 requirements EMC 293 motor connection lugs for 6 287 terminal 286 tOrque ise seus 286 motor control parameter 145 control mode parameter 106 IR compensation parameters 145 motor potentiometer macro 81 motor temperature measure parameter group 159 alarm limit 160 data 110 fault limit 161 overtemperature fault code 261 sensor selection parameter 160 sensor type parameter 160 thermal 291 thermal protection fault par
400. speed or frequency reference Reference scaling The following table describes REFERENCE scaling for the ABB Drives profile ABB Drives Profile FBA Reference Range Scaling Remarks ype REF 1 32767 Speed or 20000 par 1105 Final reference limited by 32767 frequency 0 0 1104 1105 Actual motor 20000 par 1105 speed limited by 2001 2002 20000 corresponds to 100 Speed or 2007 2008 frequency REF2 32767 Speed or 10000 1108 Final reference limited by 32767 frequency 0 0 1107 1108 Actual motor 10000 par 1108 speed limited by 2001 2002 10000 corresponds to 100 Speed or 2007 2008 frequency Torque 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by 0 0 2015 2017 torque1 or 10000 par 1108 2016 2018 torque2 10000 corresponds to 10096 PID 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by Reference 0 0 4012 4013 PID set1 10000 par 1108 4112 4113 PID set2 10000 corresponds to 100 Note The setting of parameter 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN has no effect on the scaling of references When parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to 1 or 11 the reference is scaled as follows ABB Drives profile FBA Reference Value setting Al reference scaling REF1 1 COMM Al 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus reference A correction coef
401. splay briefly shows a message about changing 49 1 HZ the mode and then returns to the Output mode 0 5 A 10 7 7 DIR 00 00 MENU 3 To change the direction from forward t shown on the status line to reverse 5 LOC J shown on the status line or vice versa press 49 1 HZ 0 5 A Note P ter 1003 DIRECTION t be set to 3 0 7 ote Parameter must be set to 3 REQUEST pir 00 00 MENU Control panels 54 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual How to set the speed frequency or torque reference Step Action Display 1 If you are not in the Output mode press EZ repeatedly until you get there REM V 49 1 Hz 0 5 A 10 7 DIR 00 00 MENU 2 If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the status line switch to local LOC control by pressing 9 The display briefly shows a message about changing 49 1 HZ the mode and then returns to the Output mode 0 5 A 10 7 Note With Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT you can allow the reference o modification in remote control DIR 00 00 MENU 3 To increase the highlighted reference value shown the top right corner of the LOC t display press The value changes immediately It is stored in the drive 50 i 0 Hz permanent memory and restored automatically after power switch off 0 5 9 decrease the value press lt w P 10 a 7 DIR 00 00 MENU
402. suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 kA RMS symmetrical amperes 600 V maximum The ampere rating is based on tests done according to UL 508 Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with local codes The ACS550 has an electronic motor protection feature that complies with the requirements of UL 508C and for ACS550 U1 C22 2 No 14 When this feature is selected and properly adjusted additional overload protection is not required unless more than one motor is connected to the drive or unless additional protection is required by applicable safety regulations See parameters 3005 MOT THERM PROT and 3006 MOT THERM RATE The drives are to be used in a controlled environment See section Ambient conditions on page 307 for specific limits Note For open type enclosures i e drives without the conduit box and or cover for IP21 UL type 1 drives or without the conduit plate and or hood for IP54 UL type 12 drives the drive must be mounted inside an enclosure in accordance with National Electric Code and local electrical codes Brake choppers when applied with appropriately sized brake resistors will allow the drive to dissipate regenerative energy normally associated with quickly decelerating a motor Frame sizes R1 and R2 have a built in brake chopper as standard Technical data ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 311 equipment For frame sizes R3 R6 contact your local ABB representa
403. switch to the Interlock circuit the drive s PFC logic can then recognize that the motor is switched off and start the next available motor Wire a contact of the motor thermal relay or other protective device in the motor circuit to the Interlock input the drive s PFC logic can then recognize that a motor fault is activated and stop the motor 0 NOT SEL Disables the Interlock function All digital inputs are available for other purposes Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 0 The Autochange function must be disabled if Interlock function is disabled 1 011 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with 011 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on the number of relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFC the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 0 and otherwise enabled No PFC Autochange disabled Autochange enabled relays P 8118 P 8118 0 011 Speed Reg Motor Not allowed DI2 DI6 Free 1 011 Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFC Relay DI2 First PFC Relay DI2 DI6 Free DI3 DI6 Free 2 011 Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFC Relay DI2 First PFC Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI3 DI6 Free DI4 DI6 Free 3 011 Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFC Relay DI2 First PFC Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Re
404. t 2 and feedback 2 The drive will control the zone and select the set that has a smaller difference A negative difference a setpoint lower than the feedback is always smaller than a positive difference This keeps feedback values at or below the setpoint Controller does not react to the situation of feedback below setpoint if another zone s feedback is closer to its setpoint 14 2 ZONE AVE The drive calculates the difference between setpoint 1 and feedback 1 as well as setpoint 2 and feedback 2 In addition it calculates the average of the deviations and uses it to control zone 1 Therefore one feedback is kept above its setpoint and another is kept as much below its setpoint 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input 011 as the control for PID Set selection Activating the digital input selects PID Set 1 De activating the digital input selects PID Set 2 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for PID Set selection See DI1 INV above Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 177 Group 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 Parameters of this group belong to PID parameter set 2 The operation of parameters 4101 4126 is analogous with set 1 parameters 4001 4026 PID parameter set 2 can be selected by parameter 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET Code Description 4101 See 4001 4026 4126 Parameters 178 ACS550 01 U1 Us
405. t 22 connected to 24 DI3TDIA Output 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable 0 0 Reference through 26 RO3A Default operation 1 0 CONST SPEED 1 1202 27 RO3B Fault 1 225 connected to 274 0 7 SPEED 2 1203 Fault gt 25 connected to 26 1 1 CONST SPEED 3 1204 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Analog reference Al1 Analog output AO1 Frequency J1 Start stop and direction 011 2 Analog output AO2 Current Sp AI1 0 10V Constant speed selection 013 4 Relay output 1 Ready 9 P AI2 0 4 20 mA Ramp pair 1 of 2 selection 015 Relay output 2 Running or Relay output 3 Fault 1 9 11 0 10 V p AI2 0 4 20 mA Application macros ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 3 wire macro 79 This macro is used when the drive is controlled using momentary push buttons It provides three 3 constant speeds To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 2 3 WIRE Note When the stop input DI2 is deactivated no input the control panel start stop buttons are disabled Connection example x1 1 10 kohm 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen 42 AI1 External speed reference 1 0 10 V 3 AGND Analog input
406. t can be erroneously declared if the drive is faulty or the input power is a delta grounded system and the motor cable capacitance is large This fault can be disabled by using parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT Check input power connections Check grounding 263 Diagnostics 264 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 1 Description and recommended corrective action code panel 36 INCOMPATIBLE The drive cannot use the software SW e Internal fault The loaded software is not compatible with the drive Call support representative 37 CB OVERTEMP Drive control board is overheated The fault trip limit is 88 Check for and correct Excessive ambient temperature Fan failure Obstructions in the air flow Not for drives with an OMIO control board 38 USER LOAD Condition defined by parameter 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid CURVE longer than the time defined by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 101 SYSTEM ERROR Error internal to the drive Contact your local ABB representative and report 199 the error number 201 SYSTEM ERROR Error in the system Contact your local ABB representative and report the 299 error number UNKNOWN DRIVE TYPE ACS550 SUPPORTED DRIVES X Wrong type of panel i e panel that supports drive X but not the ACS550 has been connected to the ACS550 Faults that indicate conflicts in the parameter settings are listed below
407. t least 20 cm 8 in from the sides of the drive Use care in mixing signal types on the same cable Do not mix relay controlled signals using more than 30 V and other control signals in the same cable Runrelay controlled signals as twisted pairs especially if voltage gt 48 V Relay controlled signals using less than 48 V can be run in the same cables as digital input signals Technical data 300 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Note Never mix 24 V DC and 115 230 V AC signals in the same cable Analog cables Recommendations for analog signal runs Use double shielded twisted pair cable Use one individually shielded pair for each signal Do not use a common return for different analog signals Digital cables Recommendation for digital signal runs A double shielded cable is the best alternative but single shielded twisted multi pair cable is also usable Control panel cable If the control panel is connected to the drive with a cable use only Category 5 Patch ethernet cable The maximum length that is tested to meet EMC specifications is 3 m 9 8 ft Longer cables are susceptible to electromagnetic noise and must be user tested to verify that EMC requirements are met Where long runs are required especially for runs longer than about 12 m 40 ft use a RS232 RS485 converter at each end and run RS485 cable Drive s control connection terminals The following table provides specifications for t
408. t of the PID controller output Before being added to the PID controller output the error derivative is filtered with a 1 pole filter Increasing the filter time smooths the error derivative reducing noise 0 0 10 0 Filter time constant seconds 4005 ERROR VALUE INV Selects either a normal or inverted relationship between the feedback signal and the drive speed 0 NO Normal a decrease in feedback signal increases drive speed Error Ref Fbk 1 YES Inverted a decrease in feedback signal decreases drive speed Error Fbk Ref 4006 UNITS Selects the unit for the PID controller actual values PID1 parameters 0128 0130 and 0132 See parameter 3405 for list of available units 4007 UNIT SCALE T 4007 value Entry Display Defines the decimal point location in PID controller actual values 00003 3 Enter the decimal point location counting in from the right end of the entry 1 00031 13 1 See the table for an example using pi 3 14159 2 00314 3 14 3 03142 3 142 4 31416 3 1416 Parameters 172 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Description 10080 VAEME Units P4006 Defines together with the next parameter the scaling applied to Scale P4007 1000 0 the PID controller s actual values PID1 parameters 0128 0130 4 e 0132 7 Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 P 4009 i 4009 100 VALUE Defines together wi
409. t or alarm code You can reset the fault or alarm in the Output or Fault mode see chapter Diagnostics After the power is switched on the panel is in the Output mode where you can start stop change the direction switch between local and remote control and monitor up to three actual values one at a time To do other tasks go first to the Main menu and select the appropriate mode How to do common tasks REM OUTPUT 491 MENU PAL FWD The table below lists common tasks the mode in which you can perform them and the page number where the steps to do the task are described in detail Task Mode Page How to switch between local and remote control Any 70 How to start and stop the drive Any 70 How to change the direction of the motor rotation Any 70 How to browse the monitored signals Output 71 How to set the speed frequency or torque reference Reference 72 How to change the value of a parameter Parameter rS How to select the monitored signals Parameter 74 How to reset faults and alarms Output Fault 265 How to copy parameters from the drive to the control panel Copy 76 How to restore parameters from the control panel to the drive Copy 76 Control panels 70 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual How to start stop and switch between local and remote control You can start stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode To be able to start or
410. t the Start up Assistant it activates the first assistant which guides bo v 2 to you through the task of specification of its parameter set as shown in steps 4 continue with and 5 below The Start up Assistant then asks if you want to continue with the setup next assistant or skip it select the appropriate answer with keys and Skip Cv and press SI If you choose to skip the Start up Assistant asks the EXIT 00 00 OK same question about the next assistant and so on 4 specify a new value press keys and Cw LOC UPAR EDIT 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT EXIT 00 00 SAVE LOC HELP Set as given on the motor nameplate voltage value must correspond to motor D Y connection EXIT 00 00 Control panels 58 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Step Action Display 5 To accept the new value and continue to the setting of the next parameter LOC UPAR EDIT SAVE press Sw 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR To stop the assistant press CZ 00 00 SAVE The table below lists the tasks of the assistants and the relevant drive parameters Depending on the selection made in the Application task parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO the Start up Assistant decides which consequent tasks it suggests Name Description Set parameters Language select Selecting the language 9901 Motor set up Setting the motor data 9904 9909 Performing the moto
411. tains the test date yy ww 3304 DRIVE RATING Indicates the drive s current and voltage rating The format is XXXY where XXX The nominal current rating of the drive in amperes If present an A indicates a decimal point in the rating for the current For example XXX 8A8 indicates a nominal current rating of 8 8 A Y The voltage rating of the drive where Y 2 indicates a 208 240 V rating 4 indicates a 380 480 V rating 6 indicates a 500 600 V rating 3305 PARAMETER TABLE Contains the version of the parameter table used in the drive Parameters 156 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY This group defines the content for control panel display middle area when the control panel is in the Output mode Code Description 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM P 3404 P 3405 Selects the first parameter by number displayed on the control panel Loc amp l y Definitions in this group define display content when the control P 3401 2137 49 1 Hz panel is in the control mode P 3408 2138 0 5A Any parameter number in Group 01 OPERATING DATA can be _ selected 3415 139 10 7 Using the following parameters the display value can be scaled DIR 00 00 MENU converted to convenient units and or displayed as a bar graph The figure identifies selections made by parameters in this group LOC c If just one or two p
412. tandard requirements If external sine filters are installed longer cable lengths can be used With sine filters the limiting factors are the voltage drop of the cable which has to be taken into account in engineering as well as the EMC limits where applicable The default switching frequency is 4 kHz WARNING Using a motor cable longer than specified in the table above may cause permanent damage to the drive Examples for using the table Requirements Checking and conclusions R1 frame size Check operational limits for R1 and 8 kHz gt for a 150 m 490 ft 8 kHz fsw cable a du dt filter is needed Category C2 Check EMC limits gt EMC requirements for Category C2 are met 150 m 490 ft cable vith a 150 m 490 ft cable Technical data ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 291 Requirements Checking and conclusions R3 frame size 4 kHz fsw Category C3 300 m 980 ft cable Check operational limits for R3 and 4 kHz gt a 300 m 980 ft cable cannot be used even with a du dt filter A sine filter must be used and the voltage drop of the cable must be taken into account in the installation Check EMC limits gt EMC requirements for Category C3 are met with a 300 m 980 ft cable R5 frame size 8 kHz fsw Category C3 150 m 490 ft cable Check operational limits for R5 and 8 kHz gt for a 150 m 490 ft cable the basic unit is sufficient Check EMC limit
413. tant Speeds 1 7 using D14 015 and DI6 See above DI1 2 3 INV for code 1202 CONST SPEED 1 Sets value for Constant Speed 1 The range and units depend on parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE Range 0 30000 rpm when 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ e Range 0 500 Hz when 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ 1203 1208 CONST SPEED 2 CONST SPEED 7 Each sets a value for a Constant Speed See CONST SPEED 1 above Constant Speed 7 is used also as jogging speed See parameter 1004 JOGGING SEL Parameters 122 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Description 1209 TIMED MODE SEL Defines timed function activated constant speed mode Timed function can be used to change between the external reference and constant speeds when parameter 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 15 18 TIMED FUNC 1 4 or 19 TIMED FUN1 amp 2 1 EXT CS1 2 3 If parameter 1201 15 18 TIMED FUNC 1 4 selects an external speed when this timed function 1 4 is not active and selects Constant speed 1 when it is active TIMED FUNCTION 1 4 Function 0 External reference 1 Constant speed 1 1202 If parameter 1201 19 TIMED FUN1 amp 2 selects an external speed when neither timed function is active selects Constant speed 1 when only Timed function 1 is active selects Constant speed 2 when only Timed function 2 is active and selects Constant speed 3 when both Timed functions 1 and 2 are acti
414. ted in the timer 3627 TIMED FUNC 2 SRC See parameter 3626 3628 TIMED FUNC 3 SRC See parameter 3626 3629 TIMED FUNC 4 SRC See parameter 3626 Parameters 166 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Group 37 USER LOAD CURVE This group defines supervision of user adjustable load curves motor torque as a function of frequency The curve is defined by five points Code Description 3701 USER LOAD C MODE Motor torque Supervision mode for the user adjustable load curves A This functionality replaces the former underload supervision in Group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS To P3706 P3709 emulate it see section Correspondence with the P3712 57 5 patig obsolete underload supervision on page 167 P3714 P3717 0 NOT SEL Supervision is not active 1 UNDERLOAD Supervision for the torque dropping below the underload curve 2 OVERLOAD Supervision for the torque exceeding the overload curve P3705 3 BOTH Supervision for the torque dropping below the underload curve or exceeding the overload curve P398 L P3704 P3707 P3710 P3713 P3716 Output frequency Hz Overload area Allowed operating area Underload area 3702 USER LOAD C FUNC Action wanted during load supervision 1 FAULT A fault is generated when the condition defined by 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than the time set by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 2 ALARM An al
415. ters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 171 Code Description 4002 INTEGRATION TIME A Defines the PID controller s integration time Integration time is by definition the time required to increase the output by the error value D 4001 10 e Error value is constant and 100 Gaine A C P 4001 1 e Integration time of 1 second denotes that a 100 change is achieved in 1 second t 0 0 NOT SEL Disables integration I part of controller PES 0 1 3600 0 Integration time seconds a 4002 e See 4001 for adjustment procedure Error Error value step C Controller output with Gain 1 D Controller output with Gain 10 4003 DERIVATION TIME Error 4 Process error value Defines the PID controller s derivation time You can add the derivative of the error to the PID controller 100 output The derivative is the error value s rate of change For example if the process error value changes linearly the derivative is a constant added to the PID controller output The error derivative is filtered with a 1 pole filter The time constant of the filter is defined by parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER 0 0 10 0 Derivation time seconds t PID output A D part of controller output Gain P 4001 gt r 4003 4004 PID DERIV FILTER Defines the filter time constant for the error derivative par
416. ters to configure the ACS550 for a particular application 1 ABB STANDARD 2 3 3 ALTERNATE 4 MOTOR POT 5 HAND AUTO 6 PID CONTROL 7 PFC CONTROL 8 TORQUE CTRL 31 LOAD FD SET USER S1 LOAD 1 USER S1 SAVE 2 USER S2LOAD 3 USER S2 SAVE 31 LOAD FD SET FlashDrop parameter values as defined by the FlashDrop file Parameter view is selected by parameter 1611 PARAMETER VIEW FlashDrop is an optional device for fast copying of parameters to unpowered drives FlashDrop allows easy customization of the parameter list e g selected parameters can be hidden For more information see MFDT 01 FlashDrop User s Manual 3AFE68591074 English 1 USER S1 SAVE 3 USER S2 SAVE With these it is possible to save two different user parameter sets into the drive permanent memory for later use Each set contains parameter settings including Group 99 START UP DATA and the results of the motor identification run USER S1 LOAD 2 USER S2 LOAD With these the user parameter sets can be taken back in use 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE Selects the motor control mode 1 VECTOR SPEED sensorless vector control mode Reference 1 is speed reference in rpm Reference 2 is speed reference in 10096 is absolute maximum speed equal to the value of parameter 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED or 2001 MINIMUM SPEED if the absolute value of the minimum speed is greater than the maximum speed 2 VECTOR TORQ
417. tes for the intermediate circuit capacitors to discharge Measure the voltage between each input terminal U1 V1 and W1 and earth with a multimeter to ensure that the drive is discharged Exchange the position of two motor cable phase conductors at the drive output terminals or at the motor connection box Verify your work by applying input power and repeating the check as described above forward direction SS S S 7 reverse direction 7 SPEED LIMITS ACCELERATION DECELERAT Set the minimum speed parameter 2007 Set the maximum speed parameter 2002 Set the acceleration time 1 parameter 2202 Note Check also acceleration time 2 parameter 2205 if two acceleration times will be used in the application Set the deceleration time 1 parameter 2203 Note Set also deceleration time 2 parameter 2206 if two deceleration times will be used in the application SAVING A USER PARAMETER SET AND FINAL The start up is now completed However it might be useful at this stage to set the parameters required by your application and save the settings as a user parameter set as instructed in section User parameter sets on page 88 Check that the drive state is OK Basic Control Panel Check that there are no faults or alarms shown on the display If you want to check the LEDs on the front of the drive switch first to remote control otherwise a fault is generated before removing th
418. th the previous parameter the scaling applied to the PID controller s actual values 4008 Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 2 l J SN 096 10096 1000 0 Internal scale 4010 SET POINT SEL Defines the reference signal source for the PID controller Parameter has no significance when the PID regulator is by passed see 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL KEYPAD Control panel provides reference 1 AI Analog input 1 provides reference 2 AI2 Analog input 2 provides reference 8 COMM Fieldbus provides reference 9 COMM AI1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 10 1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 11 DI3U 4D RNC Digital inputs acting as a motor potentiometer control provide reference 013 increases the speed the U stands for 014 decreases the reference the D stands for Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal s rate of change Stop command resets the reference to zero NC Reference value is not copied 12 DI3U 4D NC Same as DI3U 4D RNC above except Stop command does not reset reference to zero At restart the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored r
419. that may be needed Pressing STOP on the drive s control panel does NOT generate an emergency stop of the motor separate the drive from dangerous potential Technical data 284 Input power cables wiring Input wiring can be any of ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual a four conductor cable three phases and ground protective earth Shielding is not required four insulated conductors routed through conduit Size wiring according to local safety regulations appropriate input voltage and the drive s load current Note The conductor must be less than the maximum limit defined by the terminal size Check the maximum wire size according to the table in section Drive s power connection terminals on page 286 The table below lists copper and aluminium cable types for different load currents These recommendations apply only for the conditions listed at the top of the table IEC NEC Based on EN 60204 1 and IEC 60364 5 2 PVC insulation 30 C 86 F ambient temperature 70 C 158 F surface temperature cables with concentric copper shield not more than nine cables laid on cable ladder side by side Based on NEC Table 310 16 for copper wires 90 194 wire insulation 40 104 F ambient temperature not more than three current carrying conductors in raceway or cable or earth directly buried copper cables with concentric copper shield
420. the control panel with UPLOAD TO PANEL copy USER S2 parameters from the control panel to the drive DOWNLOAD USER SET2 As DOWNLOAD USER SET1 above start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control Control panels ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual How to upload and download parameters 65 For the upload and download functions available see above Note that the drive has to be in local control for uploading and downloading Step Action Display Go to the Main menu by pressing xu if you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing 7 repeatedly until you get to the Main menu If REM is shown on the status line press to switch to local control LOC MAIN MENU 1 PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 1 00 00 ENTER Go to the Par Backup mode by selecting PAR BACKUP on the menu with keys ITER and amp Y 2 and pressing NS LOC 1 INFO DOWNLOAD FULL SET DOWNLOAD APPLICATION DOWNLOAD USER SET1 EXIT 00 00 SEL To copy all parameters including user sets and internal parameters from the drive to the control panel select UPLOAD TO PANEL on the Par Backup menu with keys and S vw 2 and press wl During the transfer the display shows the transfer status as a percentage of completion Press 2 if you want to stop the operation After the upload is completed the display shows a message a
421. the heatsink as follows when necessary 1 Remove power from the drive 2 Remove the cooling fan see section Main fan replacement on page 272 Blow clean compressed air not humid from bottom to top and simultaneously use a vacuum cleaner at the air outlet to trap the dust Note If there is a risk of the dust entering adjoining equipment perform the cleaning in another room Maintenance 272 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 4 Reinstall the cooling fan 5 Restore power Main fan replacement Fan failure can be predicted by the increasing noise from fan bearings and the gradual rise in the heatsink temperature in spite of heatsink cleaning If the drive is operated in a critical part of a process fan replacement is recommended once these symptoms start appearing Replacement fans are available from ABB Do not use other than ABB specified spare parts Frame sizes R1 R4 2 Remove drive cover 3 For frame size 4 Disconnect the fan cable To replace the fan Remove power from the drive R1 R2 Press together the retaining clips on the fan cover sides and lift R3 R4 Press in on the lever located on the left side of the fan mount and rotate the fan up and out 5 Reinstall the fan in reverse order X0021 6 Restore power Frame size R5 Fo N replace the fan Bottom view Remove power from drive pd ow vw H 3 N 2 Remove the screws attaching the fan 4
422. through on systems with a high inertia such as a centrifuge or a fan 0 DISABLE Disables controller 1 ENABLE TIME Enables controller with 500 ms time limit for operation 2 ENABLE Enables controller without maximum time limit for operation Parameters 134 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Code Description 2007 MINIMUM ERE oo Freq 2007 value is lt 0 Defines the minimum limit for the drive output frequency P 2008 A positive or zero minimum frequency value defines two ranges one positive and one negative A negative minimum frequency value defines one speed range Frequency range allowed y Time See the figure Note Keep MINIMUM FREQ lt MAXIMUM FREQ 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency Freq 2007 value is gt 0 P 2008 Frequency range allowed P 2007 0 Time P 2007 Frequency range allowed P 2008 2013 MIN TORQUE SEL Defines control of the selection between two minimum torque limits 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 and 2016 MIN TORQUE 2 0 MIN TORQUE 1 Selects 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 as the minimum limit used 1 011 Defines digital input 011 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used Activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 2 value De activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 1 value 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the minimum li
423. tive for appropriate parts See section Brake components on page 295 EAC marking ERI The drive has EAC certification EAC marking is required in Russia Belarus and Kazakhstan IEC EN 61800 3 2004 Definitions EMC stands for Electromagnetic Compatibility It is the ability of electrical electronic equipment to operate without problems within an electromagnetic environment Likewise the equipment must not disturb or interfere with any other product or system within its locality First environment includes establishments connected to a low voltage network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes Second environment includes establishments connected to a network not directly supplying domestic premises Drive of category C2 drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V and intended to be installed and commissioned only by a professional when used in the first environment Note A professional is a person or organization having necessary skills in installing and or commissioning power drive systems including their EMC aspects Category C2 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class first environment restricted distribution EMC standard IEC EN 61800 3 does not any more restrict the distribution of the drive but the using installation and commissioning are defined Drive of category C3 drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V intended for use in the second environment and not intended for use in the first environme
424. tor To control automatic reset use Group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET 2014 AUTOCHANGE This alarm warns that the PFC autochange function is active Note 1 Tocontrol PFC use Group 81 PFC CONTROL and the PFC macro on page 84 2015 PFC I LOCK This alarm warns that the PFC interlocks are active which means that the drive cannot start the following Any motor when Autochange is used The speed regulated motor when Autochange is not used 2016 RESERVED Not used 2017 2018 PID SLEEP This alarm warns that the PID sleep function is active which means Note 1 that the motor could accelerate when the PID sleep function ends Tocontrol PID sleep use parameters 4022 4026 or 4122 4126 2019 ID RUN Performing ID Run 2020 RESERVED Not used 2021 START ENABLE 1 This alarm warns that the Start Enable 1 signal is missing MISSING Tocontrol Start Enable 1 function use parameter 1608 To correct check Digital input configuration Communication settings 2022 START ENABLE 2 This alarm warns that the Start Enable 2 signal is missing MISSING Tocontrol Start Enable 2 function use parameter 1609 To correct check Digital input configuration Communication settings Diagnostics ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 269 Alarm code Display Description 2023 EMERGENCY STOP Emergency stop activated 2024 ENCODER ERROR The drive is not detecting a valid encoder signal
425. tor nominal current parameter 9906 O 6 Allowed range 0 2 2 0 long A PAR FWD motor nominal frequency parameter 9907 9 9 O 7 PAR FWD motor nominal speed parameter 9908 m 9 9 O 8 PAR FWD motor nominal power parameter 9909 i 9 9 O 9 PAR FWD Start up control with I O and ID Run 40 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Select the motor identification method parameter 9910 The default value 0 OFF IDMAGN using the identification magnetization is suitable for most applications It is applied in this basic start up procedure Note however that this requires that parameter 9904 is set to 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ or parameter 9904 is set to 3 SCALAR FREQ and parameter 2101 is set to 3 SCALAR FLYST or 5 FLY BOOST If your selection is OFF IDMAGN move to the next step Value 1 ON which performs a separate ID Run should be selected if vector control mode is used parameter 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ and or the operation point is near zero speed and or operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback is required If you decide to do the ID Run value 1 ON continue by following the separate instructions given on page 45 in section How to perform the ID Run and then return to step DIRECTION OF THE MOTOR ROTATION on page 40 IDENTIFICATION MAGNETIZATIO
426. two digital inputs as defined below 0 de activated 1 DI activated 011 DI2 Function 1 1 Noconstant speed 0 1 Constant speed 1 1202 1 0 Constant speed 2 1203 0 0 Constant speed 3 1204 8 DI2 3 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI2 and DI3 See above DI1 2 INV for code 9 DI3 4 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using 013 See above DI1 2 INv for code 10 DI4 5 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using 014 and Di5 See above DI1 2 INV for code 11 DI5 6 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using 015 and DI6 See above DI1 2 INv for code 12 DI1 2 3 INV Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using 011 012 and 013 Inverse operation uses three digital inputs as defined below 0 de activated 1 DI activated Function No constant speed Constant speed 1 1202 Constant speed 2 1203 Constant speed 3 1204 Constant speed 4 1205 Constant speed 5 1206 Constant speed 6 1207 Constant speed 7 1208 os oO gt A O o o 9 9 AAS olol ol o 8 13 DI3 4 5 INV Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using 014 015 See above 11 2 3 for code 14 DI4 5 6 INV Selects one of seven Cons
427. ual value for this register 40012 Actual 8 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5317 to select an select using 5317 actual value for this register 40031 ACS550 CONTROL R W Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the DCU WORD LSW profile s CONTROL WORD Supported only if 5305 1 See parameter 0301 40032 ACS550 CONTROL R Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the DCU WORD MSW profile s CONTROL WORD Supported only if 5305 1 See parameter 0302 40033 ACS550 STATUS R Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the DCU WORD LSW profile s STATUS WORD Supported only if 5305 1 See parameter 0303 40034 ACS550 STATUS R Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the DCU WORD MSW profile s STATUS WORD Supported only if 5305 1 See parameter 0304 40045 REFERENCE 1 LSW R W The least significant word of reference 1 Supported only by the DCU profile i e when 5305 ECB CTRL PROFILE setting is DCU profile Embedded fieldbus ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 221 Modbus register Access Remarks 40046 REFERENCE 1 MSW R W The most significant word of reference 1 Supported only by the DCU profile i e when 5305 ECB CTRL PROFILE setting is DCU profile 40047 REFERENCE 2 LSW R W The least significant word of reference 2 Supported only by the DCU profile i e when 5305 ECB CTRL PROFILE setting is DCU profile 40048 REFERENCE 2 MSW R W The most significant
428. uipment which are either non conductive or conductive but not connected to the protective earth To fulfil this requirement connect a thermistor and other similar components to the drive s control terminals using any of these alternatives Separate the thermistor from live parts of the motor with double reinforced insulation Protect all circuits connected to the drive s digital and analog inputs Protect against contact and insulate from other low voltage circuits with basic insulation rated for the same voltage level as the drive s main circuit Use an external thermistor relay The relay insulation must be rated for the same voltage level as the drive s main circuit The figure below shows thermistor relay and PTC sensor connections using a digital input At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through eg a 3 3 nF capacitor If this is not possible leave the shield unconnected Thermistor relay PTC sensor 3501 SENSOR TYPE 5 THERM 0 or 6 THERM 1 3501 SENSOR TYPE 5 THERM 0 Thermistor relay Control board Control board DI6 24 V DC DIG NE 20 24 VDC Parameters 160 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual For other faults or for anticipating motor overheating using a model see Group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS Code Description 3501 SENSOR T
429. ulate the behavior of an old underload curve with parameters as in the shaded columns set the new parameters as in the white columns in the two tables below Obsolete parameters New parameters Underload supervision with 3013 3014 3701 3702 3703 parameters 3013 3015 obsolete UNDERLOAD UNDERLOAD USER LOAD USER LOAD USER LOAD FUNCTION TIME C MODE C FUNC C TIME No underload functionality 0 0 Underload curve fault generated 1 t 1 1 t Underload curve alarm generated 2 t 1 2 2 4 Parameters 168 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Obs par 3015 3704 3705 3707 3708 3710 3711 3713 3714 3716 3717 UNDER LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD FREQ 1 TORQ FREQ 2 TORQ FREQ3 TORQ FREQ4 TORQ FREQ5 TORQ CURVE Low 1 LOW 2 Low 3 Low 4 Low 5 Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz EU US EU US EU US EU US EU US 10 32 38 17 41 50 23 50 60 30 500 500 30 20 31 37 30 42 50 40 50 60 50 500 500 50 30 31 37 43 42 50 57 50 60 70 500 500 70 10 73 88 17 98 117 23 120 144 30 500 500 30 20 71 86 30 99 119 40 120 144 50 500 500 50 New parameters aj A N oaj aj oaj a DD Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 169 Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 This gr
430. up to remove from the drive 5 5 Disconnect the fan cable RA 6 Install the fan in reverse order noting that The fan air flow is up refer to the arrow on fan The fan wire harness is toward the front The notched housing barb is located in the right rear corner The fan cable connects just forward of the fan at the top of the drive p 3AUA000000404 Frame sizes R5 and R6 To replace the internal enclosure fan in frame sizes R5 or R6 Remove power from the drive Remove the front cover Lift the fan out and disconnect the cable Install the fan in reverse order Qr m pomo Restore power Maintenance ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 275 Capacitors Reforming The drive DC link capacitors need to be reformed re aged if the drive has been non operational for more than one year Without reforming capacitors may be damaged when the drive starts to operate It is therefore recommended to reform the capacitors once a year See section Serial number on page 17 for how to check the date of manufacture from the serial number shown on the drive labels For information on reforming the capacitors refer to Guide for Capacitor Reforming in ACS50 ACS55 ACS150 ACS310 ACS350 ACS355 ACS550 ACH550 and R1 R4 OINT SINTboards 3AFE68735190 English available on the Internet go to www abb com and enter the code in the Search field Replacement The drive intermediate circuit employs
431. urrent parameter backup 5041 Parameter backup doesn t fit into memory 5042 Selected parameter set can t be found in the current parameter backup 5043 No start inhibit was granted 5044 Parameter backup versions do not match 5050 Parameter upload was aborted 5051 File error was detected 5052 Parameter upload attempt has failed 5060 Parameter download was aborted 5062 Parameter download attempt has failed 5070 Panel backup memory write error was detected 5071 Panel backup memory read error was detected 5080 Operation is not allowed because the drive is not in local mode 5081 Operation is not allowed because a fault is active 5083 Operation is not allowed because parameter lock is not open 5084 Operation is not allowed because drive is busy try again 5085 Download is not allowed because drive types are incompatible 5086 Download is not allowed because drive models are incompatible 5087 Download is not allowed because parameter sets do not match 5088 Operation failed because a drive memory error was detected 5089 Download failed because a CRC error was detected 5090 Download failed because a data processing error was detected 5091 Operation failed because a parameter error was detected 5092 Download failed because parameter sets do not match Diagnostics ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 271 Maintenance WARNING Read ch
432. user load curve load torque see user load curve loading package version parameter 155 LOC local control indication on Assistant Control Panel 49 indication on Basic Control Panel 68 Index ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual local control mode lock parameter 130 lock control panel access IP54 36 drive control at local control panel 130 parameters 129 loggers see load analyzer low frequency PFC parameters 191 lugs for R6 power cables 287 ring crimp on 287 terminal 288 M macros SWING c chi horum eb ERR AERA 79 ABB standard 78 alternate 80 he ee 82 motor potentiometer 81 s Eos ke ty ttm other 84 PID Control et ey ee 83 torque 85 user parameter sets 88 parameter default values 89 parameters not changed 77 magnetization identification 107 main menu Assistant Control Panel 50 Basic Control 69 mains see input power maintenance capacitors 275 control 275 h atisink
433. ut 2 programmable f drive aux voltage output see page 86 23 RO2A Default operation 24lRO2B Fault 1 gt 22 connected to 24 Fault gt 22 connected to 23 25 Relay output 3 programmable 26 Default operation 27 RO3B Auxiliary motor switched on gt 25 connected to 27 Analog ref and actual 11 2 Start stop manual PFC DI1 6 Input signals Run enable DI2 EXT1 EXT2 selection DI3 e Interlock 014 5 Output signals Jumper setting Analog output AO1 Frequency J1 Analog output AO2 Actual 1 Q 0 10 Relay output 1 Running 9 P 12 0 4 20 mA Relay output 2 Fault 1 or Relay output 3 Aux motor ON AM 0 10 V 2 0 4 20 mA NO Note Use the following switch on order 1 EXT1 EXT2 2 Run Enable 3 Start Application macros ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Torque Control macro 85 This macro provides parameter settings for applications that require torque control of the motor Control can also be switched to speed control To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 8 TORQUE CTRL Connection example x1 4 10 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen 142 External speed reference 1 0 10 V 3 AGND
434. ve TIMED FUNCTION 1 TIMED FUNCTION 2 Function 0 0 External reference 1 0 Constant speed 1 1202 0 1 Constant speed 2 1203 1 1 Constant speed 3 1204 2 51 2 3 4 If parameter 1201 15 18 TIMED FUNC 1 4 selects Constant speed 1 when this timed function 1 4 is not active and selects Constant speed 2 when it is active TIMED FUNCTION 1 4 Function 0 Constant speed 1 1202 1 Constant speed 2 1203 If parameter 1201 19 TIMED FUN1 amp 2 selects Constant speed 1 when neither timed function is active selects Constant speed 2 when only Timed function 1 is active selects Constant speed 3 when only Timed function 2 is active and selects Constant speed 4 when both Timed functions 1 and 2 are active TIMED FUNCTION 1 TIMED FUNCTION 2 Function 0 0 Constant speed 1 1202 1 0 Constant speed 2 1203 0 1 Constant speed 3 1204 1 1 Constant speed 4 1205 Parameters ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 123 Group 13 ANALOG INPUTS This group defines the limits and the filtering for analog inputs Code Description 1301 MINIMUM AI1 Defines the minimum value of the analog input Define value as a percent of the full analog signal range See example below The minimum analog input signal corresponds to 1104 REF1 MIN or 1107 REF2 MIN MINIMUM AI cannot be greater than MAXIMUM Al These paramet
435. ve uses feedback from an optional encoder This function requires the Pulse Encoder Interface Module OTAC 01 and an encoder Operation depends on the setting of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED The encoder provides improved speed feedback and improved low speed torque accuracy 9904 2 VECTOR TORQ The encoder provides improved speed feedback and improved low speed torque accuracy 9904 3 SCALAR SPEED The encoder provides speed feedback This is not closed loop speed regulation However using parameter 2608 SLIP COMP RATIO and an encoder improves steady state speed accuracy 5003 ENCODER FAULT Defines the drive operation if a failure is detected in communication between the encoder and the encoder interface module or between the module and the drive 1 FAULT The drive generates fault ENCODER ERR and the motor coasts to a stop 2 ALARM The drive generates alarm ENCODER ERR and operates as if parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE 0 DISABLE that is speed feedback is derived from the internal motor model 5010 Z PLS ENABLE Enables disables the use of an encoder s Z pulse to define the motor shaft s zero position When enabled a Z pulse input resets parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE to zero to define the shaft s zero position This function requires an encoder that provides Z pulse signals 0 DISABLE Z pulse input is not present or ignored if present 1 ENABLE A Z pulse input resets para
436. ves profile EFB STATUS WORD See parameter 5320 Name Value Description Correspond to states boxes in the state diagram RDY_ON READY TO SWITCH ON NOT READY TO SWITCH ON RDY_RUN READY TO OPERATE OFF1 ACTIVE RDY_REF OPERATION ENABLED OPERATION INHIBITED TRIPPED FAULT No fault OFF_2 STA OFF2 INACTIVE OFF2 ACTIVE OFF_3 STA OFF3 INACTIVE OFF3 ACTIVE SWC_ON_INHIB SWITCH ON INHIBIT ACTIVE SWITCH ON INHIBIT NOT ACTIVE ALARM Alarm See section Alarm listing on page 267 for details on alarms No alarm AT_SETPOINT OPERATING Actual value equals within tolerance limits the reference value Actual value is outside tolerance limits not equal to reference value REMOTE Drive control location REMOTE EXT1 or EXT2 Drive control location LOCAL ABOVE_LIMIT Supervised parameter s value gt supervision high limit Bit remains 1 until supervised parameter s value lt supervision low limit See Group 32 SUPERVISION Supervised parameter s value lt supervision low limit Bit remains 0 until supervised parameter s value gt supervision high limit See Group 32 SUPERVISION EXT CTRL LOC External control location 2 EXT2 selected External control location 1 EXT1 selected EXT RUN ENABLE External Run Enable signal received
437. witching 280 temperature 280 derivation time PID parameter 171 derivation time parameter 141 device overtemperature fault code 261 diagnostics ea ee Oda als 259 EFB 212 FBA COMM uc 245 digital cable requirements 300 digital input at fault history parameters 114 connections 28 specifications 29 status data 109 digital output connections 28 specifications 299 dimensions drive 303 drive outside os nove ea 304 25 28 direction control parameter 116 direction of rotation Assistant Control Panel 49 53 Basic Control Panel 68 70 display format PID parameter 171 ri ess aa oe ee es 308 document 325 download parameter sets application 64 64 64 drive EFB comm installation 204 module installation 240 id faultcode 2 hs hed aden a
438. word of reference 2 Supported only by DCU profile i e when 5305 ECB CTRL PROFILE setting is DCU profile Embedded fieldbus 222 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual For the Modbus protocol drive parameters in Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL report the parameter mapping to 4xxxx Registers Code Description 5310 EFB PAR 10 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40005 5311 EFB PAR 11 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40006 5312 EFB PAR 12 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40007 5313 EFB PAR 13 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40008 5314 EFB PAR 14 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40009 5315 EFB PAR 15 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40010 5316 EFB PAR 16 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40011 5317 EFB PAR 17 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40012 5318 EFB PAR 18 Sets additional delay in milliseconds before the ACS550 begins transmitting response to the master request 5319 EFB PAR 19 Holds a copy in hex of the CONTROL WORD Modbus register 40001 5320 EFB PAR 20 Holds a copy in hex of the STATUS WORD Modbus register 40004 Except where restricted by the drive all parameters are available for both reading and writing The parameter writes are verified for the correct value and for a valid register addresses Note Parameter writes th
439. ws the process reference If demand continues to increase PFC adds additional auxiliary pumps using the same process When demand drops such that the first pump speed falls below a minimum limit user defined by a frequency limit the PFC control automatically stops an auxiliary pump The PFC also increases the speed of the first pump to account for the auxiliary pump s missing output An Interlock function when enabled identifies off line out of service motors and the PFC control skips to the next available motor in the sequence An Autochange function when enabled and with the appropriate switchgear equalizes duty time between the pump motors Autochange periodically increments the position of each motor in the rotation the speed regulated motor becomes the last auxiliary motor the first auxiliary motor becomes the speed regulated motor etc Code Description 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference Applies only when at least one auxiliary constant speed motor is running Default value is 096 Example An ACS550 operates three parallel pumps that maintain water pressure in a pipe 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT sets a constant pressure reference that controls the pressure in the pipe The speed regulated pump operates alone at low water consumption levels As water consumption increases first one constant speed pump operates then the second As flow in
440. y parameter 2907 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 0 Resets the parameter Parameters 148 ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual Group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS This group defines situations that the drive should recognize as potential faults and defines how the drive should respond if the fault is detected Code Description 3001 lt FUNCTION Defines the drive response if the analog input signal drops below the fault limits and Al is used as the active reference source Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT as the Process or External PID controllers feedback or setpoint source Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 Group 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 or Group 42 EXT TRIM PID and the corresponding PID controller is active 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT and 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT set the fault limits 0 NOT SEL No response 1 FAULT Displays a fault 7 Al1 LOSS or 8 AI2 LOSS and the drive coasts to stop 2 CONST SP 7 Displays an alarm 2006 AI1 Loss or 2007 AI2 LOSS and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 3 LAST SPEED Displays an alarm 2006 AI1 LOSS or 2007 AI2 LOSS and sets speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds WARNING If you select CONST SP 7 or LAST SPEED make sure that continued operation is safe when the analog input signal is lost 3002 PANEL COMM ERR Defines the drive response to a control panel communication error 1 FA
441. y process variables parameter group 156 display selection parameters 156 display units parameters 157 275 manual 47 parameter lock parameter 129 pass code parameter 129 reference control parameter 117 signal max parameters 156 signal min parameters 156 control panel 48 m 49 assistants 57 battery 275 changed parameters mode 60 direction of rotation 49 53 display contrast 54 fault logger 61 fault mode 49 259 260 Mom PME 51 how to do common tasks 50 settings 67 main 50 operation 49 output 53 48 parameter backup mode 64 parameters 55 soft 48 Start Stop wana t then nitent 52 status line LOC REM arrow 49 time and date 62 Index ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual control panel
442. zes the key functions and displays on the Assistant Control Panel Use Status LED Green for normal operation If LED is flashing or red see section Diagnostic displays on page 259 LCD display Divided into three main areas a Status line variable depending on the mode of operation see section Status line on page 49 b Center variable in general shows signal and parameter values menus or lists Shows also faults and alarms c Bottom line shows current functions of the two soft keys and if enabled the clock display Soft key 1 Function depends on the context The text in the lower left corner of the LCD display indicates the function Soft key 2 Function depends on the context The text in the lower right corner of the LCD display indicates the function Up Scrolls up through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display Increments a value if a parameter is selected Increments the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted Holding the key down changes the value faster Down Scrolls down through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display Decrements a value if a parameter is selected Decrements the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted Holding the key down changes the value faster LOC REM

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

WD TV Live Hub Media Center User Manual  16B  Service Manual  EH-Q100E 取扱説明書  Preventive Maintenance Guidelines Small Bus, Van, Wagons  View User`s Manual  TDS REVEMASK  Robô aspirador de algerozes  Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 TABLE DES MATIERES Machines de 50/60  Siemens TK76K572GB coffee maker  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file